巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Phālana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. phāleti] splitting J.I,432 (dāru°); Vism.500 (vijjhana°). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】分离(splitting)。dāruphālana,【中】劈木头。Vism.500︰sūcimukhakhuradhārāhi vijjhanaphālanasadisaṁ dukkhaṁ uppajjati, 如受针刺及剃刀割裂之苦一样。。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】分离。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phāleti: {'def': '(phāl +e)(Caus. of phalati, phal; a variant is phāṭeti fr. sphaṭ), 打破，分离，切成碎片(to split, break, chop, in phrases)。【过】phālesi。【过分】phālita。【现分】phālenta。【独】phāletvā。【不】phāletuṁ。phaleyya(可能破裂)。gaṇḍaphālanaṁ karoti=gaṇḍaṁ phāleti﹐破痈。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of phalati, phal; a variant is phāṭeti fr. sphaṭ, which is identical with *(s)phal] to split, break, chop, in phrases 1. kaṭṭhaṁ phāleti to chop sticks (for firewood) Vin.I,31; J.II,144; Pv.II,951, besides which the phrase kaṭṭhaṁ *phāṭeti. 2. sīsaṁ (muddhā) sattadhā phāleti (cp. adhipāteti & phalati) DhA.I,17 (perhaps better with v. l. phal°), 134. -- 3. (various:) A.I,204=S.II,88; J.II,398; Nd2 483; Vism.379 (kucchiṁ; DhA.IV,133 (hadayaṁ). -- pp. phālita. Caus. II. phālāpeti to cause to split open J.III,121; Miln.157 (v. l. phāḷāp°). (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(phāl + e), 打破，分离，切成碎片。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 phālita。【现分】 ~lenta。【独】 ~letvā。【不】 ~etuŋ。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phālibhaddaka: {'def': 'is spurious spelling for pāli° at J.II,162 (v. l. pātali-bhaddaka). Cp. Prk. phālihadda (=pāribhadra Pischel, Gr. § 208). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phālima: {'def': '(adj.) [either fr. Caus. of phal1 (phāleti), or fr. sphar (cp. phārita, i. e. expanded), or fr. sphāy (swell, increase, cp. sphāra & sphārī bhavati to open, expand)] expanding, opening, blossoming in cpd. aggi-nikāsi-phālima paduma J.III,320 (where Cy. explns by phālita vikasita). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāliphulla: {'def': '[either Intensive of phulla, or Der. fr. pariphulla in form phaliphulla] in full blossom M.I,218; J.I,52. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phālita: {'def': '[=Sk. sphārita, sphar] 1. made open, expanded, spread J.III,320 (+vikasita). -- 2. split [fr. phāleti phal], split open Vism.262=VbhA.245 (°haliddi-vaṇṇa). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāruka: {'def': '(adj.) at VvA.288 is not clear; meaning something like “bitter,” combd with kasaṭa; v. l. pāru°. Probably=phārusaka. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāruliya: {'def': 'at Vbh.350 (in thambha-exegesis) is faulty spelling for phārusiya (nt.) harshness, unkindness, as evidence of id. passage at VbhA.469 shows (with expln “pharusassa puggalassa bhāvo phārusiyaṁ”). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phārusaka: {'def': '【中】刺篱木（一种小的、常为灌木状的、雌雄异株的乔木(Flacourtia indica) 原产马达加斯加和亚洲南部，在热带地区作为绿篱植物栽培，果深红色，微酸，味似李子——亦称雷蒙子 (ramontchi)）。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹pharusa, cp.梵pārusaka),【中】刺篱木(sweet lovi-lovi﹐一种小的、常为灌木状的、雌雄异株的乔木 (Flacourtia indica) 原产马达加斯加和亚洲南部，在热带地区作为绿篱植物栽培，果深红色，微酸，味似李子——亦称雷蒙子 (ramontchi))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pharusa, cp. Sk. *pāruṣaka Mvyut 103, 143] 1. a certain flower, the (bitter) fruit of which is used for making a drink Vin.I,246; Vv 3331=DhA.III,316. ‹-› 2. N. of one of Indra’s groves J.VI,278, similarly Vism.424; VbhA.439. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāsu: {'def': '【阳】安逸，安慰。【形】舒服的，容易的。phāsuka,【形】愉快的。phāsuvihāra﹐(安)乐住。aphāsuka, 不愉快的(unpleasant, uncomfortable, not well)。Sk. *sparwuka (cp. Pischel § 62), which would be a der. fr. sprw in same meaning as phassa2 (“lovely”).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】安逸，安慰。【形】舒服的，容易的。 ~ka,【形】愉快的，方便的。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'at Miln.146 (cp. p. 425) “bhaggā phāsū” is un certain reading, it is not phāsuka; it may represent a pāsa snare, sling. The likeness with phāsukā bhaggā (lit.) of J.I,493 is only accidental. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adj.) [etym.? Trenckner, Notes 82 (on Miln.1417: corr. J.P.T.S. 1908, 136 which refers it to Miln.1315) suggests connection with Vedic prāśu enjoying, one who enjoys, i.e. a guest, but this etym. is doubtful; cp. phāsuka. A key to its etym. may be found in the fact that it never occurs by itself in form phāsu, but either in composition or as °ka] pleasant, comfortable; only neg. a° in phrase aphāsu-karoti to cause discomfort to (Dat.) Vin.IV,290; and in cpds. °kāma anxious for comfort, desirous of (others) welfare D.III,164; °vihāra comfort, ease Vin.II,127; D.I,204; Dhs.1348=Miln.367 (cp. DhsA.404); Miln.14; Vism.33; VbhA.270; PvA.12. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāsuka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. phāsu. Cp. Prk. phāsuya; Acc. to Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 208 Jain Sk. prāsuka is a distortion of P. phāsuka. Perhaps phāsu is abstracted from phāsuka] pleasant, convenient, comfortable J.III,343; IV,30; DhA.II,92; PvA.42. --aphāsuka unpleasant, uncomfortable, not well J.II,275, 395; DhA.I,28; II,21. -- Note. It seems probable that phāsuka represents a Sk. *sparśuka (cp. Pischel § 62), which would be a der. fr. spṛś in same meaning as phassa2 (“lovely”). This would confirm the suggestion of phāsu being a secondary formation. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāsukā: {'def': '(梵pārwukā), phāsulikā(‹phāsuḷi肋骨),【阴】肋骨、肋状物(rib, only in cpd. upphāsulika)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk *pārśukā & Ved. pārśva, see passa2] a rib, only in pl. phāsukā Vin.I,74 (upaḍḍha° bhañjitabbā), in phrase sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā J.I,493 (lit.), which is fig. applied at Dh.154 (expld as “sabbā avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā” at DhA.III,128), with which cp. bhaggā phāsū at Miln.146; both the latter phrases prob. of diff. origin. -- (adj.) (-°) in phrase mahā°passa the flank (lit. the side of the great ribs) J.I,164, 179; III,273; abs. mahā° with great ribs J.V,42; uggata° with prominent ribs PvA.68 (for upphāsulika adj. Pv.II,11). -- in cpds. as phāsuka°, e. g. °aṭṭhīni the rib-bones (of which there are 24) Vism.254 (v. l. pāsuka°); VbhA.237; °dvaya pair of ribs Vism.252; VbhA.235. -- See also pāsuka, pāsuḷa & the foll. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'phāsulikā, 【阴】肋骨，侧面。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phāsulikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. phāsuḷi] rib, only in cpd. upphāsulika (adj.) Pv.II,11. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāsuḷā: {'def': '[for phāsukā] rib S.II,255 (phāsuḷ-antarikā). (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(for phāsukā),肋骨(rib S.II,255 (phāsuḷ-antarikā))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phāsuḷī: {'def': '(cp. phāsukā & phāsuḷā),肋骨(a rib M.I,80.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. phāsukā & phāsuḷā] a rib M.I,80. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāti: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. sphāti, fr. sphāy, sphāyate to swell, increase (Idg. *spē(i), as in Lat. spatium, Ohg. spuot, Ags. spēd=E. speed; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. spatium), pp. sphīta=P. phīta] swelling, increase J.II,426 (=vaḍḍhi); Vism.271 (vuddhi+). Usually combd with kṛ, as phāti-kamma increase, profit, advantage Vin.II,174; VbhA.334 & phāti-karoti to make fat, to increase, to use to advantage M.I,220=A.V,347; A.III,432. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phātikamma: {'def': '【中】恢复，增加。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】恢复，增加，增进。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phāṇita: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. phāṇita] 1. juice of the sugar cane, raw sugar, molasses (ucchu-rasaṁ gahetvā kataphāṇitaṁ VvA.180) Vin.II,177; D.I,141; Vv 3525; 404; J.I,33, 120, 227; Miln.107; DhA.II,57. phāṇitassa puṭaṁ a basket of sugar S.I,175; J.IV,366; DhA.IV,232. -- 2. (by confusion or rightly?) salt J.III,409 (in expln of aloṇika=phāṇita-virahita). --odaka sugar water J.III,372, --puṭa sugar basket J.IV,363. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】甘蔗汁，糖蜜(juice of the sugar cane, raw sugar, molasses)。phāṇitapuṭa,【阳】叶制的甜蜜容器。Pāci.IV,348(CS:p.466)︰Phāṇitaṁ nāma ucchumhā nibbattaṁ.(糖蜜︰从甘蔗榨汁。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】甜蜜，糖蜜。 ~puṭa, 【阳】叶制的甜蜜容器。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phīta: {'def': '【形】丰裕的，繁荣的，富有的(opulent, prosperous, rich)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】丰裕的，繁荣的，富有的。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of sphāy, cp. Sk. sphīta & see phāti] opulent, prosperous, rich; in the older texts only in stock phrase iddha ph. bahujana (rich & prosperous & well-populated) D.I,211 (of the town Nālandā); II,146 (of Kusāvatī); M.I,377; (of Nālandā) II.71 (of country); S.II,107 (fig. of brahmacariyaṁ; with bahujañña for °jana); A.III,215 (of town). By itself & in other combn in the Jātakas, e. g. J.IV,135 (=samiddha); VI,355 (v. l. pīta). With iddha & detailed description of all classes of the population (instead of bahujana) of a town Miln.330. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pi: {'def': '(indecl.) [the enclitic form of api (cp. api 2a); on similarities in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 143] emphatic particle, as prefix only in pidahati and pilandhati, where api° also is found (cp. api 1b). -- 1. also, and also, even so D.I,1; Vin.IV,139 (cara pi re get away with you: see re); J.I,151, 278. -- 2. even, just so; with numbers or num. expressions “altogether, in all, just that many” J.I,151; III,275; IV,142. -- cattāro pi J.III,51; ubho pi J.I,223; sabbe pi Sn.52; J.I,280. ‹-› 3. but, however, on the other hand, now (continuing a story) J.I,208; IV,2. -- 4. although, even if J.II,110 (ciram pi kho . . . ca although for a long time . . . yet). -- 5. perhaps, it is time that, probably Sn.43; J.I,151; II,103. -- 6. pi . . . pi in correlation (like api . . . api): (a) both . . . and; very often untranslatable Sn.681 (yadā pi . . . tadā pi when . . . then), 808 (diṭṭhā pi sutā pi); J.I,222 (jale pi thale pi); (b) either . . . or J.I,150; II,102. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】(当 api 与前一词结合的词形)也，以及，虽然如此，但是，然而，或许，也许。pi ce﹐即使、尽管。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】（当 api 与前一词结合的词形）也，以及，虽然如此，但是，然而，或许，也许。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piccha: {'def': '【中】1.尾羽毛，2.(任何类型的)树胶。picchila,【形】光滑的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. piccha & puccha tail, to Lat. pinna, E. fin. Ger. finne] tail-feather, esp. of the peacock Vin.I,186 (mora°). -- dve° (& de°) having two tail-feathers J.V,339, 341 (perhaps to be taken as “wing” here, cp. Halāyudha 2, 84=pakṣa). Cp. piñcha & piñja. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 尾羽毛，2. （任何类型的）树胶。 ~chila, 【形】光滑的。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Picchila: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. picchila] slippery Vism.264; VbhA.247 (lasikā=p-kuṇapaṁ); DhA.III,4 (°magga). (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Picchita: {'def': 'in su° J.V,197 is not clear, C. expl5 by suphassita, i. e. pleasing, beautiful, desirable, thus dividing su-picch°. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Picu: {'def': '² [etym. unknown, prob. Non-Aryan] a wild animal, said to be a kind of monkey J.VI,537. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】棉花。 ~paṭala, 【中】一薄层的棉花。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Class. Sk. picu] cotton Vin.I,271; usually in cpds, either as kappāsa° S.V,284, 443, or tūla° S.V,284, 351 (T. thula°), 443; J.V,480 (T. tula°). --paṭala membrane or film of cotton Vism.445. --manda the Nimb or Neem tree Azadizachta Indica Pv IV.16 (cp. PvA.220); the usual P. form is pucimanda (q. v.). (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】棉花。picupaṭala,【中】一薄层的棉花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pidahana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. api+dhā, cp. apidahana] covering up, shutting, closing Vism.20; DhA.IV,85 (=thakana). (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】关闭。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】关闭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pidahati: {'def': '(api + dhā + a), 关上，关，覆盖。【过】 pidahi。【过分】 pidahita,pihita。【独】 pidahitvā, pidhāya。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(api+dhā+a), 关上，关，覆盖。【过】pidahi。【过分】pidahita, pihita。【独】pidahitvā, pidhāya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pidalaka: {'def': '[etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests diminutiveformation fr. Sk. bidala split bamboo] a small stick, skewer Vin.II,116, cp. Bdhgh on p. 317: “daṇḍakathina-ppamāṇena kaṭasārakassa pariyante paṭisaṁharitvā duguṇa-karaṇa.” See also Vin Texts III,94.Pidahati [api+dhā, cp. apidahati & Prk. piṇidhattae= Sk. apinidhātave] to cover, to close, conceal, shut M.I,117, 380 (dvāraṁ); J.I,292; III,26; V,389; Miln.139 (vajjaṁ); DhA.I,396; II,4, 85; IV,197 (ūruṁ); Sdhp.321; aor. pidahi J.IV,308 (kaṇṇe); ger. pidahitvā Pv.II,76 (dvāraṁ); Vism.182 (nāsaṁ); DA.I,136, pidhatvā Th.2, 480, & pidhāya J.I,150 (dvāraṁ), 243 (id.); ThA.286; DhA.II,199 (dvārāni). -- Pass. pithīyati; pp. pihita (q. v.). The opp. of p. is vivarati. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pidhara: {'def': '[fr. api+dhṛ] a stick (or rag?) for scraping (or wiping?) Vin.II,141 (avalekhana°), 221 (id.). Meaning doubtful. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pidhāna: {'def': '【中】盖子，罩子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】盖子，罩子。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [=pidahana] cover J.VI,349. --°phalaka covering board Vism.261 (where KhA in same passage reads paṭikujjana-phalaka)=VbhA.244. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pihaka: {'def': '【中】脾脏。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. plihaṇaka & plīhan (also Vedic plāśi?), Av. sp∂r∂Qan; Gr. splήn, splάgxna entrails; Lat. lien spleen] the spleen M.III,90; Sn.195; J.V,49. In detail at Vism.257; VbhA.240. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】脾脏(spleen)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pihana: {'def': '﹐Pihanā(‹piheti)﹐羡慕(envying)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. piheti] envying Dhs.1059; SnA 459 (°sīla). (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pihayati: {'def': '(pih + ya), 需要，渴望，努力。【过】 pihayi。【过分】 pihāyita。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pih渴爱+ya), 需要，渴望，努力。【过】pihayi。【过分】pihāyita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Piheti [cp. Vedic spṛhayati, spṛh] 1. to desire, long for (with Acc.) Vin.II,187; S.II,242 (pihāyittha 2nd pl. aor.); J.I,401; IV,198 (pattheti+); Th.2, 454; Vv 8445 (=piyāyati VvA.349). -- 2. to envy (with Gen. of person & object), covet M.I,504; S.I,202, 236; Th.1, 62; Sn.823, 947; It.36; Dh.94 (=pattheti DhA 177), 181 (id. III,227), 365 (ppr. pihayaṁ=labhaṁ patthento DhA.IV,97); J.I,197 (aor. mā pihayi); Miln.336. -- pp. pihayita. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pihayita: {'def': '[pp. of pihayati] desired, envied, always combd with patthita Miln.182, 351. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pihita: {'def': '[pp. of pidahati] covered, closed, shut, obstructed (opp. vivaṭa) M.I,118; III,61; S.I,40; A.II,104; Nd1 149; J.I,266; Miln.102 (dvāra), 161; Vism.185; DA.I,182 (°dvāra). (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pidahati 的【过分】)。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pidahati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pihā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. spṛh, cp. Sk. spṛhā] envy, desire M.I,304; J.I,197; Vism.392 (Bhagavantaṁ disvā Buddha-bhāvāya pihaṁ anuppādetvā thita-satto nāma n’atthi). -- adj. apiha without desire S.I,181. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹sprh, 梵sprhā)【阴】羡慕，欲望。apiha【形】无欲望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pihālu: {'def': '【形】妄羡的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. spṛhālu, fr. spṛh, but perhaps=Ved. piyāru malevolent. On y›h cp. P. paṭṭhayati for paṭṭhahati] covetous, only neg. a° S.I,187=Th.1, 1218; Sn.852; Nd1 227. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】妄羡的。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pihāyanā: {'def': '(f.)=pihanā Nett 18. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】欲望，亲爱，锺爱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】欲望，亲爱，钟爱。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pika: {'def': '【阳】杜鹃鸟(cuckoo)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】杜鹃鸟。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pilaka: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā] a boil Sn.p. 124 (piḷaka, v. l. pilaka); Vism.35 (pīḷaka); DhA.I,319 (v. l. piḷaka).‹-› See also piḷakā. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pilakkha: {'def': '【阳】糙叶榕（一种有粗糙叶片的无花果树 (Ficusinfectoria)，果不可食）。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】糙叶榕(一种有粗糙叶片的无花果树 (Ficus infectoria)，果不可食)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic plakṣa] the wave-leaved fig tree, Ficus infectoria Vin.IV,35; DA.I,81. As pilakkhu [cp. Prk. pilakkhu Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 105] at S.V,96; J.III,24, 398. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pilandha: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. pilandhati] adorning or adorned Miln.336, 337. Cp. apiḷandha. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pilandhana: {'def': '& Piḷandhana (nt.) [=apilandhana] putting on ornaments, embellishment, ornament, trinkets A.I,254, 257; III,16; Th.2, 74; Vv 6417 (ḷ); J.I,386 (ḷ); V,205; VbhA.230 (°vikati; ḷ); VvA.157 (ḷ), 167 (ḷ); PvA.(ḷ); Sdhp.243. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】装饰，穿著，修饰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】装饰，穿着，修饰。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pilandhati: {'def': '[see apilandhati, api+nah] to adorn, put on, bedeck Miln.337; J.V,400. Caus. II. pilandhāpeti J.I,386. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(api+nah+a), 装饰，穿上。【过】pilandhi。【过分】pilanhita。【独】pilandhiya, pilandhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(api + nah + a), 装饰，穿上。【过】 ~ndhi。【过分】 ~dhita。【独】 ~dhiya, ~dhitvā。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pilava: {'def': '& Plava [fr. plu, cp. Vedic plava boat, Russ. plov ship] 1. swimming, flowing, floating J.V,408 (suplav-atthaṁ in order to swim through well=plavana C.). -- 2. a kind of duck [so Epic Sk.] Vv 35⁸ (cp. VvA.163); J.V,420. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pilavana: {'def': '& Palavana (nt.) [fr. plu] swimming, plunging J.V,409 (pl°). (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pilavati: {'def': 'plavati (plav + a), 飘浮，很快地移动，游泳。【过】 plavi。【过分】 plavita。【独】 plavitvā。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Plavati [cp. Vedic plavati; plu, as in Lat. pluo to rain, pluvius rain, Gr. plέw swim, plu/nw wash; Ohg. flouwen etc. to rinse=E. flow] to move quickly (of water), to swim, float, sway to & fro Th.1, 104; Miln.377; VvA.163; DhsA.76. As plavati at J.I,336 (verse); Dh.334 (v. l. SS; T. palavati). As palavati at Th.1, 399. -- See also uppalavati (uppluta), opilāpeti, paripalavati. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'plavati (plav+a), 飘浮，很快地移动，游泳。【过】plavi。【过分】plavita。【独】plavitvā。cf. Uplavati (飘浮)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pilindavaccha: {'def': '（比库名）毕陵达瓦差，（古音译：）毕陵伽婆蹉', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Pillaka: {'def': '【阳】崽子。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. *pillaka] the young of an animal, sometimes used as term for a child J.II,406 (sūkara°); DhA.IV,134 (as an abusive term; vv. ll. SS kipillaka; gloss K pitucūḷaka, BB cūḷakaniṭṭha); Sdhp.164, 165. -- As pillika at J.I,487 (godha°, v. l. BB godha-kippillika). (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】小动物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pilotikā: {'def': '【阴】碎布，旧衣。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】碎布，旧衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. plota (BR=prota), Suśr. I.15, 3; 16, 7 & passim] a small piece of cloth, a rag, a bandage Vin.I,255, 296 (khoma° cp. Vin. Texts II.156); M.I,141 (chinna-°o-dhammo laid bare or open); S.II,28 (id.), 219 (paṭa°); J.I,220; II,145; III,22 (jiṇṇa°), 511; VI,383; Miln.282; Vism.328; KhA 55; DhA.I,221 (tela° rags dipped in oil); VvA.5; PvA.185; -- As m. at J.IV,365. The BSk. forms vary; we read chinna-pilotika at AvŚ I.198; MVastu III,63; pilotikā (or °ka) at MVastu III,50, 54. Besides we have ploti in karmaploti (pūrvikā k.) Divy 150 etc. AvŚ I.421. --khaṇḍa a piece of rag DhA.IV,115; ThA.269; PvA.171. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pilāla: {'def': 'at J.I,382 (°piṇḍa+mattikā-piṇḍa) is doubtful. Fausböll suggests mistake for palala straw, so also Ed. Müller, P.Gr. 6. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pilāpanatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. plu, see pilavati] superficiality Dhs.1349, cp. DhsA.405. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pindiyālopa: {'def': '[piṇḍi+ālopa] a morsel of food Vin.I,58 (°bhojana), 96 (id.); A.II,27; It.102. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pināsa: {'def': '【阳】（医学）卡他，粘膜炎。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】黏膜炎(catarrh)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. pīnasa] cold in the head, catarrh, in enumn of illnesses under dukkha, at Nd2 304Q ≈ (kāsa, sāsa, pināsa, etc.). (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pipati: {'def': '[dial. form for pibati, pivati, usually restricted to Gāthā Dial., cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 132] to drink, only in imper. pres. pipa M.I,316; S.I,459, and ppr. pipaṁ J.V,255, Gen. pl. pipataṁ Sn.398. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pipi: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pā, see pivati] drinking (?) in su° good to drink (?) J.VI,326 (v. l. BB sucimant). Or is it “flowing” (cp. Vedic pipiṣvat overflowing)? (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pipillikā: {'def': 'pipīlikā,【阴】蚂蚁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'pipīlikā, 【阴】蚂蚁。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pippala: {'def': '[for the usual P. pipphalī, Sk. pippalī] pepper Vin.I,201, cp. Vin. Texts II.46. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pipphala: {'def': 'pipphalaka, 【中】剪刀。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. pippala, on ph for p see pipphalī] the fruit of Ficus religiosa, the holy fig tree J.VI,518 (Kern’s reading, Toev. s. v. for T. maddhu-vipphala, C. reads madhuvipphala & explns by madhuraphala). (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pipphalaka,【中】剪刀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pipphalaka: {'def': '(nt.?) [etym.? BR give Sk. *pippalaka in meaning “thread for sewing”] scissors (? so ed.) DA.I,70. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pipphalī: {'def': '(f.) [with aspirate ph for p, as in Sk. pippalī, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 62. See also pippala. Etym. loan words are Gr. pέperi=Lat. piper=E. pepper, Ger. pfeffer] long pepper S.V,79; J.III,85; Vv 436; DhA.I,258 (°guhā Npl.); IV,155. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】长椒（亚洲东部的一种胡椒 (Piper longum) 的果实，组成长的穗状花序，磨碎后产生一种不如普通胡椒那样辛辣但略甜更香的调味料）。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵pippalī),【阴】荜拨，荜茇(long pepper，亚洲东部的一种胡椒科植物(Piper longum) 的果实，不如普通胡椒那样辛辣，但略甜更香的调味料。性辛热，归胃、大肠经。温中散寒，下气止痛。用於脘腹冷痛，呕吐，泄泻，偏头痛，疝气，外治牙痛。)《南海寄归内法传》卷第三：「若觉有冷投椒姜荜[卄/(乏-之+友)]。若知是风。著胡葱荆芥。医方论曰。诸辛悉皆动风。唯乾姜非也。」(T54.224.3)「姜椒荜茇，旦咽而风冷全祛。」(T54.225.2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pipāsin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pipāsā] thirsty D.II,265. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pipāsita: {'def': '(pivāsati 的【过分】) 已口渴。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pivāsati 的【过分】) 已口渴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of pipāsati, Desid. fr. pā, cp. pipāsā] thirsty S.I,143; II,110 (surā°); J.VI,399; Miln.318 (kilantatasita-p.); Vism.262; PvA.127; Sdhp.151. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pipāsā: {'def': '(desid. form. fr. pā, pibati›pipati, lit. desire to drink),【阴】1.口渴(thirst﹐=udaka-pipāsā)；饥饿khudā (hunger) (khuppipāsā); or jighacchā. 2.饥渴(longing (for food))。3.渴求(desire, craving, longing (avigata°); (pipāsavinaya))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Desid. form. fr. pā, pibati›pipati, lit. desire to drink] 1. thirst Nd2 443 (=udaka-pipāsā); Miln.318; VbhA.196 (in comparison); PvA.23, 33, 67 sq.; Sdhp.288. Often combd with khudā (hunger) e. g. Sn.52, 436 (khup°); PvA.67; or jighacchā (id.), e. g. M.I,10; S.I,18; A.II,143, 153; Miln.304. -- 2. longing (for food), hunger J.II,319. -- 3. desire, craving, longing D.III,238 (avigata°); S.III,7, 108, 190; IV,387; A.II,34 (pipāsavinaya; expld at Vism.293); IV,461 sq. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】口渴。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pipīlikā: {'def': '(f.) & pipillika [cp. Vedic pipīlikā, pipīlaka & pipīlika; BSk. pipīlaka AvŚ II.130 (kunta°). See also kipillikā] ant J.III,276 (BB kipillikā); Sdhp.23; as pipillikā at J.I,202. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pire: {'def': 'at Vin.IV,139 is to be separated (cara pi re get away with you), both pi and re acting as part. of exclamation. The C. expln (p. 362) by “pire (Voc.?)=para, amāmaka” is an artificial construction. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pisana: {'def': 'piṁsana,【中】研磨，磨成粉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. piṁsati?] grinding, powder see upa°. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'piŋsana, 【中】研磨，磨成粉。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pisati: {'def': '[=piṁsati] to grind, crush, destroy; Pass. pisīyati to perish VvA.335 (+vināseti). -- pp. pisita. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pis + a), Piŋsati (pis + ŋ-a), 磨擦，压破。【过】 piŋsi。【过分】 piŋsita。【独】 piŋsetvā。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pis磨擦+a), Piṁsati (pis磨擦+ṁ-a), 磨擦，压破。【过】piṁsi。【过分】piṁsita。【独】piṁsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pisita: {'def': '【中】肉。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】肉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pisodara: {'def': '[pṛṣa, i. e. pṛṣant+udara, see pasata1] having a spotted belly KhA 107 (ed. compares pṛṣodarādi Pāṇini VI,3, 109). (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pista: {'def': '[pp. of pisati] crushed, ground Vism.260 (=piṭṭha KhA id. p.); VbhA.243. Pisīyati Pass. of pisati (q. v.). (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pisuṇa: {'def': '【形】中伤，挑拨离间(backbiting, calumnious, malicious)。pisuṇāvācā,【阴】两舌，挑拨的话。两舌：台语liong2 sih8，离间，嚼舌(哺舌poo7 sih8)，讲长短脚话kong2 tng5 te2 kha ue7。「沙门瞿昙舍弃中伤语(pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ)、戒除(paṭivirato)两舌(pisuṇāya vācāya)，不此处闻彼处告，以离间此处之诸人；又不彼处闻此处告，以离间彼处之诸人。」 “‘Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato samaṇo Gotamo, ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya《梵网经》D.1./I,4.。yāya vācāya yassa taṁ vācaṁ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṁ, parassa ca suññabhāvaṁ karoti, sā pisuṇā vācā. (DA.1(CS:p.1.72) Suññabhāvanti pītivirahitatāya rittataṁ. Sā pisuṇavācāti yāyaṁ yathāvuttā saddasabhāvā vācā, sā piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇavācāti niruttinayena atthamāha. Pisatīti vā pisuṇā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho. Dṭ.1(CS:p.1.119) Cp. pesuna.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic piśuṇa, see etym. under pisāca] backbiting, calumnious, malicious M.III,33, 49; J.I,297; Pug.57; PvA.15, 16. Usually combd with vācā malicious speech, slander, pisuṇavācā and pisuṇāvācā D.I,4, 138; III,70 sq., 171, 232, 269; M.I,362; III,23; adj. pisuṇāvāca & M.III,22, 48; S.II,167; Pug.39. -- Cp. pesuna. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】中伤，怀恶意的言谈。 ~ṇāvācā, 【阴】挑拨的话。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pisāca: {'def': 'pisācaka, 【阳】顽皮的丑小鬼，小妖。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Pisācaka﹐Pesāca(梵piwācāh﹐piwācaka),【阳】小妖(a demon, goblin, sprite)，音译：毕舍遮、毘舍闍鬼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. piśāca & Vedic piśāci; to same root as pisuna=Vedic piśuna, & Lat. piget, Ohg. fēhida enmity=Ags. faehp (“feud”), connected with root of Goth. fijan to hate; thus pisāca=fiend] 1. a demon, goblin, sprite D.I,54 (T. pesācā, v. l. pisācā, expld at DA.I,164 as “pisācā mahanta-mahantā sattā ti vadati”), 93; S.I,209; A.III,69; Ud.5; J.I,235; IV,495 (yakkha p. peta); Miln.23; VvA.335; PvA.198; Sdhp.313. -- f. pisācī J.V,442. -- 2. [like pisāca-loha referring to the Paiśāca district, hailing from that tribe, cp. the term malla in same meaning and origin] a sort of acrobat, as pl. pisācā “tumblers” Miln.191. --nagara town of goblins (cp. yakkha-nagara) Vism.531. --loha [connected with the tribe of the Paiśāca’s: Mhbh VII.4819; cp. Paiśācī as one of the Prākrit dialects: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 3] a kind of copper VbhA.63 (eight varieties). (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pisācaka: {'def': '=pisāca, only in cpd. paṁsu° mud-sprite J.IV,380, 496; DA.I,287; DhA.II,26. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pisācillikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pisāca] a tree-goblin Vin.I,152; II,115, 134; SnA 357; cp. Vin. Texts I.318. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pisācin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pisāca, lit. having a demon] only f. pisācinī a witch (=pisācī) Th.1, 1151. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pisīla: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. piśāla] a dial. expression for pātī or patta “bowl” M III 235 (passage quite misunderstood by Neumann in his trsln III,414). (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pitar: {'def': '[Vedic pitṛ, pitar-; cp. Gr. patήr; Lat. pater, Juppiter, Dies-piter=*zeu\\s patήr; Goth. fadar=Ger. vater= E. father; Oir. athir etc. to onomat. syllable *pa-pa, cp. tāta & mātā] father. -- Cases: sg. Nom. pitā S.I,182; Dh.43; J.V,379; SnA 423; Acc. pitaraṁ Dh.294; & pituṁ Cp. II.93; Instr. pitarā J.III,37, pitunā, petyā J.V,214; Dat. Gen. pitu M.III,176; J.IV,137; VI,365, 589; & pituno Vin.I,17 (cp. Prk. piuṇo); Abl. pitarā J.V,214; Loc. pitari. -- pl. Nom. pitaro Sn.404; J.IV,1; PvA.38, 54 (mātā°); Acc. pitaro PvA.17, pitare, & pitū Th.2, 433; Instr. pitarehi & pitūhi; Dat. Gen. pitunnaṁ J.III,83; (mātā°); VI,389 (id.); Pv.II,84; pitūnaṁ It.110; Loc. pitusu Th.2, 499; J.I,152 (mātā°); and pitūsu PvA.3 (mātā°). Further: Abl. sg. pitito by the father’s side D.I,113 (+mātito); A.III,151; J.V,214. -- A.I,62, 132, 138 sq.; Sn.296, 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṁ); Nd2 441 (=yo so janako); J.I,412 (=tāta); V,20; VbhA.108 (where pretty popular etym. is given with “piyāyatī ti pitā”), 154 (in simile). ‹-› Of Brahmā: D.I,18, cp. DA.I,112; of Inda J.V,153. There is sometimes a distinction made between the father as such and the grandfather (or ancestors in Gen.) with culla° (cūḷa°), i. e. little and mahā° i. e. grand-father, e. g. at J.I,115 (+ayyaka); PvA.107. The collective term for “parents” is mātāpitaro (pl. not dual), e. g. Sn.404; J.I,152; III,83; IV,1; PvA.107. On similes of father and son op. J.P.T.S. 1907, 112. In cpds. there are the 3 bases pitā, piti° & pitu°. (a) pitā°: °putta father & son J.I,253; pl. °puttā fathers & sons, or parents & children J.IV,115; VI,84. °mahā grandfather Pv.II,84; J.II,263; DA.I,281; PvA.41; °mahāyuga age of a grandfather (i. e. a generation of ancestors) D.I,113 (see det. expln DA.I,281=SnA 462); Sn.p. 115; KhA 141; petti-pitā-mahā great-grandfathers, all kinds of ancestors J.II,48 (=pitu-vitā mahā C.). ‹-› (b.) piti°: °kicca duty of a father J.V,153; °ghāta parricide J.IV,45 (BB pitu°); °pakkha father’s side DhA.I,4; °pitāmahā (pl.) fathers & grandfathers, ancestors J.V,383; °vadha parricide DA.I,135. --(c) pitu°: °ja originating from the father J.VI,589 (+mātuja); °ghātaka parricide (+mātughātaka) Vin.I,88, 136, 168, 320; °nāma fathers name SnA 423; °pitāmahā (pl.) ancestors (cp. piti°) A.IV,61; J.I,2; II,48. °rakkhita guarded by a father M.III,46. °santaka father’s possession J.I,2. °hadaya father’s heart J.I,61. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵pitr﹐父二人(双数格)表双亲),【阳】父亲。单.主.pitā；复.主pitaro；单.呼.pita﹑pitā；复.呼pitaro；单.宾.pitaraṁ；复.宾.pitare﹑pitaro；单.具.﹑离.pitarā；复.具.﹑离.pitarehi﹑pitarebhi﹑pitūbhi﹑pitūhi；单.与.﹑属.pitu﹑pitauno﹑pitussa；复.与.﹑属.pitarānaṁ﹑pitānaṁ﹑pitūnaṁ；单.处.pitari；复.处.pitaresu﹑pitūsu。pitukicca,【中】父亲的责任。pitughāta,【阳】弑父。pitusantaka,【形】父亲的所有物，父亲的。pitito, 【离.单】由父系(by the father’s side)。cuḷapituputto﹐【阳】小叔父之子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pithīyati: {'def': '(api + dhā + i + ya, pidahati 的【被】), 被关闭，关上，使暗。【过】~thīyi。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(api+dhā+i+ya, pidahati 的【被】), 被关闭，关上，使暗。【过】pithīyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pithīyatī: {'def': '(pithiyyati) [Pass. of pidahati, cp. api-dahati, Sk. apidhīyate] to be covered, obscured or obstructed; to close, shut M.II,104; III,184; Sn.1034, 1035; Nd2 442 (BB pidhiyyati; expld by pacchijjati); Th.1, 872; Dh.173; J.I,279 (akkhīni pithīyiṁsu the eyes shut); II,158 (=paticchādiyati); VI,432. The spelling of the BB manuscripts is pidhīyati (cp. Trenckner, Notes 62). (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pitika: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. pitā] one who has a father, having a father VvA.68 (sa° together with the f.); PvA.38 (mata° whose f. was dead): cp. dve° with 2 fathers J.V,424. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 有父亲的，属于父亲的，来自父亲的。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 有父亲的，父亲的，来自父亲的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pitipakkha: {'def': '【阳】父系。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】父系。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pitta: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic pitta] 1. the bile, gall; the bile also as seat of the bilious temperament, excitement or anger. Two kinds are distinguished at KhA 60= Vism.260, viz. baddha° & abaddha°, bile as organ & bile as fluid. See also in detail Vism.359; VbhA.65, 243. -- In enumerations of the parts or affections of the body pitta is as a rule combd with semha (cp. Vin.II,137; Kh 111; Vism.260, 344; Miln.298). -- Vin.II,137; M.III,90; S.IV,230, 231 (+semha); A.II,87; III,101, 131; Sn.198 (+semha), 434 (id., expld as the two kinds at SnA 388); Nd1 370; J.I,146 (+semha); II,114 (pittan te kupitaṁ your bile is upset or out of order, i. e. you are in a bad mood); Miln.112 (vāta-pittasemha . . .), 304 (roga,+semha), 382 (+semha); DhsA.190 (as blue-green); DhA.III,15 (cittaṁ n’atthi pittaṁ n’atthi has no heart and no bile, i. e. does not feel & get excited; vv. ll. vitta & nimitta). -- 2. [according to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 4 for *phitta=phīta, Sk. sphīta] swelling, a gathering Vin.II,188 (Vin. Texts III,237 “a burst gall, i. e. bladder”); S.II,242. The passage is not clear, in C. on Ud.I,7 we read cittaṁ, see Morris Loc. cit. May the meaning be “muzzle”? --kosaka gall-bladder KhA 61; Vism.263; VbhA.246. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】胆汁(bile)。pituadhika,【形】胆汁质的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】胆汁。 ~adhika, 【形】胆汁质的。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pittika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pitta] one who has bile or a bilious humoui, bilious Miln.298 (+semhika). (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pittivisaya: {'def': '[Sporadic reading for the usual petti°] the realm of the departed spirits M.I,73; J.I,51; Nd1 489. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pittivisayika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pittivisaya] belonging to the realm of the departed Nd1 97 (gati; v. l. petti°). (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pitu: {'def': '【阳】父亲。 ~kicca, 【中】父亲的责任。 ~ghāta, 【阳】弑父。 ~santaka,【形】父亲的所有物，属于父亲的。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pitucchā: {'def': '(pitu+svasā, cp. Sk. pitr-svasr),【阴】姑母(父亲的姊妹father’s sister, aunt)。pitucchāputta, pituputta,【阳】姑妈的儿子(aunt’s son, (boy) cousin)。pitucchādhītā, (aunt’s daughter, (girl) cousin)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】姑母（父亲的姊妹）。 ~putta, 【阳】姑妈的儿子。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [pitu+svasā, cp. Sk. pitṛ-ṣvasṛ] father’s sister, aunt; decl. similarly to pitā & mātā DhA.I,37; Acc. sg. pitucchasaṁ [Sk. *svasaṁ instead of *svasāraṁ] J.IV,184. --dhītā aunt’s daughter, i. e. (girl) cousin DhA.I,85. --putta aunt’s son, i. e. (boy) cousin S.II,282 (Tisso Bhagavato p.); III,106 (id.); J.II,119, 324. (Page 459)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pitāmaha: {'def': '【阳】祖父。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】祖父。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pivana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pivati] drinking PvA.251. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】喝。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】喝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pivaraka: {'def': 'see piṭharaka. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pivati: {'def': '& Pibati [Vedic pāti & pibati, redupl. pres. to root Idg. *poi & pī, cp. Lat. bibo (for * pibo); Gr. pίuw to drink, pόtos drink; Obulg. piti to drink, also Lat. pōtus drink, pōculum beaker (=pātra, P. patta). See also pāyeti to give drink, pāna, pānīya drink, pīta having drunk] to drink. -- pres. pivati D.I,166; III,184; J.IV,380; V,106; PvA.55. -- 1st pl. pivāma Pv.I,11³; 2nd pl. pivatha PvA.78 & pivātha Pv.I,112; 3rd pl. med. piyyare J.IV,380. -- imper. piva PvA.39, & pivatu Vin.IV,109. -- ppr. pivaṁ Sn.257; Dh.205, & pivanto SnA 39. -- fut. pivissati J.VI,365; PvA.5, 59; pissāmi J.III,432; pāssati J.IV,527. -- aor. pivi J.I,198; apivi Mhvs 6, 21; pivāsiṁ Ud.42; apāyiṁha J.I,362 (or °siṁha?); apaṁsu A.I,205. -- ger. pivitvā J.I,419; III,491; VI,518; PvA.5, 23; pītvā Sn.257; Dh.205; J.I,297; pītvāna J.II,71; pitvā Pv.I,118. -- grd. pātabba Vin.II,208; peyya; see kāka.°- inf. pātuṁ J.II,210; Pv.I,64. -- pp. pīta (q. v.). -- Of forms with p for v we mention the foll.: pipati M.I,32; DhsA.403 (as v. l.); imper. pipa J.I,459; ppr. pipaṁ M.I,316, 317. -- Caus. pāyeti & pāyāpeti (q. v.). (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pibati (pā + a, pā被改成 piba), 喝。【过】 pivi。【过分】 pita。【现分】 pivanta, ~māna。【独】 pivitvā。【不】 pātuŋ, pivituŋ。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Pibati (pā+a﹐pā被改成 piba), 喝(to drink)。【过】pivi。【过分】pita。【现分】pivanta, pivamāna。【独】pītvā, pivitvā。【不】pātuṁ, pivituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piya: {'def': '²[sporadic for phiya, q. v.] oar; usually so in cpd. piyâritta (nt.) oar & rudder S.I,103; A.II,201; J.IV,164. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】亲爱的，亲切的，心爱的。【阳】丈夫。【中】亲爱的事物。~kamyatā, 【阴】渴求亲爱的事物，渴求变成亲爱。 ~tara, 【形】更亲爱的。 ~tama, 【形】最亲爱的。 ~dassana, 【形】漂亮的。 ~rūpa, 【中】动人心目的外貌。 ~vacana, 【中】爱语，婉言。【形】婉转的。 ~bhāṇī,~vādī, 【形】措词婉转。 ~vippayoga, 【阳】爱别离（与心爱的分离）。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹(adj.) [Vedic priya, prī, cp. Gr. proprow/n; Goth. frijōn to love, frijonds loving=E. friend; Ger. frei, freund; Ohg. Frīa=Sk. priyā, E. Friday, etc.] dear, in two applications (as stated Nd1 133=Nd2 444, viz. dve piyā: sattā vā piyā saṅkhārā vā piyā, with ref. to living beings, to sensations): 1. dear, beloved (as father, mother, husband, etc.) S.I,210 (also compar. °tara); Dh.130, 157, 220; Vism.296, 314 sq.; often combd with manāpa (pleasing, also in 2), e. g. D.II,19; III,167; J.II,155; IV,132. -- 2. pleasant, agreeable, liked Sn.452, 863: Dh.77, 211; often combd (contrasted) with appiya, e. g. Sn.363, 450 (see also below). nt. piyaṁ a pleasant thing, pleasantry, pleasure S.I,189; Sn.450, 811; DhA.III,275. --appiya unpleasant M.I,86; Kh VIII,5. appiyatā unpleasantness J.IV,32. See also pīti & pema. --âpāya separation from what is dear to one, absence of the beloved A.III,57; Dh.211. --âppiya pleasant & unpleasant D.II,277 (origin of it); Dh.211. --kamya friendly disposition Vin.IV,12. --ggāhin grasping after pleasure Dh.209, cp. DhA.III,275. --cakkhu a loving eye D.III,167. --dassana lovely to behold, goodlooking D.III,167. --bhāṇin speaking pleasantly, flattering J.V,348. --manāpatā belovedness M.I,66. --rūpa pleasant form, an enticing object of sight D.I,152 (cp. DA.I,311); S.II,109 sq.; A.II,54; It.95, 114; Sn.337, 1086 (cp. Nd2 445); Vbh.103; Nett 27. --vacana term of endearment or esteem, used with ref. to āyasmā Nd2 130; SnA 536, etc.; or mārisa SnA 536. --vācā pleasant speech S.I,189; Sn.452. --vādin speaking pleasantly, affable D.I,60 (manāpacārin+); A.III,37; IV,265 sq. --vippayoga separation from the beloved object Sn.41 (cp. Nd2 444); PvA.161 (here with ref. to the husband); syn. with appiya-sampayoga, e. g. at Vism.504 sq. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵 Priya),【形】亲爱的(对自身、亲族)，亲切的，心爱的。【阳】丈夫。【中】亲爱的事物。piyakamyatā,【阴】渴求亲爱的事物，渴求变成亲爱。piyatara,【形】更亲爱的。piyatama,【形】最亲爱的。piyadassana,【形】漂亮的。piyarūpa,【中】动人心目的外貌。piyavacana,【中】爱语，婉言。【形】婉转的。piyabhāṇī, piyavādī,【形】措词婉转。piyavippayoga,【阳】爱别离(与心爱的分离)。piyacakkhūhi sampassitabbo(MA.6./I,156.), 以爱眼相视。piyāpiya,【形】亲爱与怨恨的。《法句经》212偈︰“Piyato jāyatī soko, piyato jāyatī bhayaṁ; Piyato vippamuttassa, natthi soko kuto bhayaṁ.”(从喜爱生忧，从喜爱生怖；离喜爱无忧，从何处恐怖。)D.22./II,306.130.︰“Katamo ca, bhikkhave, piyehi vippayogo dukkho? Idha yassa te honti iṭṭhā kantā manāpā rūpā saddā gandhā rasā phoṭṭhabbā dhammā, ye vā panassa te honti 1atthakāmā 2hitakāmā 3phāsukakāmā 4yogakkhemakāmā mātā vā pitā vā bhātā vā bhaginī vā mittā vā amaccā vā ñātisālohitā vā, yā tehi saddhiṁ asaṅgati asamāgamo asamodhānaṁ amissībhāvo, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, piyehi vippayogo dukkho.(然，诸比丘！什么是‘爱别离苦’呢？於此，凡是可喜的、愉快的、合意的色、声、香、味、触、法；或者凡是1有益的欲、2有利的欲、3舒适的欲、4从执著中释放的欲，或母、或父、或兄弟、或姐妹、或朋友、或同事、或亲戚，凡是不和合、不集合、不联合、不会合。诸比丘！这称为‘爱别离苦’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piyaka: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. priyaka] a plant going under various names, viz. Nauclea cadamba; Terminalia tomentosa; Vitex trifolia J.V,420 (=setapuppha C.); VI,269. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piyatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. piya1] belovedness, pleasantness A.V,164 sq.; Sdhp.66. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piyatā: {'def': '【阴】心爱。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】心爱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piyaṅgu: {'def': '【阳】粟(medicinal plant﹐一种粗糙，抗旱，但不耐霜冻的一年生禾草 (Setaria italica)，作谷物、乾草和饲料)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedio priyaṅgu] 1. panic seed, Panicum Italicum Vv 537; J.I,39; PvA.283. Mixed with water and made into a kind of gruel (piyaṅgûdaka) it is used as an emetic J.I,419. See also kaṅgu. -- 2. a medicinal plant, Priyangu J.V,420. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】粟（一种粗糙，抗旱，但不耐霜冻的一年生禾草 (Setariaitalica)，具有粗而重的长穗状花序，它可能来自旧大陆的狗尾草 (Setariaviridis)，栽培后，已分化出一些变种，在旧大陆作谷物、干草和饲料，在美国，主要作青饲料和青贮饲料）。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piyā: {'def': '【阴】妻子。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】妻子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piyāla: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. priyāla] the Piyal tree, Buchanania latifolia J.V,415. -- (nt.) the fruit of this tree, used as food J.IV,344; V,324. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piyāpāya: {'def': '【形】爱别离的(与心爱的分离的)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】爱别离的（与心爱的分离的）。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piyāyanā: {'def': '【阴】爱，喜爱。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】爱，喜爱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. piyāyati] love, fondness for (Loc.) S.I,210. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piyāyati: {'def': '(piya 的【派】), 喜欢，持为亲爱的，投入的。【过】piyāyi。【过分】 ~yita。【现分】 ~yanta, ~yamāna, 【独】 ~yitvā。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. piya1] to hold dear, to like, to be fond of (Acc.), to be devoted to S.I,210; J.I,156; II,246; VI,5; VbhA.108 (in etym. of pitā, q. v.); DhA.IV,125; SnA 78; VvA.349; PvA.71. -- pp. piyāyita. Note. A ppr. piyaṁ is found at SnA 169 for Sn.94 adj. piya, and is expld by pīyamāna tussamāna modamāna. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(piya 的【派】), 喜欢，持为亲爱的，投入的。【过】piyāyi。【过分】piyāyita。【现分】piyāyanta, piyāyamāna,【独】piyāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piyāyita: {'def': '[pp. of piyāyati] held dear, fondled, loved, liked Sn.807; Nd1 126. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piñcha: {'def': '=piccha, i. e. tail-feather, tail Vin.II,130 (mora°). Cp. piñja. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piñja: {'def': '【中】尾羽毛，鸟的尾部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】尾羽毛，鸟的尾部。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [=piccha] a (peacock’s) tail-feather J.I,38 (mora° kalāpa), 207 (=pekkhuṇa); III,226 (BB piccha & miccha); DA.I,41 (mora°); DhA.I,394 (id.); VvA.147 (mayūra°; BB piñcha, SS pakkha); PvA.142 (mora° kalāpa). (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piñjara: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. piñjara; for etym. see piṁsati1] of a reddish colour, tawny J.I,93; DA.I,245; VvA.165, 288. --odaka fruit of the esculent water plant Trapa Bispinosa J.VI,563 (v. l. ciñcarodaka), expld by siṅghāṭaka. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】微红色的。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】微红色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piñjita: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. piṁsati¹, cp. Sk. piñjana] tinged, dyed Miln.240. On expression see Kern, Toev. s. v. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piññāka: {'def': '【中】含油种子（如花生仁、棉籽等）的面粉，椰子油渣饼（亦称椰干饼）。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】芝麻饼、油饼(tila seed-cake, oilcake)，椰子油渣饼(亦称椰乾饼)(ground sesamum, flour of oil-seeds)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [to piṁsati², cp. Class. Sk. piṇyāka] ground sesamum, flour of oil-seeds M.I,78, 342; Vin.IV,341. (p. nāma tilapiṭṭhaṁ vuccati); VvA.142 (tila° seed cake); PvA.48. --bhakkha feeding on flour of oil-seeds D.I,166; A.I,241, 295; II,206; Nd1 417; Pug.55. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piŋsati: {'def': '参考 pisati。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piḷakā: {'def': '【阴】疖子(boil)，水泡(blister)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】疖子，水泡。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā] 1. a small boil, pustule, pimple Vin.I,202; S.I,150; J.V,207, 303; Nd1 370; Miln.298; DA.I,138. -- 2. knob (of a sword) J.VI,218. -- Cp. pilaka. (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piḷayhati: {'def': '[api+nayhati, cp. Sk. pinahyate] to fasten on, put on, cover, dress, adorn J.V,393 (piḷayhatha 3rd sg. imper.=pilandhatu C.). (Page 460)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piḷhaka: {'def': '(v. l. miḷhakā), 粪虫(at S.17.5./II,228 is to be read as mīḷhakā “cesspool” (q. v.). The C. quoted on p. 228 expls incorrectly by “kaṁsalak’ādi gūthapāṇakā,” which would mean “a low insect breeding in excrements” (thus perhaps=paṭaṅga?). The trsl. (K.S. II.155) has “dung-beetle.”。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(v. l. miḷhakā) at S.II,228 is to be read as mīḷhakā “cesspool” (q. v.). The C. quoted on p. 228 expls incorrectly by “kaṁsalak’ādi gūthapāṇakā,” which would mean “a low insect breeding in excrements” (thus perhaps=paṭaṅga?). The trsl. (K.S. II.155) has “dung-beetle.” (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṁsa: {'def': '[pp. of piṁsati2] crushed, ground, pounded DhA.III,184 (v. l. piṭṭha, perhaps preferable). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṁsati: {'def': '¹ [piś or piṁś, cp. Vedic piṁśati, with two bases viz. Idg. *peig, as in P. piñjara & pingala; Lat. pingo to paint, embroider; and *peik, as in Sk. piṁśati, peśaḥ; Av. paes- to embellish; Gr. poikiλos many-coloured; Goth. fēh, Ags. fāh id. See detail in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under pingo] to adorn, form, embellish; orig. to prick, cut. Perhaps piṁsare (3. pl. med.) J.V,202 belongs here, in meaning “tinkle, sound” (lit. prick), expld in C. by viravati. Other der. see under pingala. piñjara, pesakāra. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '磨擦，压破。参考 pisati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [piṣ or piṁṣ, Vedic pinaṣṭi, cp. Lat. pinso to grind, pīla=pestle, pistillum=pistil; Lith. paisýti to pound barley; Gr. ptiζsw id.; Ohg. fesa=Nhg. fese] 1. to grind, crush, pound J.I,452; II,363; IV,3 (matthakaṁ), 440 (akaluñ candanañ ca silāya p.); Miln.43; DhA.III,184 (gandhe piṁsissati; BB pisissati). -- 2. to knock against each other, make a sound J.V,202: see piṁsati1. -- pp. piṁsa & piṭṭha1. See also pisati and paṭi°. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṅga: {'def': 'see piṅka. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṅgala: {'def': '【形】褐色，黄褐色的。piṅgalanetta,【形】有红眼睛的。piṅgalamakkhikā,【阴】牛虻(gadfly)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [see piṁsati¹, cp. Vedic pingala] 1. reddishyellow, brown, tawny S.I,170; J.VI,199 (=pingiya). ‹-› 2. red-eyed, as sign of ugliness J.IV,245 (as Np.; combd with nikkhanta-dāṭha); V,42 (tamba-dāṭhika nibbiddha-pingala); Pv.II,41 (=°locana PvA.90; +kaḷāra-danta). --kipillaka the red ant DhA.III,206. --cakkhutā redeyedness PvA.250. --makkhikā the gadfly J.III,263 (=ḍaṁsa) Nd2 268=SnA 101 (id.); SnA 33 (where a distinction is made between kāṇa-makkhikā and pingala°), 572 (=ḍaṁsa). (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】褐色，黄褐色的。 ~netta, 【形】有红眼睛的。 ~makkhikā,【阴】牛虻。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piṅgiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. Vedic piṅga] reddish-brown, yellow J.VI,199. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṅgulā: {'def': '(f.) [a var. of Sk. piṅgalā, a kind of owl] a species of bird J.VI,538. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṅka: {'def': '[for pinga yellow, brownish, tawny] a young shoot, sprout J.III,389 (v. l. singa, which also points to pinga; expld by pavāla). (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṇḍa: {'def': '[cp. Vedic piṇḍa; probably connected with piṣ i. e. crush, grind, make into a lump; Grassmann compares pīḍ to press; on other attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. puls] 1. a lump, ball, thick (& round) mass S.I,206 (aṭṭhīyaka°); Pv III,55 (nonīta°); VvA.62 (kummāsa°), 65; Sdhp.529 (ayo°). -- 2. a lump of food, esp. of alms, alms given as food S.I,76; Sn.217, 388, 391; J.I,7 (nibbuta° cooled); Miln.243 (para °ṁ ajjhupagata living on food given by others). piṇḍāya (Dat.) for alms, freq. in combn with carati, paṭikkamati, (gāmaṁ) pavisati, e. g. Vin.II,195; III,15; M.III,157; Sn.386; SnA 141, 175; PvA.12, 13, 16, 47, 81, 136 and passim. -- 3. a conglomeration, accumulation, compressed form, heap, in akkhara° sequence of letters or syllables, context DhA.IV,70. --attha condensed meaning, résumé J.I,233, 275, 306; KhA 124, 192. Cp. sampiṇḍanattha. --ukkhepakaṁ in the manner of taking up lumps (of food), a forbidden way of eating Vin.II,214=IV.195, cp. Vin. Texts I.64 (=piṇḍaṁ piṇḍaṁ ukkhipitvā C.). --gaṇanā counting in a lump, summing up DA.I,95. --cāra alms-round, wandering for alms Sn.414. --cārika one who goes for alms, begging Vin.II,215; III,34, 80; IV,79; J.I,116; VvA.6. --dāyika (& °dāvika) one who deals out food (as occupation of a certain class of soldiers) D.I,51 (°dāvika); A.IV,107 (v. l. °dāyaka); Miln.331; cp. DA.I,156. See also Geiger, P.Gr. 46, 1; Rh. D. Dial. I.68 (trsl. “camp-follower”); Franke, Dīgha trsl. 531 trsl. “Vorkämpfer” but recommends trsl. “Klossverteiler” as well). --dhītalikā a doll made of a lump of dough, or of pastry PvA.17; cp. piṭṭha°. --paṭipiṇḍa (kamma) giving lump after lump, alms for alms, i. e. reciprocatory begging J.II,82 (piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṁ kappesuṁ), 307 (piṇḍapāta-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṁ kappenti); V,390 (mayaṁ piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍa-kammaṁ na karoma). --pāta food received in the alms-bowl (of the bhikkhu), alms-gathering (on term see Vism.31 yo hi koci āhāro bhikkhuno piṇḍolyena patte patitattā piṇḍapāto ti vuccati, and cp. BSk. piṇḍapāta-praviṣṭha AvŚ I.359; piṇḍapāta-nirhāraka Divy 239) Vin.I,46; II,32 (°ṁ nīharāpeti), 77, 198, 223; III,80, 99; IV,66 sq., 77; M.III,297; S.I,76, 92; A.I,240; II,27, 143; III,109, 145 sq.; V,100; Sn.339; J.I,7, 149, 212, 233; Pug.59; Vism.31, 60; VbhA.279 (°âpacāyana); SnA 374; PvA.11 sq., 16, 38, 240. --pātika one who eats only food received in the alms-bowl; °aṅga is one of the dhutaṅga ordinances (see dhutaṅga) Vin.I,253; II,32 (°aṅga), 299 (+paṁsukūlika); III,15 (id.); M.I,30; III,41; A.III,391; Pug.59, 69; SnA 57 (°dhutaṅga). --piṇḍapātika bhikkhu a bh. on his alms-round Vism.246 (in simile); VbhA.229 (id.). Cp. BSk. piṇḍapātika AvŚ I.248. --pātikatta (abstr. to prec.) the state of eating alms-food, a characteristic of the Buddhist bhikkhu M.III,41; S.II,202, 208 sq.; A.I,38; III,109. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'piṇḍaka,【阳】块(尤指小块)，食团。piṇḍacārika,【形】托钵者。piṇḍadāyaka,【阳】施食者。piṇḍapāta(piṇḍa团状食物+pāta落下),【阳】托钵。古译：分卫。piṇḍapātika,【形】常乞食苦行僧，只吃托钵的食物苦行僧。piṇḍaḍācāra,【阳】行托钵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'piṇḍaka, 【阳】块（尤指小块），食团。 ~cārika, 【形】托钵者。 ~dāyaka,【阳】施食者。 ~pāta, 【阳】托钵。 ~pātika, 【形】常乞食苦行僧，只吃托钵的食物苦行僧。 ~ḍācāra, 【阳】行托钵。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piṇḍaka: {'def': '[fr. piṇḍa] (alms)--food A.IV,185 (SS piṇḍapāta); in phrase na piṇḍakena kilamati not go short of food Vin.III,15, 87; IV,23, in ukka-piṇḍaka meaning a cluster of msects or vermin Vin.I,211=239 (v. l. piṇḍuka). (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṇḍeti: {'def': '(piṇḍ+e), 弄成团，混合，收缩。【过】piṇḍesi。【独】piṇḍetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. pinḍa] to ball together, mix, put together Pv.II,952 (=pisana-vasena yojeti PvA.135). ‹-› pp. piṇḍita. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(piṇḍ + e), 弄成团，混合，收缩。【过】 ~esi。【独】 piṇḍetvā。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piṇḍi: {'def': '(f.) [cp. piṇḍa & Sk. piṇḍī] a lump, round mass, ball, cluster D.I,74=A.III,25 (nahāniya° ball of fragrant soap; DA.I,218: piṇḍa); M.III,92; J.I,76 (phala°); II,393; III,53 (amba°); Miln.107; Vism.500 (piṭṭha°); DhA.III,207 (amba°). (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṇḍika: {'def': '(-°) in chatta°-vivara is a little doubtful, the phrase prob. means “a crevice in the covering (i. e. the round mass) of the canopy or sunshade” J.VI,376. ‹-› Dutoit (J. trsln VI,457) translates “opening at the back of the sunshade,” thus evidently reading “piṭṭhika.” (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṇḍikamaŋsa: {'def': '【中】臀部。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piṇḍikamaṁsa: {'def': '【中】臀部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piṇḍita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of piṇḍeti, cp. BSk. piṇḍitamūlya lump-sum Divy 500] 1. made into a lump, massed together, conglomerated, thick Th.2, 395. -- 2. “balllike,” close, compact; of sound: J.II,439; VI,519. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Piṇḍeti的【过分】) 弄成团，混合，收缩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piṇḍiyālopabhojana: {'def': '【中】托钵所得的食物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】托钵所得的食物。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piṇḍola: {'def': '[etym. unclear] one who seeks alms S.III,93= It.89; cp. Np. °bhāradvāja SnA 346, 514, 570. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṇḍola-bhāradvāja: {'def': '（比库名）宾兜喇跋拉度阿迦，（古音译：）宾头卢跋罗堕闍', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Piṇḍolya: {'def': '【中】行去托钵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. piṇḍola] asking for alms, alms-round S.III,93=It.89; Vism.31. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】行去托钵。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piṇḍāya: {'def': '(piṇḍa 的【与.单】), 施食。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(piṇḍa 的【与、单】), 施食。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Piṇḍī: {'def': '【阴】群，串。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】群，串。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piṭaka: {'def': '【中】篮子，容器，佛教三藏经典之一藏。 ~ttaya。【中】三藏（即：律藏、经藏、论藏）。 ~dhara, 【形】熟悉任何一藏者（例：律师、法师、论师）。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. piṭaka, etym. not clear. See also P. peḷā & peḷikā] 1. basket Vin I 225 (ghaṭa p. ucchaṅga), 240 (catudoṇika p.); Pv IV.333; Vism.28 (piṭake nikkhitta-loṇa-maccha-phāla-sadisaṁ phaṇaṁ); dhañña° a grain-basket DhA.III,370; vīhi° a rice basket DhA.III,374. Usually in combn kuddāḷa-piṭaka “hoe and basket,” wherever the act of digging is referred to, e. g. Vin.III,47; D.I,101; M.I,127; S.II,88; V,53; A.I,204; II,199; J.I,225, 336; DA.I,269. -- 2. (fig.) t.t. for the 3 main divisions of the Pāli Canon “the three baskets (basket as container of tradition Winternitz, Ind. Lit. II.8; cp. peḷā 2) of oral tradition,” viz. Vinaya°, Suttanta°, Abhidhamma°; thus mentioned by name at PvA.2; referred to as “tayo piṭakā” at J.I,118; Vism.96 (pañca-nikāya-maṇḍale tīṇi piṭakāni parivatteti), 384 (tiṇṇaṁ Vedānaṁ uggahaṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ Piṭakānaṁ uggahaṇaṁ); SnA 110, 403; DhA.III,262; IV,38; cp. Divy 18, 253, 488. With ref. to the Vinaya mentioned at Vin.V,3. -- Piṭaka is a later collective appellation of the Scriptures; the first division of the Canon (based on oral tradition entirely) being into Sutta and Vinaya (i. e. the stock paragraphs learnt by heart, and the rules of the Order). Thus described at D.II,124; cp. the expression bhikkhu suttantika vinayadhara Vin.II,75 (earlier than tepiṭaka or piṭakadhara). Independently of this division we find the designation “Dhamma” applied to the doctrinal portions; and out of this developed the 3rd Piṭaka, the Abhidhammap. See also Dhamma C. 1. -- The Canon as we have it comes very near in language and contents to the canon as established at the 3rd Council in the time of King Asoka. The latter was in Māgadhī. -- The knowledge of the 3 Piṭakas as an accomplishment of the bhikkhu is stated in the term tepīṭaka “one who is familiar with the 3 P.” (thus at Miln.18; Dāvs.V,22; KhA 41 with v. l. ti°; SnA 306 id.; DhA.III,385). tipetakī (Vin.V,3 Khemanāma t.), tipeṭaka (Miln.90), and tipiṭaka-dhara KhA 91. See also below °ttaya. In BSk. we find the term trepiṭaka in early inscriptions (1st century A.D., see e. g. Vogel, Epigraphical discoveries at Sārnāth, Epigraphia Indica VIII, p. 173, 196; Bloch, J. As. Soc. Bengal 1898, 274, 280); the term tripiṭaka in literary documents (e. g. Divy 54), as also tripiṭa (e. g. AvŚ I.334; Divy 261, 505). -- On the Piṭakas in general & the origin of the P. Canon see Oldenberg, in ed. of Vin 1; and Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt. 1913, II.1 sq.; III,606, 635. -- Cp. peṭaka. --ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas or holy Scriptures SnA 328. --dhara one who knows (either one or two or all three) the Piṭaka by heart, as eka°, dvi°, ti° at Vism.62, 99. --sampadāya according to the P. tradition or on the ground of the authority of the P. M.I,520 (itihītiha etc.); II,169 (id.); and in exegesis of itikirā (hearsay-tradition) at A.I,189=II.191=Nd2 151. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】篮子，容器，佛教三藏经典之一藏。piṭakattaya。【中】三藏(即：律藏Vinaya、经藏Sutta、论藏abhidhamma)。piṭakadhara,【形】熟悉任何一藏者(例：律师、法师、论师)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piṭhara: {'def': '【阳】大广口瓶。(p226)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】大广口瓶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. piṭhara] a pot, a pan Miln.107 (spelt pīthara). As piṭharaka [cp. BSk. piṭharikā Divy 496; so read for T. piparikā] at KhA 54 to be read for T. pivaraka according to App. SnA 869. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṭṭha: {'def': '² (nt.) [identical in form with piṭṭha3] a lintel (of a door) Vin.I,47 (kavāṭa°); II,120 (°saṅghāṭa, cp. Vin. Texts III,105), 148, 207. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】背面，后面，表面，（谷粒等的）面粉。 ~khādaniya, 【中】以面粉制成的糕点或糖果。 ~dhītalikā, 【阴】面人儿（以面粉制成的娃娃）。~piṇḍī, 【阴】面团。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ (nt.) [cp. Vedic pṛṣṭha, expld by Grassmann as pra-sthā, i. e. what stands out] back, hind part; also surface, top J.I,167 (pāsāṇa° top of a rock). Usually in oblique cases as adv., viz. Instr. piṭṭhena along, over, beside, by way of, on J.II,111 (udaka°); IV,3 (samudda°), Loc. piṭṭhe by the side of, near, at: parikhā° at a ditch PvA.201; on, on top of, on the back of (animals): ammaṇassa p. J.VI,381 (cp. piṭṭhiyaṁ); tiṇa° J.IV,444; paṅka° J.I,223; samudda° J.I,202. -- assa° on horseback D.I,103; similarly: vāraṇassa p. J.I,358; sīha° J.II,244; haṭṭhi° J.II,244; III,392. See also following. Piṭṭhi & Piṭṭhī (f.) [=piṭṭha3, of which it has taken over the main function as noun. On relation piṭṭha› piṭṭhi cp. Trenckner, Notes 55; Franke, Bezzenberger’s Beiträge XX.287. Cp. also the Prk. forms piṭṭha, piṭṭhī & piṣṭī, all representing Sk. prṣṭḥa: Pischel, Prk. Gram. §53] 1. the back Vin.II,200 (piṭṭhī); M.I,354; J.I,207; II,159, 279. piṭṭhiṁ (paccāmittassa) passati to see the (enemy’s) back, i. e. to see the last of somebody J.I,296, 488; IV,208. piṭṭhi as opposed to ura (breast) at Vin.II,105; Sn.609; as opposed to tala (palm) with ref. to hand & foot: hattha (or pada-) tala & °piṭṭhi: J.IV,188; Vism.361. -- Abl. piṭṭhito as adv. (from) behind, at the back of Sn.412 (+anubandhati to follow closely); VvA.256; PvA.78 (geha°). piṭṭhito karoti to leave behind, to turn one’s back on J.I,71 (cp. pṛṣṭhato-mukha Divy 333). piṭṭhito piṭṭhito right on one’s heels, very closely Vin.I,47; D.I,1, 226. -- 2. top, upper side (in which meaning usually piṭṭha3), only in cpd. °pāsāṇa and Loc. piṭṭhiyaṁ as adv. on top of J.V,297 (ammaṇa°) piṭṭhi at VvA.101 is evidently faulty reading. --ācariya teacher’s understudy, pupil-teacher, tutor J.II,100; V,458, 473, 501. --kaṇṭaka spina dorsi, backbone M.I,58, 80, 89; III,92; Vism.271; VbhA.243; KhA 49 sq.; Sdhp.102. --koṭṭhaka an upper room (bath room?) DhA.II,19, 20. --gata following behind, foll. One’s example Vism.47. --paṇṇasālā a leaf-hut at the back J.VI,545. --parikamma treating one’s back (by rubbing) Vin.II,106. --passe (Loc.) at the back of, behind J.I,292; PvA.55, 83, 106. --pāda the back of the foot, lit. foot-back, i. e. the heel Vism.251; KhA 51, (°aṭṭhika); DA.I,254. --pāsāṇa a flat stone or rock, plateau, ridge J.I,278; II,352; VI,279; DhA.II,58; VbhA.5, 266. --bāha the back of the arm, i. e. elbow (cp. °pāda) KhA 49, 50 (°aṭṭhi): --maṁsa the flesh of the back PvA.210; SnA 287. --maṁsika backbiting, one who talks behind a person’s back Sn.244 (=°maṁsakhādaka C.); J.II,186 (of an unfair judge); V,1; Pv III,97 (BB; T. °aka). As °maṁsiya at J.V,10. --maṁsikȧtā backbiting Nd2 39. --roga back-ache SnA 111. --vaṁsa back bone, a certain beam in a building DhA.I,52. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [pp. of piṁsati2. cp. Sk. piṣṭa] what is ground, grindings, crushed seeds, flour. Vin.I,201, 203; IV,261, 341 (tila°=piññāka); J.II,244 (māsa°). As piṭṭhi at J.I,347. --khādaniya “flour-eatables,” i. e. pastry Vin.I,248 (cp. Vin. Texts II.139). --dhītalikā a flour-doll, i. e. made of paste or a lump of flour PvA.16, 19 (cp. uddāna to the 1st vagga p. 67 piṭṭhi & reading piṇḍa° on p. 17). --piṇḍi a lump of flour Vism.500 (in comp.). --madda flour paste Vin.II,151 (expld in C. by piṭṭha-khali; cp. piṭṭhi-madda J.III,226, which would correspond to piṣṭī). --surā (intoxicating) extract or spirits of flour VvA.73. (Page 457)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】背面，后面，表面，(谷粒等的)面粉。piṭthakhādaniya,【中】以面粉制成的糕点或糖果。piṭthadhītalikā,【阴】素烧玩偶。piṭthapiṇḍī,【阴】面团。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piṭṭhi: {'def': '【阴】背面，上边，顶端。 ~kaṇṭaka。【中】脊椎骨。 ~gata, 【形】骑在兽背，骑在人背。 ~passa, 【中】后面。【处】在后面，在后边。~pāsāṇa, 【阳】平坦的岩石。 ~maŋsika, 【形】诽谤，背后指责。 ~vaŋsa,【阳】后阳台。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】背面，背部(台语：尻脊骿(背)kha ciah4 phainn7)，上边，顶端。piṭṭhiṭṭhika,【中】脊椎骨。piṭṭhigata,【形】骑在兽背，骑在人背。piṭṭhipassa,【中】后面。【处】在后面，在后边。piṭṭhipāsāṇa,【阳】平坦的岩石。piṭṭhimaṁsika,【形】诽谤，背后指责。piṭṭhivaṁsa,【阳】后阳台。Mv.I,40.︰piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandheyyaṁ, 应尾随其后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Piṭṭhika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. piṭṭhi] having a back, in dīgha° with a long back or ridge Sn.604; mudu° having a flexible back Vin.III,35. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṭṭhikā: {'def': '(f.)=piṭṭhi; Loc. piṭṭhikāya at the back of, behind J.I,456 (maṇḍala°). (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Piṭṭhimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. piṭṭhi] having a back, in f. piṭṭhimatī (senā) (an army) having troops on (horse- or, elephant-) back J.VI,396. (Page 458)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Plava: {'def': '【阳】浮子，筏。 ~na, 【中】跳跃，浮子。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】浮子，筏。plavana,【中】跳跃，浮子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Plavaṅgama: {'def': '【阳】猴子。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】猴子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Poddava: {'def': 'see gāma°. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pokkhara: {'def': '【中】睡莲，睡莲植物，象鼻端，琴身。pokkharatā,【阴】美。pokkharapatta,【中】莲叶。pokkharamadhu,【中】睡莲的蜜汁。pokkharavassa,【中】一场花雨，雪暴风雨。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic puṣkara, fr. pus, though a certain relation to puṣpa seems to exist, cp. Sk. puṣpapattra a kind of arrow (lit. lotus-leaf) Halāyudha 2, 314, and P. pokkhara-patta] 1. a lotus plant, primarily the leaf of it, figuring in poetry and metaphor as not being able to be wetted by water Sn.392, 812 (vuccati paduma-pattaṁ Nd1 135); Dh.336; It.84. -- 2. the skin of a drum (from its resemblance to the lotus-leaf) S.II,267; Miln.261 (bheri°). As Np. of an angel (Gandhabba) “Drum” at Vv 189. -- 3. a species of waterbird (crane): see cpd. °sataka. --ṭṭha standing in water (?) Vin.I,215 (vanaṭṭha+), 238 (id.). --patta a lotus leaf Sn.625; Dh.401 (=paduma --patta DhA.IV,166); Miln.250. --madhu the honey sap of Costus speciosus (a lotus) J.V,39, 466. --vassa “lotus-leaf rain,” a portentous shower of rain, serving as special kind of test shower in which certain objects are wetted, but those showing a disinclination towards moisture are left untouched, like a lotus-leaf J.I,88; VI,586; KhA 164; DhA.III,163. --sātaka a species of crane, Ardea Siberica J.VI,539 (koṭṭha+); SnA 359. Cp. Np. Pokkharasāti Sn.594; Sn.p. 115; SnA 372. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】睡莲，睡莲植物，象鼻端，琴身。 ~tā, 【阴】美。 ~patta,【中】莲叶。 ~madhu, 【中】睡莲的蜜汁。 ~vassa, 【中】一场花雨，雪暴风雨。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pokkharatā: {'def': '(f.) [is it fr. pokkhara lotus (cp. Sk. pauṣkara), thus “lotus-ness,” or founded on Vedic puṣpa blossom? The BSk. puṣkalatā (AvŚ II.201) is certainly a misconstruction, if it is constructed fr. the Pali] splendidness, “flower-likeness,” only in cpd. vaṇṇa-pokkharatā beauty of complexion D.I,114; Vin.I,268; S.I,95; II,279; A.I,38, 86; II,203; III,90; DA.I,282; KhA 179; VvA.14; PvA.46. The BSk. passage at AvŚ II.202 reads “śobhāṁ varṇaṁ puṣkalatāṁ ca.” (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pokkharaṇi: {'def': '【阴】池塘，人造池。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】池塘，人造池。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pokkharaṇī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. puṣkara lotus; Vedic puṣkariṇī, BSk. has puskiriṇī, e. g. AvŚ I.76; II,201 sq.] a lotuspond, an artificial pool or small lake for water-plants (see note in Dial. II.210) Vin.I,140, 268; II,123; D.II,178 sq.; S.I,123, 204; II,106; V,460; A.I,35, 145; III,187, 238; J.II,126; V,374 (Khemī), 388 (Doṇa); Pv III,33; IV,121; SnA 354 (here in meaning of a dry pit or dugout); VvA.160; PvA.23, 77, 152. pokkharaññā Gen. Pv.II,129; Instr. S.I,233; Loc. Vin.II,123. pokkharaṇiyāyaṁ Loc. A.III,309. -- pl. pokkharaṇiyo Vin.I,268; VvA.191; PvA.77; metric pokkharañño Vv 4411; Pv.II,119: II.78. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ponobhavika: {'def': 'ponobbhavikā(pono-=puna再),【形】再生。aponobhavika, 不再生(no more rebirth)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】导致再生。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. punabbhava, with preservation of the second o (puno›punaḥ) see puna] leading to rebirth M.I,48, 299, 464, 532; S.III,26; IV,186; D.III,57; A.II,11 sq., 172; III,84, 86; V,88; Nett 72; Vism.506; VbhA.110. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ponti: {'def': '(vv. ll. poṭhi, sonti) Th.2, 422, 423 is doubtful; the expln at ThA.269 is “pilotikākhaṇḍa,” thus “rags (of an ascetic),” cp. J.P.T.S. 1884. See also pottha1, with which evidently identical, though misread. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pori: {'def': '【阴】彬彬有礼的，有礼貌的。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】彬彬有礼的，有礼貌的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Porin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pora=Epic Sk. paura citizen, see pura. Semantically cp. urbane›urbanus›urbs; polite= poli/ths›poλis. For pop. etym. see DA.I,73 & 282] belonging to a citizen, i. e. citizenlike, urbane, polite, usually in phrase porī vācā polite speech D.I,4, 114; S.I,189; II,280=A.II,51; A.III,114; Pug.57; Dhs.1344; DA.I,75, 282; DhsA.397. Cp. BSk. paurī vācā MVastu III,322. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Porisa: {'def': '² (nt.) [abstr. fr. purisa, *pauruṣyaṁ, cp. porisiya and poroseyya] 1. business, doing of a man (or servant, cp. purisa 2), service, occupation; human doing, activity M.I,85 (rāja°); Vv 6311 (=purisa-kicca VvA.263); Pv IV.324 (uṭṭhāna°=purisa-viriya, purisa-kāra PvA.252). -- 2. height of a man M. I.74, 187, 365. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】男子气概，人（举高手）的高度。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】男子气概，人(举高手)的高度。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.-n.) [abstr. fr. purisa, for *pauruṣa or *puruṣya]] 1. (adj.) human, fit for a man Sn.256 (porisa dhura), cp. porisiya & poroseyya. -- 2. (m.)=purisa, esp. in sense of purisa 2, i. e. servant, used collectively (abstract formn like Ger. dienerschaft, E. service= servants) “servants” esp. in phrase dāsa-kammakaraporisa Vin.I,240; A.I,145, 206; II,78; III,45, 76, 260; DhA.IV,1; dāsa° a servant Sn.769 (three kinds mentioned at Nd1 11, viz. bhaṭakā kammakarā upajīvino); rāja° king’s service, servant of the king D.I,135; A.IV,286, 322; sata° a hundred servants Vism.121. For purisa in uttama° (=mahāpurisa) Dh.97 (cp. DhA.II,188). Cp. posa. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Porisatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. porisa], only in neg. a° inhuman or superhuman state, or: not served by any men (or servants) VvA.275. The reading is uncertain. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Porisiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. purisa, cp. porisa & poroseyya] 1. of human nature, human J.IV,213. -- 2. Of the height of man Vin.II,138. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Porisāda: {'def': '【形】食人者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】食人者。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. purisa+ad to eat] man-eater, cannibal J.V,34 sq., 471 sq., 486, 488 sq., 499, 510. Porisādaka =porisāda J.V,489. Cp. pursādaka J.V,91. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Porohicca: {'def': '【中】国师的办公室。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】国师的办公室。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Porohita: {'def': '=purohita; DhA.I,174 (v. l. BB pur°). Porohacca (nt.) [fr. purohita] the character or office of a family priest D.II,243. As porohicca at Sn.618 (=purohita-kamma SnA 466). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poroseyya: {'def': '=porisiya (cp. porisa1 1) fit for man, human M.I,366. The word is somewhat doubtful, but in all likelihood it is a derivation fr. pura (cp. porin; Sk. *paura), thus to be understood as *paurasya›*porasya ›*poraseyya›*poroseyya with assimilation. The meaning is clearly “very fine, urbane, fashionable”; thus not derived from purisa, although C. expls by “puris’ânucchavikaṁ yānaṁ” (M. I.561). The passage runs “yānaṁ poroseyyaṁ pavara-maṇi-kuṇḍalaṁ”; with vv. ll. voropeyya & oropeyya. Neumann accepts oropeyya as reading & translates (wrongly) “belüde”: see Mittl. Slg. 21921; vol. II. pp. 45 & 666. The reading poroseyya seems to be established as lectio difficilior. On form see also Trenckner, Notes 75. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Porāna: {'def': 'porānaka, 【形】古的，旧的，先前的。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'porānaka,【形】古的，旧的，先前的。porāṇaka-therā﹐诸古长老(复数)，注解书提到的，他们的主张学说有纪元前一世纪的斯里蓝卡之古长老们的场合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Porāṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [=purāṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paurāṇa] old, ancient, former D.I,71, 238; S.II,267; Sn.313; Dh.227 (cp. DhA.III,328); J.II,15 (°kāle in the past); VbhA.1 (°aṭṭhakathā), 523 (id.); KhA 247 (°pāṭha); SnA 131 (id.); DhA.I,17; PvA.1 (°aṭṭhakathā), 63. -- Porāṇā (pl.) the ancients, ancient authorities or writers Vism.passim esp. Note, 764; KhA 123, 158; SnA 291, 352, 604; VbhA.130, 254, 299, 397, 513. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Porāṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. porāṇa] 1. ancient, former, of old (cp. purāṇa 1) J.III,16 (°paṇḍitā); PvA.93 (id.), 99 (id.); DhA.I,346 (kula-santaka). -- 2. old, worn, much used (cp. purāṇa 2) J.IV,471 (magga). (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Posa: {'def': '² (adj.) [=*poṣya, grd. of poseti, puṣ] to be fed or nourished, only in dup° difficult to nourish S.I,61. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】人。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [contraction of purisa fr. *pūrṣa›*pussa›*possa› posa. So Geiger, P.Gr. 303]=purisa, man (poetical form, only found in verse) Vin.I,230; S.I,13, 205= J.III,309; A.IV,266; Sn.110, 662; Dh.104, 125 (cp. DhA.III,34); J.V,306; VI,246, 361. -- poso at J.III,331 is Gen. sg. of puṁs=Sk. puṁsaḥ. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Posaka: {'def': '【形】饲养的，有营养的，抚养的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】饲养的，有营养的，抚养的人。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. posa2] nourishing, feeding A.I,62, 132= It.110 (āpādaka+); f. °ikā a nurse, a female attendant Vin.II,289 (āpādikā+). (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Posana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. puṣ] nourishing, feeding, support VvA.137. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】抚养，滋养，饲养。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】抚养，滋养，饲养。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Posatha: {'def': '参考 uposatha。 ~thika, 【阳】守持斋戒者。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '=uposatha [cp. BSk. poṣadha Divy 116, 121, and Prk. posaha (posahiya=posathika) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 141] J.IV,329; VI,119. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】布萨，斋戒日。参考 uposatha。posathika,【阳】守持斋戒者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Posathika: {'def': '=uposathika J.IV,329. Cp. anuposathika & anvaḍḍhamāsaṁ. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Posatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. posa2] only --°, in su° & dup° easy & difficult support Vin.II,2. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poseti: {'def': '[puṣ] to nourish, support, look after, bring up, take care of, feed, keep Vin.I,269; S.I,181; A.I,117; J.I,134; III,467; Nd2 36; Vism.305; VvA.138, 299. -- pp. posita. -- Caus. posāpeti. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pus +e), 滋养，抚养，照顾，喂。【过】posesi。【现分】posenta。【义】posetabba。【独】posetvā。【不】posetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pus + e), 滋养，抚养，照顾，喂。【过】 posesi。【现分】 posenta。【潜】 posetabba。【独】 posetvā。【不】 posetuŋ。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Posikā: {'def': '【阴】护士，后母。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】护士，后母。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Posin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. poseti] thriving (on), nourished by Vin.I,6; D.I,75; S.I,138; Sn.65 (anañña° cp. Nd2 36), 220 (dāra°); DA.I,219. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Posita: {'def': '(Poseti的【过分】), 已抚养，已滋养。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of poseti] nourished, fed Cp. III,32; VvA.173 (udaka°). Posituṁ at Vin.II,151 stands for phusituṁ “to sprinkle,” cp. Vin. Texts III,169. See phusati2. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Posāpeti: {'def': '& Posāveti [Caus. II. fr. poseti] to have brought up, to give into the care of, to cause to be nourished Vin.I,269 (pp. posāpita) ≈ DA.I,133 (posāvita, v. l. posāp°). (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Posāvanika: {'def': '【中】抚养费，津贴，生计。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& °ya (adj.-nt.) [fr. posāvana=posāpana of Caus. posāpeti] 1. (adj.) to be brought up, being reared, fed Vin.I,272; J.III,134, 432. --°iya DhA.III,35; J.III,35; J.III,429 (&°iyaka). -- 2. (nt.) fee for bringing somebody up, allowance, money for food, sustenance J.II,289; DhA.IV,40; VvA.158 (°mūla). --°iya J.I,191. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】抚养费，津贴，生计。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pota: {'def': '【阳】1.小动物，2.芽，分枝，3.大船的小船。potaka,【阳】小动物。【阴】potikā。potavāha,【阳】水手。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹[cp. Epic Sk. pota, see putta for etym.] the young of an animal J.II,406 (°sūkara); Cp. I.102 (udda°); SnA 125 (sīha°). (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [etym.?] a millstone, grindstone, only as nisada° Vin.I,201; Vism.252. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [Epic Sk. pota; dial. form for plota (?), of plu] a boat Dāvs.V,58; VvA.42. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 崽子，2. 芽，分枝，3. 大船的小船。 ~ka, 【阳】崽子。【阴】potikā。 ~vāha, 【阳】水手。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Potaka: {'def': '(-°) [fr. pota1] 1. the young of an animal M.I,104 (kukkuṭa°); J.I,202 (supaṇṇa°), 218 (hatthi°); II,288 (assa° colt); III,174 (sakuṇa°); PvA.152 (gaja°). -- f. potikā J.I,207 (haṁsa°); IV,188 (mūsika°). -- 2. a small branch, offshoot, twig; in twig; in amba° young mango sprout DhA.III,206 sq.; araṇi° small firewood Miln.53. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pothetvā: {'def': 'at J.II,404 (ummukkāni p.) is doubtful. The vv. ll. are yodhetvā & sodhetvā (the latter a preferable reading). (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pothujjanika: {'def': '【形】凡夫的。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. puthujjana] belonging to ordinary man, common, ordinary, in 2 combns viz. (1) phrase hīna gamma p. anariya Vin.I,10; S.IV,330; A.V,216; (2) with ref. to iddhi Vin.II,183; J.I,360; Vism.97. ‹-› Cp. Vin. Texts III,230. The BSk. forms are either pārthag-janika Lal. Vist 540, or prāthug-janika MVastu III,331. (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】凡夫的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pottha: {'def': '² [later Sk. pusta, etym. uncertain; loan-word?] modelling, only in cpd. °kamma plastering (i. e. using a mixture of earth, lime, cowdung & water as mortar) J.VI,459; carving DhsA.334; and °kara a modeller in clay J.I,71. Cp. potthaka1. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹[?] poor, indigent, miserable J.II,432 (=potthakapilotikāya nivatthatā pottho C.; v. l. poṭha). See also *ponti, with which ultimately identical. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Potthaka: {'def': '【阳、中】书，绘画的帆布。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】书，绘画的帆布。potthakasibbaka﹐【阳】装订书的人(book-binder)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹[cp. Class. Sk. pustaka] 1. a book J.I,2 (aya° ledger); III,235, 292; IV,299, 487; VvA.117. -- 2. any‹-› thing made or modelled in clay (or wood etc.), in rūpa° a modelled figure J.VI,342; ThA.257; DA.I,198; Sdhp.363, 383. Cp. pottha2. Potthaka2 (nt.) [etym.?] cloth made of makaci fibre Vin.I,306 (cp. Vin. Texts II.247); A.I,246 sq.; J.IV,251 (=ghana-sāṭaka C.; v. l. saṇa°); Pug.33. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Potthalikā: {'def': '【阴】人体模型，布娃娃。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】人体模型，布娃娃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Potthanikā: {'def': '【阴】匕首。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】匕首。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. puth?] a dagger (=potthanī) Vin.II,190=DA.I,135 (so read here with v. l. for T. °iyā). (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Potthanī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. puth?] a butcher’s knife J.VI,86 (maṁsakoṭṭhana°), 111 (id.). (Page 475)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poṅkha: {'def': '【中】箭羽(箭的羽毛部份)。参考 Puṅkha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[increment form of puṅkha] arrow, only in redupl. (iterative) cpd. Poṅkh’ânupoṅkhaṁ (adv.) arrow after arrow, shot after shot, i. e. constantly, continuously S.V,453, 454; Nd2 631 (in def. of sadā); DA.I,188; VvAh 351. The expln is problematic. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Puṅkha。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Poṇa: {'def': '【形】向下倾斜的，倾向於，聚合的，领导的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】向下倾斜的，倾向于，聚合的，领导的。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. pa+ava+nam, cp. ninna & Vedic pravaṇa] 1. sloping down, prone, in anupubba° gradually sloping (of the ocean) Vin.II,237=A.IV,198 sq.=Ud.53. -- 2. (-°) sloping towards, going to, converging or leading to Nibbāna; besides in var. phrases, in general as tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra, “leading to that end.” As nibbāna° e. g. at M.I,493; S.V,38 sq.; A.III,443; cp. Vv 8442 (nekkhamma°-nibbāna-ninna VvA.348); taṁ° Ps.II,197; ṭhāne PvA.190; viveka° A.IV,224, 233; V,175; samādhi° Miln.38; kiṁ° M.I,302. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [=poṇa2?] only in cpd. danta° a tooth pick Vin.IV,90; J.IV,69; Miln.15; SnA 272. As dantapoṇaka at Dāvs.I,57. -- kūṭa-poṇa at Vism.268 read °goṇa. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poṇika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. poṇa2] that which is prone, going prone; DA.I,23 where the passage is “tiracchāna-gata-pāṇāpoṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti,” quoted from S.III,152, where it runs thus: “tiracchāna-gata pāṇā te pi bhikkhave tiracchānagatā pāṇā citten’eva cittatā.” The passage is referred to with poṇika at KhA 12, where we read “tiracchāna-gatā pāṇā poṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti.” Thus we may take poṇikanikāya as “the kingdom of those which go prone” (i. e. the animals). (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poṭa: {'def': '[fr. sphuṭ] a bubble J.IV,457 (v. l. poṭha). See also phoṭa. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poṭaki: {'def': '(°ī?) (m. f.?) [etym. uncertain, prob. Non-Aryan] a kind of grass, in °tūla a kind of cotton, “grass-tuft,” thistle-down (?) Vin.II,150; IV,170 (id., 3 kinds of cotton, spelt potaki here). Poṭakila [etym. unknown, cp. poṭaki & (lexic.) Sk. poṭagala a kind of reed; the variant is poṭagala] a kind of grass, Saccharum spontaneum Th.1, 27=233; J.VI,508 (=p.°-tiṇaṁ nāma C.). (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poṭha: {'def': '[fr. puth, cp. poṭhana & poṭheti] is aṅguli° snapping of one’s fingers (as sign of applause) J.V,67. Cp. poṭhana & phoṭeti. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poṭhana: {'def': '(& Pothana) (nt.) [fr. poṭheti] 1. striking, beating J.II,169 (tajjana°); V,72 (udaka°); VI,41 (kappāsa°dhanuka). At all J passages th. -- 2. (th) snapping one’s fingers J.I,394 (aṅguli°, +celukkhepa); ThA.76 (aṅguli°, for accharā-saṅghāta Th.2, 67). Cp. nippothana. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】打，殴打。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】打，殴打。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Poṭheti: {'def': 'potheti (poth+e), 打，袭击，捻(手指)使劈啪作响。【过】poṭhesi。【过分】poṭhita。【独】poṭhetvā。【被】poṭhiyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& Potheti) [fr. puth=sphuṭ] 1. to beat, strike Sn.682 (bhujāni=appoṭheti SnA 485); J.I,188, 483 (th) II.394; VI,548 (=ākoṭeti); DhA.I,48; II,27 (th), 67 (th); VvA.68 (th); PvA.65 (th). -- 2. to snap one’s fingers as a token of annoyance D.II,96; or of pleasure J.III,285 (aṅguliyo poṭhesi). -- pp. poṭhita. -- Caus. II. poṭhāpeti (poth°) to cause to be beaten or flogged Miln.221; DhA.I,399. -- Cp. pappoṭheti. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'potheti (poth + e), 打，袭击，捻（手指）使劈啪作响。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 poṭhita。【独】 ~etvā。【被】 poṭhiyati。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Poṭhita: {'def': '(& Pothita) [pp. of poṭheti] beaten, struck Miln.240 (of cloth, see Kern, Toev. s. poṭheti); J.III,423 (mañca; v. l. BB pappoṭ°) KhA 173 (°tulapicu cotton beaten seven times, i. e. very soft; v. l. pothita, see App. p. 877); DhA.I,48 (su°); PvA.174. -- Cp. paripothita. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poṭhiyamāna: {'def': '【现分】正在挨打。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【现分】正在挨打。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Poṭṭhabba: {'def': 'is spurious reading for phoṭṭhabba (q. v.). (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Poṭṭhapāda: {'def': '【阳】布吒波陀月(月份名，大约在八月至九月之间，农历7月16至8月15)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】布吒波陀月（月份名，大约在八月至九月之间）。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pubba: {'def': '² (adj.) [Vedic pūrva, to Idg. *per, see pari & cp. Goth. fram=from; Gr. prόmos first, Goth. fruma=As. formo first, Av. pourvō, also Sk. pūrvya=Goth. frauja =Ohg. frō Lord, frouwa=Ger. frau. See also Lat. prandium, provincia] previous, former, before. The adj. never occurs in abs. forms by itself (for which see pubbaka), it is found either as --° or °- or in cases as adv. The phrase pubbam antam anissita Sn.849 is poetical for pubbantam. -- 1. (-°) having been before J.III,200; na diṭṭha° not seen before Nd1 445; mātabhūta° formerly (been) his mother PvA.79; vuttha° (gāma) formerly inhabited DhA.I,15; as adv. bhūtapubbaṁ before any beings (existed) Vin.I,342; DhA.I,102 and passim (see bhūta). -- 2. (neg.) apubba (nt.) what has not been before, something new VvA.117, 287. Acc. as adv. in phrase apubbaṁ acarimaṁ not earlier, not after, i. e. simultaneously M.III,65; Pug.13 (=apure apacchā, ekappahāren’evâti attho PugA 186). ‹-› 3. (cases adverbially) Instr. pubbena in °âpara gradual M.III,79; Acc. pubbaṁ see 1, 2, with Abl. as prep.= before SnA 549 (=purā); Loc. pubbe in earlier times (also referring to previous births, cp. pure), in the past, before S.IV,307; Sn.831, 949 (with pacchā & majjhe, i. e. future & present); Pv.I,31; II,22; SnA 290, 385, 453; PvA.4, 10, 39, 40, 100. With Abl. as prep.= before S.II,104. In compn with °nivāsa see sep. An old Acc. f. *pūrvīṁ (cp. Prk. puvviṁ Pischel, Gr. § 103) we find in Cpd. anupubbikathā (q. v.). The compar. pubbatara (“quite early”) occurs abs. at S.IV,117 as Nom. pl. “ancestors” (cp. Gr. oi( prόteroi), as Loc. adv. at S.I,22. --aṅgin in f. °aṅgī (cāru°) at J.V,4 & VI,481 read sabbaṅgin. --aṇṇa “first grain,” a name given to the 7 kinds of grain, as distinguished from aparaṇṇa, the 7 sorts of vegetables, with which it is usually combined; Vin.III,151; IV,267; Nd1 248 (where the 7 are enumd); Nd2 314; J.II,185; Miln.106; DA.I,78, 270; DhA.IV,81 etc. (see aparaṇṇa). See also bīja-bīja. --aṇha the former part of the day, forenoon, morning (as contrasted with majjhaṇha & sāyaṇha) D.I,109, 226; A.I,294; III,344; S.I,76 (°samayaṁ); SnA 139 (id.); DhA.III,98; PvA.61, 216. The spelling pubbanha M.I,528 (cp. Trenckner, Notes 80). --anta (1) the East J.I,98 (°ato aparantaṁ aparantato pubbantaṁ gacchati from E. to W. from W. to E.); V,471. -- (2) the Past (opp. aparanta the Future) D.I,12 sq.; S.II,26; Nd1 212; Dhs.1004. pubbam antaṁ for pubbantaṁ is poetical at Sn.849. --°ânudiṭṭhi theory concerning the past or the beginning of things D.I,13 (cp. DA.I,103); M.II,233; S.III,45; Dhs.1320. --aḷha(ka) (āḷhaka) at Th.2, 395 is doubtful. T. reads bubbuḷaka, Mrs. Rh. D. translates “bubble of film”; ThA.259 explns by “ṭhita-jalapubbaḷha-sadisa.” --ācariya (1) an ancient teacher, a scholar of previous times A.I,132; II,70; It.110; Vism.523=VbhA.130; KhA 11, 64, 65. -- (2) a former teacher SnA 318. --āciṇṇa (-vasena) by way of former practice, from habit SnA 413. --âpara (1) what precedes and what follows, what comes first and what last (with ref. to the successive order of syllables and words in the text of the Scriptures) A.III,201 (°kusala); Dh.352; Nett 3 (°ânusandhi); cp. BSk. pūrvāpareṇa vyākhyānaṁ karoti “expld in due order” AvŚ II.20. -- (2) °rattaṁ “as in the former, so in the foll. night,” i. e. without ceasing, continuous Th.1, 413. cp. pub baratt-âparattaṁ DhA.IV,129. --âpariya former & future, first & last Ud.61 (°vivesa); --ābhoga previous reflection ThA.30. --ārāma “Eastern Park,” N. of a locality east of Sāvatthi A.III,344; Sn.p. 139 (cp. SnA. 502). --āsava former intoxication Sn.913, cp. Nd1 331. --uṭṭhāna getting up before (someone else) either applied to a servant getting up before the master, or to a wife rising before her husband VvA.71, 136. --uṭṭnāyin “getting up earlier” (with complementary Ep. pacchā-nipātin “lying down later”), see above D.I,60; III,191; A.III,37; IV,265 sq.; DA.I,168. -- abstr. °uṭṭhāyitā J.III,406 (°ādīhi pañcahi kalyāṇa dhammehi samannāgatā patidevatā)=V.88; KhA 173. --uttara (1) preceding and following KAcc. 44. 47. -- (2) “eastnorthern,” i. e. north-eastern J.V,38 (°kaṇṇa N.E. corner); VI,519 (id.). --kamma a former deed, a deed done in a former existence Cp. III,113. --kārin “doing before,” i. e. looking after, obliging, doing a favour A.I,87; Pug.26 (=paṭhamaṁ eva kāraka PugA 204) PvA.114. --kicca preiiminary function Vin.V,127 (cattāro pubbakiccā); cp. Cpd. 53. --koṭṭhaka “Eastern Barn,” Npl. A.III,345. --(n)gama (1) going before, preceding A.III,108 (okkamane p.); M.III,71 sq. ‹-› (2) “allowing to go before”; controlled or directed by, giving precedence Dh.2 (mano° dhammā=tena paṭhama-gāminā hutvā samannāgatā DhA.I,35); Nd2 318; Pug.15 (paññā° ariyamagga=paññaṁ pure-cārikaṁ katṿā PugA 194); Sdhp.547 (paññā°). Cp. BSk. pūrvaṅgama Divy 333 (“obedient” Index). --carita former life SnA 382, 385. --ja born earlier, i. e. preceding in age PvA.57 (=jeṭṭhaka). --ñāti former relative PvA.24. --deva a former god, a god of old, pl. the ancient gods (viz. the Asuras) S.I,224. --devatā an ancient deity A.II,70; It.110 (v. l. °deva). --nimitta “previous sign,” a foregoing sign, prognostic, portent. forecast It.76 (the 5 signs of decay of a god); J.I,11 (the 32 signs at the conception of a Buddha, given in detail on p. 51), 48; Miln.298 (of prophetic dreams, cp. Cpd. p. 48); VbhA.407 (in dreams); DhA.II,85. --pada the former, or antecedent, part (of a phrase) DhsA.164. --parikamma a former action SnA 284 (opp. to pacchā-parikamma). --purisa ancestor D.I,93, 94. --peta a deceased spirit, a ghost (=peta) D.I,8 (°kathā, cp. DA.I,90 & Dial. I.14). pubbe pete is poetical at Pv.I,41 for pubbapete. Cp. BSk. pūrvapreta AvŚ I.149 (see Index p. 230); Divy 47, 97. --bhāga “former part,” i. e. previous PvA.133 (°cetanā opp. apara-bhāga-cetanā. SS omit bhāga). --bhāsin speaking obligingly (cp. pubbakārin) D.I,116 (trsl. “not backward in conversation”), DA.I,287 (bhāsanto va paṭhamataraṁ bhāsati etc.). --yoga “former connection, “ i. e. connection with a former body or deed, former action (and its result) J.V,476; VI,480; Miln.2 (pubbayogo ti tesaṁ pubba-kammaṁ). Kern, Toev. s. v. remarks that it is frequent in BSk. as pūrvayoga (yoga=yuga; syn. with pūrvakalpa), e. g. Saddh. Puṇḍ. ch. VII.; MVastu II.287; III,175; and refers to Ind. Studien 16, 298; J.R.A.S. 1875, 5. --rattâparattaṁ the past and future time, the whole time, always A.III,70; DhA.IV,129. --vāsana an impression remaining in the mind from former actions Sn.1009; ThA.31 (Ap. v. 8). --videha Eastern Videha KhA 123, 176; SnA 443. --sadisa an old (former) friend DhA.I,57 Pubbaka (adj.) [fr. pubba2] 1. former, ancient, living in former times D.I,104 (isayo), 238 (id.); Sn.284 (id.); S.II,105; IV,307 (ācariya-pācariyā); Th.1, 947. ‹-› 2. (-°; cp. pubba2 1) having formerly been, previous J.I,182 (suvaṇṇakāra° bhikkhu), cp. BSk. °pūrvaka in same use at AvŚ I.259, 296, 322. -- 3. (-°) accompanied or preceded by ThA.74 (guṇ’âbhitthavana° udāna); PvA.122 (puññânumodana° maggācikkhana); cp. āśvāsana-pūrvaka Jtm 210. (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】脓，物质。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】先前的(往昔：台语：以早i2 ca2，以往i2 ong2，以前i2 cing5，卡早khah ca2，古早koo2 ca2，向时hing3 si3，往阵ing2 cun7，往过ing kue3往摆ing2 pai2)，比较早的，东方人。(在【合】中) 以前曾经是，例： gatapubba = 曾经去过。pubbanta,【阳】过去，以前的末端。pubbakamma,【中】过去业。pubbakicca,【中】事前准备工作。pubbaṅgama,【形】走在前头的，在前的。pubbacarita,【中】前世传记。pubbadeva,【阳】古神，即：阿修罗。pubbanimitta,【中】前兆、瑞相。pubbapurisa,【阳】祖先，古人。pubbapeta,【阳】已故的鬼。pubbabhāga,【阳】前部份。【形】早先的。pubbayoga,【阳】前连接。pubbavideha,【阳】弗婆提洲、东胜身洲(东方大陆的名字)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】脓，物质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹[Vedic pūya›*pūva›*puvva›pubba (Geiger, P.Gr. § 461); cp. pūyati to smell rotten, Lat. pūs=E. pus, Gr. pu/qw to rot, pu/on matter; Vedic pūti smelling foul; Goth. fūls=E. foul] pus, matter, corruption M.I,57; III,90; S.I,150; II,157; A.I,34; J.II,18; Miln.382; PvA.80. -- In detail discussed (as one of the 32 ākāras) at Vism.261, 360; KhA 62; VbhA.244. -- Often in combn pubba-lohita matter & blood, e. g. Sn.p. 125; Sn.671; J.V,71; DhA.I,319; as food of the Petas Pv.I,69; I,91 (lohita-pubba); I,118; II,26. pubba-vaṭṭi a lump of matter DhA.III,117. (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】先前的，比较早的，东方人。 (在【合】中) 以前曾经是，例：gatapubba = 曾经去过。 ~anta, 【阳】过去，以前的末端。 ~kamma, 【中】过去业。 ~kicca, 【中】事前准备工作。 ~ṅgama, 【形】走在前头的，在前的。 ~carita, 【中】前世传记。 ~deva, 【阳】古神，即：阿修罗。~nimitta, 【中】前兆。 ~purisa, 【阳】祖先，古人。 ~peta, 【阳】已故的阴灵。 ~bhāga, 【阳】前部份。【形】早先的。 ~yoga, 【阳】前连接。 ~videha, 【阳】弗婆提洲、东胜身洲（东方大陆的名字）。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pubbaseliya: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Pūrvaśaila] 東山部, 東山住部 [アーンドラ地方における大衆部の一派].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Pubbavideha: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Pūrvavideha] 東勝身(洲), 弗婆毘提訶 [須弥山の東方にある人間界, 人四洲の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Pubbaṇha: {'def': '【阳】午前。pubbaṇhasamaya,【阳】午前。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】午前。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pubbaṇṇa: {'def': '【中】前食，首食（七谷的名字，七谷即：sāli 熟米、 vīhi 稻谷、yava 大麦、 godhūma 小麦、 kaṅgu 黍、 varaka 豆、 kudrūsa 稗子）。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】前食，首食(七谷的名字，七谷即：sāli 米(泰国说「小麦」wheat)、 vīhi 稻谷、yava 大麦(泰国说‘糯米’glutinous rice)、godhūma 小麦(泰国说「野豌豆」tares)、kaṅgu 黍(或小米、粟millet or sorghum)、varaka 豆(泰国说「薏苡仁」Job’s tears)、 kudrūsa 谷类)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pubbe: {'def': '【处】从前，过去。 ~kata, 【形】从前完成的。 ~nivāsa, 【阳】前世。 ~nivāsañāṇā, 【中】 ~sānussati, 【阴】记得前世，前世智，前世随念。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【处】从前，过去。pubbekata,【形】从前完成的。pubbenivāsa,【阳】宿世，前世。pubbenivāsañāṇā,【中】pubbesānussati,【阴】记得前世，前世智，前世随念。pubbe katahetu(=pubbekatahetu)﹐宿命造，其因为於前世所作业。又译作：因本作，本作因，宿作因。bhūtapubbaṁ,往昔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(°-) [Loc. of pubba2, see pubba2 3] in cpds.: “in a former existence”: °kata (nt.) deeds done in a past life M.II,217=A.I,173 (°hetu); J.V,228 (°vādin fatalist); Nett 29 (°punnata). °nivāsa [cp. BSk. pūrve-nivāsasaṁprayuktaṁ MVastu III,224, otherwise as pūrvanivāsa Divy 619] abode in a former life, one’s former state of existence D.II,1, 2; III,31 sq., 50 sq., 108 sq, 230, 281; M.I,278; II,21; III,12; S.I,167; A.I,164 sq.; It.100; Sn.647; Dh.423; Pug.61; Vism.411 (remembered by 6 classes of individuals); ThA.74, 197. ‹-› pubbe-nivās’ânussati (-ñāṇa) (knowledge of) remembrance of one’s former state of existence, one of the faculties of an Arahant (cp. A.I,164 sq., and Cpd. 64) D.III,110, 220; M.I,35, 182, 248, 278, 496; Dhs.1367; Nett 28, 103; Vism.433; VbhA.373 sq., 401, 422; Tikp. 321. -- See also under nivāsa and cp. Vism.ch. XIII, pp. 410 sq. (Page 468)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pubbuṇḍhāyī: {'def': '【形】（比他人）先起床的。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】(比他人)先起床的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pubbā: {'def': '【阴】东部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】东部。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pubbācariya: {'def': '【阳】先师。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】第一位老师。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pubbāpara: {'def': '【形】什么开始和什么随后，前后的。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】什么开始和什么随后，前后的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pubbāpeti: {'def': '[denom. fr. pubba2] occurs only in one phrase (gattāni pubbāpayamāno) at M.I,161 & A.III,345≈402 in meaning “drying again”; at both A pass. the vv. ll. (glosses) are “sukkhāpayamāno” and “pubba-sadisāni kurumāno”; to the M. pass. cp. Trenckner’s notes on p. 543, with the BB expln of the word (=pubbabhāvaṁ gamayamāno), also Neumann, Majjh. trsln I.260. The similar passage at S.I,8, 10 has “gattāni sukkhāpayamāno” as T. reading and “pubbāpayamāno” as v. l. BB. (Page 468)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pubbārāma: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Pūrvārāma] 東園 [舎衛城の東方にある鹿母講堂].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Puccaṇḍa: {'def': '(pūti + aṇḍa), 【中】腐臭的蛋。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pūti+aṇḍa),【中】腐臭的蛋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puccaṇḍatā: {'def': '(f.) [pūti+aṇḍa+tā, viâ *pūtyaṇḍatā] state of a rotten egg M.I,357. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puccha: {'def': '【中】尾巴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】尾巴。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic puccha (belonging with punar to Lat. puppis) & P. piccha] a tail DhsA.365 (dog’s tail). See puñcikata. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pucchaka: {'def': '【阳】发问者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pṛch] asking, questioning DhsA.2, 3 (pañha°). (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】发问者。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pucchana: {'def': '【中】询问的行为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. pṛch] asking, enquiring, questioning Sn.504 (ā); PvA.121, 223. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】询问的行为。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pucchati: {'def': '(pucch + a), 问，询问。【过】 pucchi。【过分】 puṇḍha, pucchita。【现分】 ~chanta。【独】 ~chitvā。【潜】 ~chitabba。【不】 ~chituŋ。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pucch询问+a), 问，询问。【过】pucchi。【过分】puṇḍha, pucchita。【现分】pucchanta。【独】pucchitvā。【义】pucchitabba。【不】pucchituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pṛcch, cp. Vedic pṛcchati=Lat. posco, postulo, with which connected also Lat. precor=Goth. fraihnan; Ohg. frāgōn; Vedic praśna=P. pañha] 1. to ask, to question S.I,207, 214; Vin.II,207; Sn.995; Nd1 341 etc. -- Pres. 1st sg. pucchāmi Sn.83, 241, 682, 1043, 1049; Nd2 447: Pv.II,112. -- 1st pl. pucchāma Sn.1052; Imper. puccha Sn.460; DA.I,155; pucchatha D.II,154; pucchassu Sn.189, 993; Pot. puccheyyāmi D.I,51; puccheyya A.I,199; PvA.6; ppr. pucchanto Sn.1126; aor. 1st sg. apucchissaṁ Sn.1116, pucchisaṁ Vv 3011, apucchiṁ VvA.127; 2nd sg. apucchasi Sn.1050; 3rd sg. apucchi Sn.1037, apucchasi Nd2 447; pucchi Sn.981, 1031; PvA.6, 39, 68; apucchatha Sn.1017; 1st. pl. apucchimha Sn.1052. 3rd pl. pucchiṁsu J.I,221; pucchisuṁ Mhvs 10, 2. Fut. pucchissāmi J.VI,364. Inf. pucchituṁ Vin.I,93; Sn.510; puṭṭhuṁ Sn.1096, 1110; pucchitāye J.V,137. Grd. pucchavho Sn.1030; Pass. pucchiyati DhA.I,10. -- Caus. II. pucchāpeti Mhvs 10, 75. -- pp. puṭṭha & pucchita (q. v.). -- 2. to invite to (Instr.), to offer, to present to somebody (Acc.), lit. to ask with Vin.II,208, 210 (pāniyena); III,161 (odanena, sūpena etc.); D.II,240. -- See also anu°, abhi°, sam°. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pucchita: {'def': '[pp. of pucchati] asked Sn.76, 126, 383, 988, 1005; Nd1 211; KhA 125 (°kathā); PvA.2, 13, 51. ‹-› Cp. puṭṭha. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pucchitar: {'def': '[n. ag. to pucchita] one who asks, a questioner M.I,472; S.III,6 sq.; Sn.p. 140. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pucchā: {'def': '【阴】问题。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】问题。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pṛcchā=Ohg. forsca question] a question Sn.1023; SnA 46, 200, 230. A system of questions (“questionnaire”) is given in the Niddesa (and Commentaries), consisting of 12 groups of three questions each. In full at Nd1 339, 340=Nd2 under pucchā (p. 208). The first group comprises the three adiṭṭha-jotanā pucchā, diṭṭha-sa ‘sandanā p., vimaticchedanā p. These three with addition of anumati p. and kathetu-kamyatā p. also at DA.I,68=DhsA.55. The complete list is referred to at SnA 159. --apuccha (adj.) that which is not a question, i. e. that which should not be asked Miln.316. --puccha-vissajjanā question and answer PvA.2. -- At Nett 18 p. occurs as quâsi synonym of icchā and patthanā. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pucimanda: {'def': '[fr. picumanda] the Nimba tree, Azadirachta Indica J.III,34; IV,205; VI,269 (°thanī, of a woman= nimba-phala-saṇṭhāna-thana-yuggalā C.). (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】印度楝（参考 Nimba）。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹picumanda),【阳】印度楝(the Nimba tree, Azadirachta Indica。参考 Nimba)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pudava: {'def': '(poddava?) see gāma° (Vin.II,105 with Bdhgh note on p. 315). (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puggala: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. pudgala, etym. connected with puṁs, although the fantastic expln of native Commentators refers it to puṁ “a hell” and gal; so at Vism.310: “pun ti vuccati nirayo, tasmiṁ galantī ti puggalā”] 1. an individual, as opposed to a group (saṅgha or parisā), person, man; in later philosophical (Abhidhamma) literature=character, soul (=attan). ‹-› D.I,176; M.III,58; S.I,93 sq.; III,25; A.I,8, 197; II,126 sq.; Sn.544, 685; Dh.344; Ps.I,180 sq.; II,1 sq., 52; Pv.II,325 (cp. PvA.88); II,97; PvA.40, 132. -- pl. puggalā people VvA.86 (=sattā), 149. -- para-puggala another man D.I,213; S.II,121; V,265; Vism.409. --purisa-puggala individual man, being, person S.II,206; IV,307; A.I,173=M.II,217. Characterised as an individual in var. ways, e. g. as agga° Sdhp.92, 558; abhabba° J.I,106; ariya° Vin.V,117; asura-parivāra° A.II,91; kodhagaru° A.II,46; gūtha°, puppha° madhubhāṇī° A.I,128; dakkhiṇeyya° VvA.5; diṭṭhisampanna° A.I,26 sq.; III,439 sq.; IV,136; nibbiriya kusīta° J.IV,131; pāsāṇalekh’ûpama° etc. A.I,283; valāhak’ûpama A.II,102 sq.; saddha, asaddha Ps.I,121; II,33; sivāthik’upama A.III,268; suppameyya etc. A.I,266 sq. [a]sevitabba A.IV,365; V,102, 247, 281; hīna majjhima paṇīta S.II,154. -- Groups of characters: (2) A.I,76, 87; (3) gilān’ûpama etc. A.I,121 sq.; avuṭṭhika-sama padesa-vassin, sabbatth’âbhivassin It.64 sq.; satthar, sāvaka, sekha It.78; sekha asekha n’eva-sekha-nāsekha D.III,218; (4) D.III,232, 233; S.I,93; J.IV,131; (5) Nett 191; (6) rāga-carita, dosa°, moha°, saddhā°, buddha°, vitakka° Vism.102; (7) ubhato-bhāga-vimutta, paññāvimutta etc. D.III,105; (8) A.III,212; S.V,343 (19) Nett 190; (26) Nett 189, 190. -- See also paṭipuggala. ‹-› 2. (in general) being, creature Miln.310 (including Petas & animals). --ñū knowing individuals D.III,252, 283. --paññatti descriptions of persons, classification of individuals D.III,105 (cp. Dial. III,101); also N. of one of the canonical books of the Abhidhamma-piṭaka. --vemattatā difference between individuals S.II,21; V,200; Sn.p. 102 (=°nānatta SnA 436). (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】个体，人。 ~paññatti, 【阴】《人施设论》论藏第四部。 ~lika,【形】个人的，个体的。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵pudgala),【阳】个体(individual)，人(person, man；saṅgha或parisā的反义词)，补伽罗(character, soul(=attan))。puggalañū, 知人(knowing individuals)。parapuggala, 他人(another man)。purisapuggala, 个人(individual man, being, person)。Vism.310.：“pun ti vuccati nirayo, tasmiŋ galantī ti puggalā”(由於地狱之义的「补」(pun)及堕於彼处(地狱)之义的「伽罗」(galanti)而成为补伽罗(人)。)。补伽罗(puggala﹐梵语 pudgala补特伽罗)，《一切经音义》卷第十六(T54.406.2)︰「富伽罗(梵语此译为「数取趣」也，数数於三界中往来也，或云「补特迦罗」也)。」。虽然有以上的定义，称作「四双八辈」(cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā初果向、初果，乃至阿罗汉向、阿罗汉)的圣者，尚以「补伽罗」为名。puggalaparoparaññū﹐观察众人，知人胜劣，知人胜如(AA.7.64./IV,57-8.)︰puggalaparoparaññū hotīti evaṁ bhikkhu puggalānaṁ paroparaṁ tikkhamudubhāvaṁ jānanasamattho nāma hoti.(知人胜劣︰如是比丘识别众人高低、利钝。)。aṭṭha ca puggaladhammaddasā(‹ puggala-dhamma-(d)dasa, m.Nom.pl. dasa ‹ dis/das, a. 看见的(人))﹐八辈(八个ㄍㄜˋ)见法之人。cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā, 四双八辈(须陀洹道及须陀洹果，向斯陀含道及斯陀含果，向阿那含道及阿那含果，向阿罗汉道及阿罗汉果)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puggala-paññatti: {'def': 'f. 人施設論 [七論の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Puggalapaññatti: {'def': '【阴】《人施设论》巴利论藏第四部，「人」(puggala)，是指凡人、圣人、因人、果人等意义的人。「施设」(paññatti)意为类集、安立、与分别。全书包含论母(mātikā)与解说两部份。而在汉译《集异门足论》、《舍利弗阿毘昙论》〈人品〉中也有与本书相似的叙述。puggalika,【形】个人的，个体的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puggalappasanna: {'def': '(puggala人+pasanna已明亮)﹐为人光明正大。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puggalika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. puggala] belonging to a single person, individual, separate Vin.I,250; II,270. The BSk. paudgalika at Divy 342 is used in a sense similar to the Vin passages. Divy Index gives, not quite correctly, “selfish.” (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pujja: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of pūj, cp. Sk. pūjya] to be honoured M.III,38 sq., 77 sq.; A.III,78 (v. l.); Nett 52, 56 (=pūjaniya C.). Compar. pujjatara M.I,13; & see pūja. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】光荣的，表示尊敬的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】光荣的，表示尊敬的。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pujāriji: {'def': 'Pujāri ji,【印】【无】住持(abbot, 由主持供奉仪式转变而来的字)。Dhp.v.73.︰āvāsesu ca issariyaṁ(僧院为院主)。issariya(院主)可能不通用。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pukkusa: {'def': '[non-Aryan; cp. Epic Sk. pukkuśa, pukkaśa pulkasa. The “Paulkāsa” are mentioned as a mixed caste at Vājasaneya Saṁhitā 30, 17 (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 217)] N. of a (Non-Aryan) tribe, hence designation of a low social class, the members of which are said (in the Jātakas) to earn their living by means of refuseclearing. On the subject see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 206, 207. -- Found in foll. enumerations: khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā caṇḍāla-pukkusā A.I,162= III,214; J.III,194 (expld by C. chava-chaḍḍaka-caṇḍālā ca puppha-chaḍḍaka-pukkusā ca); IV,303; Pv.II,612; Miln.5. Further as pukkusakula as the last one of the despised clans (caṇḍālakula, nesāda°, veṇa°, rathakāra°, p.°) at M.III,169; S.I,94; A.II,85; Vin.IV,6; Pug.51. With nesāda at PvA.176. -- Cp. M.III,169. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】除去者，拒绝。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(non-Aryan; cp. Epic Sk. pukkuwa, pukkawa pulkasa),【阳】清洁工，拒绝，补羯婆(音译)( (Non-Aryan) tribe, hence designation of a low social class, the members of which are said (in the Jātakas) to earn their living by means of refuseclearing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pulaka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. pulāka, Halāyudha 5, 43; not Sk. pulaka, as Kern, Toev. s. v. for which see also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. pilus] shrivelled grain Miln.232 (sukka-yava° of dried barley); DhA.II,154 (SS; T. reads mūlakaṁ, which is expld by Bdhgh as “nitthusaṁ katvā ussedetvā gahita-yava-taṇḍula vuccanti” ibid). Here belongs pulasa-patta of J.III,478. (vv. ll. pulā°, mūlā°, mulā°; expld by C. as “saṇhāṇi pulasa-gaccha-paṇṇāni,” thus taking pulasa as a kind of shrub, prob. because the word was not properly understood). (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pulasa: {'def': 'see pulaka. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pulava: {'def': 'pulavaka,【阳】虫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'pulavaka, 【阳】虫。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pulina: {'def': '【中】沙，沙滩。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】沙，沙滩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& Puḷina) (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. pulina, also Halāyudha 3, 48] 1. a sandy bank or mound in the middle of a river J.II,366 (vālika°); III,389 (id.); V,414; Miln.297 (ḷ); Dāvs.IV,29; Vism.263 (nadī°); VvA.40 (paṇḍara°). -- 2. a grain of sand Miln.180 (l). Pulla [a contracted form of purisa (q. v.)] man, only in cpd. pullinga (=purisa-linga) membrum virile, penis J.V,143 (where expld by C. as uṇha-chārikā pl. “hot embers”; the pass. is evidently misunderstood; v. l. BB phull°). (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puma: {'def': '【阳】雄，男，人。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Puman),【阳】雄，男，人(a male, a man)。nom sg. pumo; Instr. pumunā. Nom. pl. pumā(itthi-pumā men & women); Acc. sg. pumaṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puman: {'def': '(Pumā) [see puṁs] a male, a man, nom sg. pumo D n.273; Cp. II.62; Instr. pumunā J.VI,550. Nom. pl. pumā D.III,85 (itthi-pumā men & women; v. l. K. °purisā); J.III,459; Acc. sg. pumaṁ J.V,154 (gata, cp. purisantara-gata). -- On decl. cp. Müller, P.Gr. p. 79; Greiger, P.Gr. § 935. (Page 468)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pumati: {'def': '[onomat. *pu to blow, cp. Gr. fu=sa blowing, bubble, fusάw blow, Lat. pustula=pustule, Sk. *pupphusa=P. papphasa lung, phutkaroti blow, etc., see Uhlenbeck Ai. Wtb. s. v. pupphusa] to blow, aor. pumi J.I,171; ger. pumitvā J.I,172. See J.P.T.S. 1889, 207 (?). (Page 468)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐吹(台语：歕pun5)，打击。to blow, aor. pumi; ger. pumitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puna: {'def': '【无】再一次。 ~divasa, 【阳】下一天，隔天。 ~ppunaŋ, 【无】一次又一次。 ~bbhava, 【阳】再生。 ~vacana, 【中】 ~rutti, 【阴】重复。 ~āgamana, 【中】再来，又来。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [cp. Vedic punar, punaḥ, to base *pŭ (related to *apo: see apa), as in puccha tail, Lat. puppis, poop, Gr. pu/matos the last; orig. meaning “behind”] again. There are several forms of this adv., but puna has to be considered as the orig. Pali form. The form puno is doubtful; if authentic, a Sanskritisation; only found at ThA.71 (Ap. v. 38; v. l. puna) & 72 (Ap. v. 41, v. l. puna). The sandhi r is preserved only in metre and in compn.. That it is out of fashion even in metre is shown by a form punā where ā is the regular metrical lengthening instead of ar (J.III,437: na hi dāni punā atthi; v. l. puna). Besides this the r is apparent in the doubling of the first consonants of cpds. (punappunaṁ, punabbhava); it is quite lost in the enclitic form pana. -- We find r in punar āgami Sn.339; punar āgato J.I,403 (=puna āgato J.I,403 (=puna āgato, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto C.); in cpds.: punar-abhiseka see J.P.T.S. 1885, 49; a-punar-āvattitā the fact of not turning back Miln.276 (cp. Prk. apuṇar-avatti Pischel, § 343). Otherwise r stands on the same level as other sandhi (euphonic) consonants (like m. & d., see below), as in puna-r-eva Dh.338; Pv.II,87; II,116. We have m in puna-m-upāgamuṁ Sn.306; puna by itself is rarely found, it is usually combd with other emphatic part, like eva and api. The meaning is “again,” but in enclitic function (puna still found Sn.677, 876, otherwise pana); it represents “however, but, now” (cp. same relation in Ger. abermals: aber), similar to the development in Prk. puṇo vi & puṇar avi “again”: puna “now” (Pischel Gr. § 342). -- puna by itself at SnA 597; PvA.3, 45; Mhvs 14, 12. doubled as punappunaṁ S.I,174; Th.1, 531, 532; Sn.728, 1051; Dh.117, 118, 325, 337; J.V,208; SnA 107; PvA.45, 47; punappuna at DhA.II,75; as puna-d-eva at D.I,60, 142; Pv.II,113 (v. l.); Vism.163; DhA.II,76; puna-m-eva Pv.II,113; puna pi once more J.I,279; PvA.67, 74; puna-p-pi J.V,208. The phrase puna c’aparaṁ “and again something else” stands on the same level as the phrase aparo pi (apare pi), with which one may compare the parallel expressions puna-divase: aparadivase, all of which show the close relation between pi, puna, apara, but we never find para in these connections. Trenckner’s (& following him Oldenberg in Vin. and Hardy in A etc.) way of writing puna ca paraṁ (e. g. Miln.201, 388, 418 etc.) is to be corrected to puna c’aparaṁ, cp. punâpara Sn.1004; Cp III,61. --āgamana coming again, return S.I,22 (a°). --āvāsa rebirth S.I,200. --divase on the following day J.I,278; PvA.19, 38. --nivattati to turn back again S.I,177. --bbhava renewed existence, new birth D.II,15; S.I,133; It.62; S.IV,201 (āyati°); Sn.162, 273, 502, 514, 733; Nd2 s. v.; Nett 28, 79 sq.; PvA.63, 200; cp. ponobhavika; a° no more rebirth S.I,174, 208; Nd2 64; °âbhinibbatti birth in a new existence M.I,294; S.II,65; A.I,223; Vin.III,3; PvA.35. --vacana repetition SnA 487. --vāre (Loc.) another time J.V,21. (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic punar, punah),【无】再一次(again)。punadivasa,【阳】下一天，隔天(punadivase, on the following day)。punābhinibbatti, 再生(birth in a new existence)。punappunaṁ,【无】一次又一次(屡屡)。punabbhava,【阳】再生(renewed existence, new birth)。punavacana,【中】punarutti,【阴】重复(repetition)。punāgamana,【中】再来，又来(coming again, return)。puna caparaṁ, 另外。punāvāsa,【阳】再生(rebirth)。punanivattati, 再转回来(to turn back again) punavāre(Loc.), 别的时间(another time)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Punabbasu: {'def': '【阳】井宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】井宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puneti: {'def': '(puna + eti), 再来，又来。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(puna+eti), 再来，又来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. fr. puna? or=punāti?] to experience (over & over) again: in this meaning at It.1 sq. & Nd1 202= Nd2 337 (kilese na p. na pacceti etc.); perhaps also at Th.1, 533 (sattayugaṁ), although Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it=punāti and Mrs. Rh. D. translates “lifts to lustrous purity.” (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Punnāga: {'def': '【阳】胡桐(Alexandrian laurel tree﹐产於东印度群岛和太平洋群岛的藤黄科胡桐属 (Calophyllum) 的乔木)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[dial.?] a species of tree J.I,9 (°puppha); VI,530; KhA 50 (aggacchinna°-phala), 53 (id.). (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】胡桐（产于东印度群岛和太平洋群岛的藤黄科胡桐属 (Calophyllum) 的乔木）。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Punāti: {'def': '(pu + nā), 清理，筛出。【过】 puni。【独】 punitvā。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic pavate, punāti, pū to cleanse, as in Lat. purus clean, purgo, Ohg. fowen to sift also Gr. pu_r (cp. P. pāvaka)=Ohg. fūir=E. fire, Armen. hur, lit. “cleansing,” see also puñña] 1. to clean, cleanse VvA.19 (+visodheti, in def. of puñña). -- 2. to sift J.VI,108 (aṅgāraṁ p.=attano sīse aṅgāre p. okirati C.; so read with v. l. for phunati T.); DA.I,268 (bhusaṁ pumanto viya like sifting the chaff, winnowing). Cp. puneti. (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pu+nā), 清理，筛出。【过】puni。【独】punitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puppha: {'def': '【中】花，〔生理〕月经来潮。pupphagaccha,【阳】开花植物，矮树丛。pupphagandha,【阳】花香。pupphacumbaṭaka,【中】花冠(环)，(戴在头上的)花串。pupphachaḍḍaka,【阳】清理凋谢的花的人，清道夫，厕所清洁工人。pupphadāma,【阳】花环。pupphadhara,【形】持花的。pupphapaṭa,【阳】【中】绣花布。pupphamuṭṭhi,【阳】一把花。puppharāsi,【阳】花堆。pupphavatī,【阴】月经期的女人。 akāla-puppha﹐非时花(非其开花季节开花)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Vedic puṣpa according to Grassmann for *puṣka fr. puṣ (?) see poseti] a flower Vin.II,123; S.I,204=J.III,308; Sn.2, 5; Dh.47 sq.; 377; Vism.430; SnA 78 (paduma°); VvA.73; PvA.127; Sdhp.550. -- pupphāni (pl.) VbhA.255 (of 32 colours, in simile), 292 sq. (for Cetiya-worship). -- adj. °puppha in ghana° thick with flowers DA.I,87. -- Cp. pokkharatā. --âbhikiṇṇa decked with flowers Vv 6429; Pv.II,112 --ādhāna “a ledge (on a Tope) where offerings of flowers are laid down” (Geiger, Mhvs p. 355; cp. Mhvs trsl. p. 2022) Mhvs 30, 51, 56, 60; 33, 22 Reading uncertain. --āveḷā flower-garland VvA.125. --āsava wine made from flowers, flower-liquor J.IV,117; KhA 26. --gandha odour of flowers Dh.54; Dhs.625. --cumbaṭaka a fl. cushion. --chaḍḍaka a remover of (dead) flowers, a rubbish-remover, a low occupation, including cleaning of privies & bins etc. Vin.IV,6; Th.1, 620; J.V,449 (=vacca-ṭṭhāna-sodhaka C.); Miln.331; Vism.194 (in simile). Cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 89 and Miln.trsl. II.211. --cchatta a parasol with flowers DhA.I,110. --dāna offering of flowers VbhA.336. --dāma a wreath or garland of fls. J.I,397; VvA.198. --dhara bearing flowers Pv.II,124 (so read for T. °dada). --pañjara a cage (ornamented) with flowers J.V,365. --paṭa a cloth (embroidered) with flowers J.IV,283; DhA.II,45. --palāsa a fl. heap DhA.I,75. --bhāṇin “speaking flowers,” i. e. speaking the truth Pug.29. --mālā garland of fls. SnA 78. --muṭṭhi a handful of fl. Vism.432 (in simile). --rasa (wine-) juice made of fls., flower-liquor Vin.I,246; taste of fls. Dhs.629. --rāsi a heap of fls. Dh.53. (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '²(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. puṣpa “les fleurs” in strī° the menses Am. Kośa 3, 4, 30, 233 and Mārk. Pur. 51, 42. Similarly phala is used in the sense of “menstruation”: see BR s. v. phala 12] blood: see pupphaka & pupphavatī. With ref. to the menses at J.V,331. (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】花，〔生理〕月经来潮。 ~gaccha, 【阳】开花植物，矮树丛。 ~gandha,【阳】花香。 ~cumbaṭaka,【中】花冠（环），（戴在头上的）花串。 ~chaḍḍaka,【阳】清理凋谢的花的人，清道夫，厕所清洁工人。 ~dāma, 【阳】花环。 ~dhara, 【形】持花的。 ~paṭa, 【阳、中】绣花布。 ~muṭṭhi, 【阳】一把花。 ~rāsi, 【阳】花堆。 ~vatī, 【阴】月经期的女人。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pupphaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. puppha2] blood J.III,541 (v. l. pubbaka; C.=lohita); Miln.216 (tiṇa°-roga, a disease, Kern. “hay-fever”). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls the J passage with “vuil, uitwerpsel.” (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pupphati: {'def': '[puṣp] to flower J.I,76 (aor. °iṁsu); PvA.185 (=phalati). -- pp. pupphita. (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pupph + a), 开花，盛开花。【过】 pupphi。【独】 ~phitvā。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pupph开花+a), 开花，盛开花。【过】pupphi。【独】pupphitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pupphavatī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. puppha2, but cp. Vedic puṣpavat flowering] a menstruous woman Miln.126. (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pupphin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. puppha1 cp. Vedic puṣpin] bearing flowers; in nīlapupphī (f.) N. of a plant (“with blue flowers”) J.VI,53. (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pupphita: {'def': '[pp. of pupphati] flowering, in blossom S.I,131= Th.2, 230 (su°); Vv 354; J.I,18; Miln.347; ThA.69 (Ap. v. 12); DhA.I,280; II,250 (su°). (Page 467)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Pupphati‘开花’的【过分】), 已开花，已盛开花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pura: {'def': '【中】城镇，城市。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Vedic pur. f., later Sk. puraṁ nt. & purī f.),【中】1.城镇，城市(a town, fortress, city)。2.住处，房屋，房间(dwelling, house or (divided) part of a house (=antepura内室))。3.身体(the body )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '﹐前面，之前(base of adv. & prep. denoting “before”; Abl. purato (adv. & prep.) in front of (with Gen.), before (only local))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic pur. f., later Sk. puraṁ nt. & purī f.] 1. a town, fortress, city Vin.I,8=M.I,171 (Kāsinaṁ puraṁ); J.I,196, 215; Sn.976, 991, 1012 (°uttama),1013; J.VI,276 (=nagara C); Mhvs 14, 29. --avapure below the fortress M.I,68. --devapura city of the Gods S.IV,202; Vv 6430 (=Sudassana-mahā-nagara VvA.285). See also purindada. -- 2. dwelling, house or (divided) part of a house (=antepura), a meaning restricted to the Jātakas, e. g. V,65 (=nivesana C.); VI,251, 492 (=antepura). Cp. thīpura lady’s room, harem, also “lady” J.V,296, and antepura. -- 3. the body [cp. Sk. pura body as given by Halāyudha 2, 355, see Aufrecht p. 273] Th.1, 279 1150 (so read for pūra, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & under sarīradeha). -- Cp. porin. (Page 468)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purakkharoti: {'def': '[fr. puraḥ, cp. Ved. puras-karoti, see pure] to put in front, to revere, follow, honour; only in foll. sporadic forms: ppr. purakkharāna holding before oneself, i. e. looking at S.III,9 sq.; aor. 3rd pl. purakkharuṁ Miln.22; ger. purakkhatvā M.I,28; Sn.969; Nd1 491; J.V,45 (=purato katvā C.); PvA.21, 141. ‹-› purakkhata pp. (q. v.). See also purekkhāra. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(purā + kar + o), 置在前面，尊敬。【过】 ~khari。【过分】~khata。【独】 ~khatvā。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(purā (梵purah) +kar行+o), 置在前面(to put in front)，尊敬(revere)。【过】purakkhari。【过分】purakkhata。【独】purakkhatvā。【现分】purakkharāna(holding before oneself)。【过.3.复】purakkharuṁ; 【独】purakkhatvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Purakkhata: {'def': '[pp. of purakkharoti] honoured, esteemed, preferred D.I,50; M.I,85; S.I,192, 200; Sn.199, 421, 1015; Nd1 154; Dh.343 (=parivārita DhA.IV,49); J.II,48 (°parivārita); Pv III,71 (=payirupāsita PvA.205); DA.I,152 (=purato nisinna); ThA.170. Cp. purekkhata. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已置在前面，已尊敬，已尊重。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已置在前面，已尊敬，已尊重。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Purato: {'def': '【无】在前，之前。purato purato, 之前之前。【反】pacchato pacchato, 之后之后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】在前，之前。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puratthato: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. puratthaṁ, cp. BSk. purastataḥ MVastu II.198] in front, coram Sn.416 (sic, v. l. BB purakkhato); J.VI,242. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puratthaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [for Vedic purastāt, fr. puraḥ, see *pura] 1. before S.I,141 (na pacchā na puratthaṁ=no after, no before). -- 2. east D.I,50 (°âbhimukha looking eastward.) (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puratthima: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. *pura, cp. Prk. (AMg.) puratthima, Acc. to Pischel, Gr. § 602 a der. fr. purastāt (=P. puratthaṁ) as *purastima, like *pratyastima (=paccatthima) fr. *pratyastaṁ] eastern D.I,153; S.I,144; J.I,71 (°âbhimukha: Gotama facing E. under the Bo tree). (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】东方的。《海寄归内法传》卷第三：「西国五天，皆名东方为前方，南为右方。」(T54.225.2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】东方的。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puratthā: {'def': '【无】东部。puratthābhimukha,【形】向东方看的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】东部。 ~bhimukha, 【形】向东方看的。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pure: {'def': '【副】在…之前，从前，比较早的。 ~cārika, 【形】走在前头的，领先的。 ~java, 【形】跑在前面的。 ~taraŋ, 【副】在任何人之前，最早的。 ~bhatta, 【中】午前。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】在…之前，从前，比较早的。purecārika,【形】走在前头的，领先的。purejava,【形】跑在前面的。puretaraṁ,【副】在任何人之前，最早的。purebhatta,【中】午前。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [is the genuine representative (with Māgadhī e) of Vedic puraḥ, which also appears as *puro in purohita, as *pura in purakkharoti. It belongs to base Idg. *per (cp. pari), as in Cr. paρos before, earlier, prέsbus “preceding in life,” i. e. older; Ohg. first] before (both local & temporal), thus either “before, in front” or “before, formerly, earlier.” In both meanings the opp. is pacchā-(a) local S.I,176 (pure hoti to lead); J.II,153 (opp. pacchima) -- (b) temporal S.I,200; Sn.289, 311, 541, 645, 773 (=atītaṁ Nd1 33; opp. pacchā); Dh.348 (opp. pacchato); J.I,50 (with Abl. pure puṇṇamāya). Often meaning “in a former life,” e. g. Vv 348, 3413; Pv.I,21 (=pubbe atītajātiyaṁ PvA.10); II,32 (cp. purima); II,42; II,74 (=atītabhāve PvA.101); II,913. -- apure apacchā neither before nor after, i. e. simultaneously PugA 186 (see apubbaṁ) -- puretaraṁ (adv.) first, ahead, before any one else DhA.I,13, 40. -- (c) modal, meaning “lest” DA.I,4; cp. purā in same sense Jtm. 28. --cārika going before, guiding, leading, only in phrase °n katvā putting before everything else, taking as a guide or ideal J.I,176 (mettā-bhāvanaṁ); III,45 (id.), 180 (khantiñ ca mettañ ca); VI,127 (Indaṁ); PugA 194 (paññaṁ). --java [cp. BSk. purojava attendant Divy 211, 214, 379; also Vedic puroyāva preceding] preceding, preceded by, controlled by (=pubbaṅgama) S.I,33 (sammādiṭṭhi°); Sn.1107 (dhamma-takka°, cp. Nd2 318). --jāta happening before, as logical category (°paccaya) “antecedence”; Vism.537 (elevenfold)= Tikp. 17; freq. in Dukp. & Tikp. (as ārammaṇa° & vatthu°), cp. VbhA.403 (°ārammaṇa & °vatthuka). --dvāra front door J.II,153. --bhatta the early meal, morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. purobhaktakā Divy 307] VvA.120; PvA.109; °ṁ in the morning VvA.51; PvA.78; °kicca duties after the morning meal DA.I,45 sq.; SnA 131 sq. --bhava “being in front,” i. e. superior DA.I,75 (in exegesis of porī). --samaṇa one who wanders ahead of someone else Vin.II,32 (opp. pacchā°). (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purejāta: {'def': '【形】前生的。前生缘(Purejātapaccayo)《发趣论》(Paṭṭhāna)(CS:p.1.7)：「前生缘(Purejātapaccayo)：1.~5 是眼(、耳、鼻、舌、身)处是依眼(、耳、鼻、舌、身)识界及其(意识界)诸法之前生缘为缘。6.~10 色(、声、香、味、触)处是依眼(、耳、鼻、舌、身)识界及其相应诸法之前生缘为缘。11.色处、声处、香处、味处、所触处依意界及其相应诸法之前生缘为缘。凡依止於某色而意界及意识界转者，其色依意界及其相应法之前生缘为缘，而於意识界及其相应之诸法，有时依前生缘为缘，有时不依(指无色界)前生缘为缘。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】提前出生的。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Purekkharoti: {'def': '[for purakkharoti, pure=Sk. puraḥ] to honour etc. Sn.794=803; ppr. purekkharāna Sn.844, 910. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purekkhata: {'def': '=purakkhata Sn.849, 859, (a°); Nd1 73, 214. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purekkhāra: {'def': '【阳】放在前面，尊敬，热爱。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for purakkhāra, puraḥ+kṛ, see pure] deference, devotion, honour; usually --° (adj.) devoted to, honouring D.I,115; Vin.III,130; IV,2, 277; Nd1 73, 214; Dh.73 (=parivāra DhA.II,77); Vv 3414 (attha°= hitesin VvA.152); VbhA.466 (°mada); VvA.72. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】放在前面，尊敬，热爱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Purekkhāratā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. purekkhāra] deference to (-°) DhA.IV,181 (attha°). (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purima: {'def': '(adj.) [compar.-superl. formation fr. *pura, cp. Sk. purima] preceding, former, earlier, before (opp. pacchima) D.I,179; Sn.773, 791, 1011; Nd1 91; J.I,110; SnA 149 (°dhura); PvA.1, 26. In sequence p. majjhima pacchima; past, present, future (or first, second, last) D.I,239 sq.; DA.I,45 sq. and passim. -- purimatara =purima J.I,345 (°divase the day before). --attabhāva a former existence VvA.78; PvA.83, 103, 119. --jāti a previous birth PvA.45, 62, 79, 90. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】先前的，比较早的。 ~jāti, 【阴】 ~attabhāva, 【阳】前世，前生。 ~taraŋ, 非常早，比较早的，更早的。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】先前的，比较早的。purimajāti,【阴】purimattabhāva,【阳】前世，前生。purimataraṁ, 非常早，比较早的，更早的。purimā koṭi,本际(最初的边际)。Purimā…koti na paññāyati bhavataṇhāya ‘ito pubbe bhavataṇhā nāhosi, atha pacchā sambhavī’ti, evā c’etaj…vuccati. Atha ca pana paññāyati ‘idappaccayā bhavataṇhā’ti. (「有爱」之最初边际不可知而说：「从此以前无‘有爱’，(从此)以后有(有爱)之生起。」然而，可知：「由此缘有‘有爱’。」‘有爱’即对生存之执取。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Purimaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. purima] previous, first Vin.II,167 (opp. pacchimaka). f. °ika Vin.I,153. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purimakammabhava: {'def': '﹐以前的业有。PsA(CS:p.1.223)：purimakammabhavasminti purime kammabhave, atītajātiyaṁ kammabhave kariyamāneti attho.(在以前的业有：在以前的业有，带来在过去生所作的业有。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Purindada: {'def': '【阳】富兰陀罗（天神王的浑名）。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[distorted fr. Vedic puraṁ-dara, pura+dṛ to break, see darī, thus “breaker of fortresses,” Ep. of Indra (& Agni). The P. Commentator (VvA.171) of course takes it popularly as “pure dānaṁ dadātī ti Purindado ti vuccati,” thus pure+dā; see also Trenckner, Notes 596; Geiger, P.Gr. § 443] “townbreaker,” a name of Sakka (Indra) D.II,260; S.I,230; Vv 374, 622; PvA.247. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】富兰陀罗(天神王的浑名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Purisa: {'def': '[according to Geiger, Gr. § 303 the base is *pūrṣa, from which the Vedic form puruṣa, and the Prk.-P. form purisa. The further contraction *pussa *possa yielded posa (q. v.). From the Prk. form puliśa (Māgadhī) we get pulla] man (as representative of the male sex, contrasted to itthi woman, e. g. at A.III,209; IV,197; J.I,90; V,72; PvA.51). Definitions of the C. are “puriso nāma manussa-puriso na yakkho na peto etc.” (i. e. man kat) e)coxήn) Vin.IV,269 (the same expln for purisa-puggala at Vin.IV,214); “seṭṭh’aṭṭhena puri setī ti puriso ti satto vuccati” VvA.42 -- 1. man D.I,61 (p. kassaka “free man”); II,13; S.I,225; A.I,28, 126; II,115; III,156; Sn.102, 112, 316, 740, 806 and passim; Dh.117, 152, 248; Nd1 124; PvA.3, 4, 165, 187; VvA.13 (majjhima°, paṭhama°, as t.t. g.?). uttama° S.II,278; III,61, 166; IV,380; It.97; mahā° S.V,158; A.II,35; III,223; IV,229 (see also under mahā); sappurisa (q. v.). Var. epithets of the Buddha e. g. at S. I.28 sq. -- Kāpurisa a contemptible man; kimpurisa a wild man of the woods (“whatever man”), f. kimpurisī J.V,215. --purisa as “a man, some one, somebody” as character or hero in var. similes, e. g. aṅgārakāsuyaṁ khipanaka° Vism.489; asucimhi patita Vism.465; āgantuka° VbhA.23; dubbala Vism.533; papāte patanto VbhA.23 (cannot be a help to others; similarly with patita at VbhA.170=Vism.559); bhikkhusaṅghaṁ disvā Vism.333; maṇḍapa-lagga Vism.339 sq.; lakuṇṭaka-pāda & dīghapāda VbhA.26; cp. the foll.: of a man pleasing the king VbhA.442 sq.; a man wishing to perform a long journey in one day Vism.244; a man breathing when exhausted Vism.274. Frequently elsewhere. -- 2. an attendant, servant, waiter Vin.II,297; D.I,60 (dāsa+), 72 (id.); J.I,385 (dāsa°); VI,462. Cp. porisa, posa. --atthika one who seeks a servant Vin.II,297. --anta= purisādhama Sn.664 (anta=Sk. antya; SnA. 479 explns by antimapurisa). --antaragatā touched by a man (lit. gone in by . . .), a woman who has sexual intercourse, a woman in intercourse with a man D.I,166 (cp. Dial. I.228); M.I,77; A.I,295; II,206; Vin.IV,322; Pug.55 (=he does not accept food, lest their intercourse should be broken: rati antarāyo hoti PugA 231); DA.I,79 (=itthi, as opp. to kumārikā). Cp. pumaṁ gata, J.V,154. --allu (& ālu) N. of certain monstrous beings, living in the wilderness J.V,416 (=vaḷavā-mukhayakkhinī, a y. with the face of a mare), 418; VI,537 (°ālu=vaḷavā-m.-pekkhī C.). --ājañña “a noble steed of a man,” a thorough-bred or remarkable man S.III,91; A.V,325 sq., Sn.544; Dh.193; as --ājāneyya at DhA.I,310; --ājāniya at A.I,290; II,115; IV,397 sq.; V,324. --āda a bad man (“man-eater”) a wild man, cannibal J.V,25 (cp. puruṣāda Jtm 3141); °ādaka J.V,30. --ādhama a wicked man Dh.78; J.V,268. --indriya male faculty, masculinity S.V,204; A.IV,57; Dhs.634, 715, 839, 972; Vism.447, 492. --uttama “the highest of men,” an excellent man A.V,16, 325 sq.; Sn.544; Dh.78; DhA.II,188. --usabha (purisusabha) “a bull of a man,” a very strong man Vin.III,39. --kathā talk about men D.I,8. --kāra manliness D.I,53 (cp. DA.I,161); Miln.96. --thāma manly strength D.I,53; S.II,28; A.II,118; IV,190. --dammasārathi guide of men who have to be restrained, Ep. of the Buddha [cp. BSk. puruṣa-damyasārathi Divy 54 and passim] S.II,69; A.I,168, 207; II,56, 112, 147; Sn.p. 103 (=vicitrehi vinayan’ûpāyehi purisadamme sāretī ti SnA 443); It.79; Pug.57; Vism.207; ThA.178. --dosā (pl.) faults or defects in a man; eight are discussed in detail at A.IV,190 sq.; Ps.I,130; eighteen at J.VI,542, 548. --dhorayha a human beast of burden S.I,29. --parakkama manly energy D.I,53; S.II,28. --puggala a man, a human character D.III,5, 227 (eight); S.I,220 (8); II,69, 82, 206; IV,272 sq.= It.88 (8) (expld at Vism.219); A.I,32, 130, 173, 189; II,34, 56; III,36, 349; IV,407 (8); V,139, 183 (8), 330 (8); Vin.IV,212 sq. (=male); VbhA.497; --bhava state of being a man, manhood, virility J.III,124; Dhs.634, 415, 839; PvA.63. --bhūmi man’s stage, as “eight stages of a prophet’s existence” (Dial. I.72) at D.I,54, in detail at DA.I,162, 163. --medha man-sacrifice, human sacrifice S.I,76; A.II,42; IV,151; It.21; Sn.303. --yugāni (pl.) (4) pairs of men S.IV,272 sq.; A.I,208; II,34, 56; III,36; IV,407; V,330; D.III,5, 227; It.88; in verse Vv 4421; expld Vism.219 (see under yuga). --lakkhaṇa (lucky) marks on a man D.I,9. --linga (see also pullinga) a man’s characteristic, membrum virile Vin.III,35; Dhs.634, 715, 839; Tikp 50; Vism.184. --viriya manly vigour S.II,28. --vyañjana the membrum virile (=°linga) Vin.II,269. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】雄，男人。purisakāra,【阳】男子气概。purisathāma,【阳】像男人的力量。purisadamma,【阳】被训练的人，被改变的人。purisadammasārathī,【阳】被调御的男人的教练。So vuccati yoggācariyānaṁ anuttaro purisadammasārathīti.(他被称为「诸调御者的无上调御人」)。purisaparakkama,【阳】像男人的努力。purisapuggala, 【阳】男的补伽罗。purisamedha,【阳】人祭(精明地提拔及鼓励官员)。purisaliṅga, purisavyañjana,【中】男性的性器官。purisājañña(purisa+jañña纯粹的﹑贵族的), 优秀的人。purisājaṇḍa,【阳】显著的男人。purisasādaka,【阳】食人者。purisādhama,【阳】坏男人。purisindriya,【中】男根，男子气。purisuttama,【阳】举世无双的人，最崇高的男人。Dhp.v.193.︰“Dullabho purisājañño, na so sabbattha jāyati. Yattha so jāyatī dhīro, taṁ kulaṁ sukhamedhatī”ti.(圣人极难得，彼非随处生；智者所生处，家族咸蒙庆。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】雄，男人。 ~kāra, 【阳】男子气概。 ~thāma, 【阳】像男人的力量。 ~damma, 【阳】被训练的人，被改变的人。 ~dammasārathī,【阳】要被抑制的男人的教练。 ~parakkama, 【阳】像男人的努力。~medha, 【阳】人祭（精明地提拔及鼓励官员）。 ~liṅga, ~vyañjana, 【中】男性的器官。 ~ājaṇḍa, 【阳】显着的男人。 ~sādaka, 【阳】食人者。~sādhama, 【阳】坏男人。 ~sindriya, 【中】男根，男子气。 ~suttama,【阳】最崇高的男人。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Purisaka: {'def': '(n.-adj.) [fr. purisa] 1. a (little) man, only in °tiṇa doll effigy made of grass (straw), scarecrow Miln.352; Vism.462; DhsA.111. -- 2. (adj.) having a man, f. °ikā in eka° (a woman) having intercourse with only one man J.I,290. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purisatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. purisa] manhood, virility Dhs.634, 715, 839. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(abstr. fr. purisa),【中】男子气概(manhood, virility)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Purisattana: {'def': '(nt.) [=purisatta, cp. Trenckner, Notes 7037] manhood Miln.171. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purohita: {'def': '【阳】国王的宗教顾问(国师、司祭官)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[purah+pp. of dhā, ch. Vedic purohita] 1. placed in front, i. e. foremost or at the top, in phrase devā Inda-purohitā the gods with Inda at their head J.VI,127 (=Indaṁ pure-cārikaṁ katvā C.). -- 2. the king’s headpriest (brahmanic), or domestic chaplain, acting at the same time as a sort of Prime Minister D.I,138; J.I,210; V,127 (his wife as brāhmaṇī); Pug.56 (brāhmaṇa p.); Miln.241, 343 (dhamma-nagare p.); PvA.74. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】国师（司祭官）。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】国王的宗教顾问。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Purā: {'def': '【无】从前，在过去。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】从前，在过去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Vedic purā; to Idg. *per, cp. Goth. faúr= Ags. for=E. (be-) fore; also Lat. prae=Gr. parai/=Sk. pare] prep. c. Abl. “before” (only temporal) Vin.IV,17 (purāruṇā=purā aruṇā before dawn); Sn.849 (purā bhedā before dissolution (of the body), after which the Suttanta is named Purābhedasutta, cp. Nd1 210 sq.; expld by sarīra-bhedā pubbaṁ at SnA 549). (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purātana: {'def': '【形】远古的，旧的，先前的。参考 purāṇa。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】参考 purāṇa。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. purā, cp. sanātana in formation] belonging to the past, former, old Nett A 194. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Purāṇa: {'def': '【形】远古的，旧的，穿旧的，用过的，先前的。 ~dutiyikā, 【阴】前妻。 ~sālohita, 【形】前血亲。(p230)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】远古的，旧的，穿旧的，用过的，先前的。purāṇadutiyikā,【阴】前妻(本二，故二)。purāṇasālohita,【形】前血亲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Venic purāṇa, fr. *per, cp. Sk. parut in former years, Gr. pέrusi=Lith. pernai, Goth. fairneis, Ohg. firni=Ger. firn (last year’s snow), forn formerly, ferro far] 1. ancient, past Sn.312, 944 (=Nd1 428 atītaṁ, opp. nava=paccuppannaṁ); Dh.156 (=pubbe katāni C.); with ref. to former births or previous existences: p. kammaṁ S.II,64=Nd1 437=Nd2 680 Q. 2; puññaṁ S.I,92. -- 2. old (of age), worn out, used (opp. nava recent) D.I,224 (bandhanaṁ, opp. navaṁ); Vin.II,123 (udakaṁ p.°ṁ stale water); S.II,106 (magga); Sn.1 (tacaṁ); J.II,114 (f. purāṇī, of an old bow string, applied jokingly to a former wife); IV,201 (°paṇṇa old leaf, opp. nava); V,202 (a° not old, of years); VI,45 (apurāṇaṁ adv. recently); VbhA.363 (udaka stale water). ‹-› 3. former, late, old in cpds. as °dutiyikā the former wife (of a bhikkhu) Vin.I,18, 96; IV,263; S.I,200; Ud.5; J.I,210; °rājorodhā former lady of the harem Vin.IV,261; °sālohita former blood-relation Sn.p. 91; Ud.7; DhA.II,210. Cp. porāṇa. (Page 469)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pussaka: {'def': 'at A.I,188 is to be read as phussaka (see phussa3) cuckoo. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pussaratha: {'def': 'at J.VI,39 read phussa° (q. v.). (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pussa°: {'def': 'at Nd1 90 in cpds. °tila, °tela, dantakaṭṭha, mattikā, etc. is probably to be read with v. l. phussa°; meaning not quite clear (“natural, raw”?). (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puthavī: {'def': '& Puthuvī (f.) [doublets of paṭhavī] the earth; as puthavi at S.I,186; J.I,14 (v. l. puthuvi); IV,233, & in cpds. °nābhi the navel of the earth (of the bodhimaṇḍa, the Buddha’s seat under the holy fig tree) J.IV,232; °maṇḍala the round of the earth Sn.990. -- As puthuvī at A.II,21, and in cpd. puthuvi-agga SnA 353. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puthu: {'def': '(adj.) [both Vedic pṛthak & pṛthu, lit. spread out, far & wide, flat, of Idg. *plēt broad, Sk. prath to expand, pṛthaḥ palm of hand Av. frapah breadth, cp. Gr. platuζ broad, plάtanos plane tree, Lith. platùs broad, Lat. planta sole of foot, Ohg. flado pancake, Ags. flet ground, E. flat] 1. (=pṛthak) separated, individual, adv. separated, individual, adv. separately, each (also given as puthag eva KAcc. 29) S.I,75 (puthu attā individual self); Th.1, 86; J.IV,346 (=visuṁ visuṁ C.); Miln.4. See further under cpds. -- 2. (=pṛthu). The forms (pl.) are both puthu & puthū, both as adj. & n.; puthū more freq. found in metre. -- numerous, various, several, more, many, most D.I,185 (puthu saññaggā; opp. ekaṁ); S.I,181 (puthū), 207 (id.); Sn.769 (puthū kāme=bahū Nd1 11); 1043, 1044 (puthū= bahukā Nd2 449b); Th.2, 344 (puthu=puthu sattā ThA.241); J.VI,205 (puthū). nt. adv. puthu & puthuṁ greatly, much, in many ways Sn.580 (=aneka-ppakāraṁ SnA 460); Vv 624 (=mahantaṁ VvA.258). --gumba experienced in many crafts J.VI,448 (=aneka-sippa-ññu C.). --jja (puthu 1, but see remarks on puthujjana) common, ordinary Sn.897, 911 (=puthujjanehi janita Nd1 308). --titthakara a common sectarian D.I,116 (thus to puthu 1, but DA.I,287= bahū t.) --ddisā (puthu 1) each separate quarter “all the diverse quarters” S.I,234. --pañña (adj.) of wide wisdom (p. 2) A.I,130; II,67 (v. l. hāsa°). --paññatā wide wisdom A.I,45. --pāṇiya ordinary (p. 1) mode of shampooing with the hand Vin.II,106 (Bdhgh on p. 316 explns pudhu-pāṇikan ti hattha parikammaṁ vuccati “manual performance,” thus not identical with pāṇikā on p. 151). --bhūta (p. 2) widely spread S.II,107; but cp. BSk pṛṭhag bhavati to be peculiar to Divy 58, 100. --mati wide understanding S.I,236. --loma “flat fin,” N of a fish “the finny carp” (Mrs. Rh. D.) Vv 4411 (=dibba-maccha VvA.191); Th.2, 508 (=so-called fish ThA.292); J.IV,466. --vacana “speaking in many (bad) ways,” or “people of various speech” (so expld Nd1 397) Sn.932 (prob. better “speaking ordinary talk”=puthu 1). --sattā (pl.)=puthujjanā, common people, the masses S.I,44; Pv III,73. (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】分开的，个别的，甚远地和广阔地，个别地。~jjana, 【阳】凡夫，俗人，没有受过教育的人。 ~bhūta,【形】广泛蔓延的。 ~loma, 【阳】鱼。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】分开的，个别的，甚远地和广阔地，个别地。【形】多的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puthubhūta: {'def': '﹐【形】广泛蔓延的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puthujjana: {'def': '(BSK.prthagjana),【阳】凡夫，普通人，俗人，没有受过教育的人。Yena puthujjanoti, ettha--“Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano”ti. Tattha yassa khandhadhātu-āyatanādīsu uggaha-paripucchā-savana-dhāraṇa-paccavekkhaṇāni natthi, ayaṁ andhaputhujjano.(以那凡夫，此处--以太阳的种族佛陀所说，一种闇钝凡夫，一种善凡夫，闇钝凡夫为不学习问、闻、忆持、省思蕴处界的人。)(DA.1./I,59.；CS:p.1.58~9) (so hi puthūnaṁ nānappakārānaṁ kilesādīnaṁ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano.(凡夫，因为生产、制造许多的各种不同的污染)。闇钝凡夫(andhaputhujjana)为不学习问、闻、忆持、省思蕴处界的人(khandhadhātu-āyatanādīsu uggaha-paripucchā-savana-dhāraṇa- paccavekkhaṇāni natthi, ayaṁ andhaputhujjano.) (DA.1./I,59.；CS:p.1.58~9)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '凡夫，非圣者。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '[*prthag-jana, thus puthu 1+jana, but from the point of Pali identical in form and meaning with puthu 2, as shown by use of puthu in similar cpds. and by C. explns. One may even say that puthu 1=pṛthak is not felt at all in the P. word. Trenckner (Notes 76) already hinted at this by saying “puthujjana, partly confounded with puthu”; a connection which also underlies its expln as “one-of-the-many-folk” at Kvu trsln 807 & 2913. It is felt to belong to puthu 2 in the same sense as Ger. “die breite Masse,” or Gr. oi( polloi/. The expln at Nd1 308=328 is puthu-nānā-janā. A long and detailed etym.-speculation expln of the term is found at DA.I,59, trsld at Dhs.trsln 258. The BSk. form is pṛthagjana Divy 133 etc.) an ordinary, average person (4 classes of ordinary people are discussed at Cpd. 49, 50), a common worldling, a man of the people, an ordinary man M.I,1, 7, 135, 239, 323; III,64, 227; S.I,148; II,94 sq. (assutạvā), 151 (id.); III,46, 108, 162; IV,157, 196, 201 (assutavā), 206 sq.; V,362 (opp. to sotāpanna); A.I,27, 147 (maraṇa-dhammin), 178, 267; II,129, 163; III,54; IV,68, 97, 157, 372; Sn.351, 455, 706, 816, 859; Dh.59, 272; Vv 826 (=anariya VvA.321,+anavabodha); Nd1 146, 248; Ps.I,61 sq., 143, 156; II,27; Dhs.1003 (cp. DhsA.248 sq.); Vism.311 (=anariya); VbhA.133 (avijj’âbhikhūta, bhava-taṇh’âbhibhūta), 186 (ummat‹-› taka, opposed to upabrūhita-ñāṇa-purisa, exemplifying upādāna and kamma); DhA.I,5 (opp. ariyasāvaka), 445; Sdhp.363. --kalyāṇaka (cp. BSk. pṛthagjana-kalyāṇaka Divy 419, 429) an ordinary man striving after his spiritual good Nd1 477; Ps.I,176; II,190, 193. --bhikkhu a bh. of the common sort DA.I,269; VbhA.383. --sukha ordinary happiness M.I,454. (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '凡位;凡夫', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Puthujjanatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. puthujjana] common-place character S.I,187=Th.1, 1217. (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puthujjanika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. puthujjana] common, ordinary J.I,360 (of iddhi). (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puthuka: {'def': '[fr. puthu, cp. (late) Vedic pṛthuka “flat corn,” also “young of an animal,” with which cp. perhaps Gr. parqέnos: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under virgo] rice in the ear DhA.I,98 (°agga as first gift of the field). (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】砸倒了玉米苗。【阳】小动物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 砸倒了玉米苗。 2. 【阳】崽子。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puthula: {'def': '【形】宽广的，大的。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. puthu] broad, large, flat J.III,16 (°sīsa flat-headed); VI,171 (°antaraṁsa flat-chested); Miln.121 (of a river); VvA.301 (°gambhīra). -- Abl. puthulato (as adv.) across DhA.I,396. (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】宽广的，大的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puthuloma: {'def': '﹐【阳】鱼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puthuso: {'def': '(adv.) [Abl. of puthu] broadly, i. e. diversely, at variance Sn.891, 892 (=puthu-diṭṭhi-gata Nd1 301). (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】不同地，不一致地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】不同地，不一致地。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puthutta: {'def': '(Puthatta) (nt.) [fr. puthu, cp. Sk. *pṛthutva; not with Kern, Toev. s. v.=Sk. pṛthaktva, speciality, peculiarity] being at variance, diversity S.II,77 (opp. ekatta; v. l. SS puthatta). At A.IV,97 we have to read puth’attānaṁ for puthuttānaṁ which has nothing to do with puthutta, but is puthu+attānaṁ as borne out by v. l. puthujj’attānaṁ, and by AA: puthu nānākāraṇehi attānaṁ hanti. (Page 466)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puthuvī: {'def': '【阴】地，土。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】地，土。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Putolī: {'def': 'see muṭolī. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Putoḷi: {'def': '(=mutoḷi), 【阴】袋子(sack)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Putta: {'def': '[Vedic putra, Idg. *putlo=Lat. pullus (*putslos) young of an animal, fr. pōu, cp. Gr. pau=s, paiζ child, Lat. puer, pubes, Av. pupra, Lith. putýtis (young animal or bird), Cymr. wyr grandchild; also Sk. pota(ka) young animal and base pu- in pumaṁs, puṁs “man”] 1. a son S.I,210; Sn.35, 38, 60, 557, 858; Dh.62, 84, 228, 345; J.IV,309; Vism.645 (simile of 3 sons); PvA.25, 63, 73 sq.; DA.I,157 (dāsaka°). Four kinds of sons are distinguished in the old Cy. viz. atraja p., khettaja, dinnaka, antevāsika, or born of oneself, born on one’s land, given to one, i. e. adopted, one living with one as a pupil. Thus at Nd1 247; Nd2 448; J.I,135. Good and bad sons in regard to lineage are represented at J.VI,380. -- Metaph. “sons of the Buddha” S.I,192= Th.1, 1237 (sabbe Bhagavato puttā); It.101 (me tumhe puttā orasā mukhato jātā dhammajā), J.III,211. -- The parable of a woman eating her sons is given as a punishment in the Peta condition at Pv.I,6 (& 7). ‹-› pl. puttāni Pv.I,63. -- aputta-bhāvaṁ karoti to disinherit formally J.V,468. -- 2. (in general) child, descendant, sometimes pleonastic like E. °man, °son in names: see putta-dāra; so esp. in later literature, like ludda° hunter’s son=hunter J.II,154; ayya°=ayya, i. e. gentleman, lord J.V,94; PvA.66. See also rāja°. -- Of a girl Th.2, 464. -- mātucchā° & mātula° cousin (from mother’s side), pitucchā° id (fr. father’s side). On putta in N. Pāṭali° see puṭa. -- f. puttī see rāja°. --jīva N. of a tree: Putranjiva Roxburghii J.VI,530. --dāra child & wife (i. e. wife & children, family) D.III,66, 189, 192; S.I,92; A.II,67; Pv IV.348 (sa° together with his family); J.III,467 (kiṁ °ena what shall I do with a family?); V,478. They are hindrances to the development of spiritual life: see Nd2 under āsiṁsanti & palibodha. --phala a son as fruit (of the womb) J.V,330. --maṁsa the flesh of one’s children (sons) a metaphor probably distorted fr. pūta° rotten flesh. The metaphor is often alluded to in the kasiṇa-kammaṭṭhāna, and usually coupled with the akkha-bbhañjana (& vaṇapaticchādana)--simile, e. g. Vism.32, 45; DhA.I,375; SnA 58, 342. Besides at S.II,98 (in full); Th.1, 445 (°ūpamā); 2, 221. --mata a woman whose sons (children) are dead M.I,524. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】儿子，孩子。puttaka,【阳】小儿子。puttadāra, 孩子和妻子。mama putto, 我的儿子(在注解书中，佛陀有时用此句称呼他的证果的弟子)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】儿子，孩子。 ~ka, 【阳】小儿子。 ~dāra, 孩子和妻子。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puttaka: {'def': '[fr. putta] 1. a little son S.I,209, 210. -- 2. a little child Th.2, 462 (of a girl). -- 3. a young bird (=potaka) J.II,154. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puttatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. putta] sonship DhA.I,89. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puttavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. putta] having sons S.IV,249. Trenckner, Notes 6216 gives a f. *puttapatī for puttavatī, but without ref. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puttima: {'def': '(=Puttimant, Puttavant), puttiya,【形】有孩子的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'puttiya, 【形】有孩子的。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puttimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. *puttamant] having sons S.I,6; Sn.33. Puttiya (-°) in Sakya° is compound Sakyaputta+iya “belonging to the son of the Sakyas” (i. e. to the Sakya prince) PvA.43. -- asakyaputtiya dhamma Vin.II,297. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puñchana: {'def': '【中】1.擦掉，2.擦拭的布料，手巾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. proñch] wiping Vin.I,297 (mukha°colaka); II,208 (upāhana°-colaka), 210. Cp. puñchanī. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 擦掉，2. 擦拭的布料，手巾。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puñchanī: {'def': '【阴】擦拭的布料，手巾。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】擦拭的布料，手巾，音译：晡旃尼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [see puñchana] a cloth for wiping, a towel Vin.II,122; Th.1, 560 (pāda° napkin for the feet). See Vin. Texts III,114. (Page 464)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puñchati: {'def': '(puñch+a), 拭去，清理。【过】puñchi。【过分】puñchita。【独】puñchitvā。【现分】puñchanta, puñchamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. *proñchati, but BSk. poñcchate (v. l. puñchati & pocchate) Divy 491: upânahān mūlāc ca p.] to wipe off, clean Vin.II,208 (upāhanā), 210; A.IV,376 (rajoharaṇaṁ suciṁ p., asuciṁ p. etc.); J.I,392 (akkhīni); Vism.63 (gabbha-malaṁ), 415=KhA 120= J.I,47 (assūni hatthehi p.); KhA 136 (paṁsukaṁ). The reading puñjati occurs at J.I,318 (akkhīni); V,182; VI,514, also as v. l. at A.IV,376 (v. l. also muñcati: cp. puñcikatā). -- Caus. II. puñchāpeti Vism.63. Cp. pari°. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(puñch + a), 拭去，清理。【过】 puñchi。【过分】 puñchita。【独】~chitvā。【现分】 ~chanta, ~chamāna。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puñcikatā: {'def': 'is wrong reading at Dhs.1059 in taṇhā paraphrase (pattern 1 Nd2 taṇhā) for mucchañcikatā. The readings of id. p. are puñcikatā Dhs.1136, 1230; Vbh.351, 361 (v. l. pucchañji°); mucchañci° at Nd1 8 (v. l. BB mucchañji°, SS suvañci°); Nd2 p. 152 (v. l. BB pucchiñci°, SS pupañci°); pucchañjikatā VbhA.477. The translation of Dhs.gives “agitation” as meaning. The C. (DhsA.365) reads puñcikạtā (vv. ll. puñcaṁ vikatā; pucañcikaka; pucchakatā) and connects it with pucchaṁ cāleti (wagging of a dog’s tail, hence “agitation”); Expositor II.470 gives “fluster.” The C. on Vbh.(VbhA.477) expls as “lābhan’âlābhanaka-ṭṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā,” thus “agitation.” (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puñja: {'def': '(usually --°) [cp. Epic Sk. puñja] a heap, pile, mass, multitude Vin.II,211; J.I,146 (sabba-rogānaṁ). As --° in foll. cpds.: aṭṭhi° It.17 (+aṭṭhikandala); kaṭṭha° A.III,408; IV,72; J.II,327; gūtha° J.II,211; tiṇa° A.III,408; palāla° D.I,71; M.III,3; A.I,241; II,210; maṁsa° D.I,52; vālika° J.VI,560; saṅkhāra° S.I,135.

--kata (& °kita) for puñjikata; cf. Sk. puñjīkṛta, with i for a in compⁿ with kṛ & bhū heaped up, heaped together Vin.II,208 (puñjakita); M.I,58, 89 (id. but id. p. M.III,92 puñjakajāta); A.III,324 (puñjakata; v. l. puñjakita & puñjanika); J.II,408 (puñjakata, v. l. pancalikata); VI,111 (id., v. l. puñca°). (Page 464)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】堆，大堆。 ~kata, 【形】成堆的，堆积的。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】堆，大堆。puñjakata,【形】成堆的，堆积的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puñjaka: {'def': '=puñja M.III,92 (°jātāni aṭṭhikāni, where M.I,89 at id. p. reads puñjakitāni); Miln.342 (palāla°). (Page 464)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puñjat: {'def': 'i is a variant of puñchati (q. v.). (Page 464)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puñña: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. (late) Vedic puṇya favourable, good; etym. not clear, it may be dialectical. The word is expl^d by Dhammapāla as “santānaṁ punāti visodheti,” i. e. cleaning the continuation (of life) VvA.19, thus taken to pu. The explⁿ is of course fanciful] merit, meritorious action, virtue. Always represented as foundation and condition of heavenly rebirth & a future blissful state, the enjoyment (& duration) of which depends on the amount of merit accumulated in a former existence. With ref. to this life there are esp. 3 qualities contributing to merit, viz., dāna, sīla & bhāvanā or liberality, good conduct & contemplation. These are the puñña-kiriya-vatthūni (see below). Another set of ten consists of these 3 and apaciti, veyyāvacca, patti-anuppadāna, abbhanumodanā, desanā, savana, diṭṭh’ujjuka-kamma. The opp. of puñña is either apuñña (D.III,119; S.I,114; II,82; A.I,154; III,412; Sdhp.54, 75) or pāpa (Sn.520; Dh.39; Nett 96; PvA.5). The true Arahant is above both (Pv.II,6¹⁵). See on term also Kvu trsl. 201. -- (a) Passages (selected): D.III,58, 120; M.I,404; II,191, 199; S.I,72; II,82; IV,190; IV,190; V,53; A.I,151, 155 sq.; III,412; Sn.427 sq., 547, 569, 790; Dh.18, 116 sq., 196, 220, 267, 331, 412; Nd¹ 90; Pv 1.²; I,5¹²; Pug.55; Vism.541 (puññānaṁ paccayo duvidhā); DhA.IV,34; PvA.6, 8 30, 69 sq.; Sdhp.4, 19 sq. -- (b) Var. phrases & characterisations: Merit is represented as great (uḷāra DA.I,110; PvA.5; anappaka Pv.I,5¹²) or little (paritta DA.I,110; appa S.II,229); as adj. (--°) mahā° S.I,191, opp. appa° M.II,5. puñña is defined at Nd¹ 90 as follows: “puññaṁ vuccati yaṁ kiñci tedhātukaṁ kusal’âbhisaṅkhāraṁ; apuññaṁ vuccati sabbaṁ akusalaṁ. “ It is defined as “dāna-sīl’--ādi-pabheda” & “sucaritaṁ kusala-kammaṁ” at VvA.19; considered as leading to future happiness: Vv 1³; PvA.58; consisting mainly in dāna (dānamayaṁ p.) PvA.8, 51, 60, 66, 73, but also in vandana PvA.1. To do good= puññaṁ (puññāni) karoti D.I,137; S.IV,331; A.V,177; Pv.I,11⁹; or pasavati S.I,182, 213; A.I,89; II,3 sq.; III,244; V,249, 282; PvA.121, cp. puññaṁ pasutaṁ Pv.I,5¹²; VvA.289. Other phrases: °ṁ ākaṅkhati S.I,18, 20; pavaḍḍhati S.I,33; corehi duharaṁ S.I,36; puññānaṁ vipāko A.IV,89; āgamo S.III,209 IV.349; opadhikaṁ S.I,233; It.78; purāṇaṁ & navaṁ S.I,92; sayaṁ katāni puññāni S.I,37; puññassa dhārā S.I,100; V,400.

--atthika desirous of merit Sn.487 sq. --ânubhāva the majesty of merit PvA.58. --âbhisaṅkhāra accumulation of merit D.III,217; S.II,82; Nd¹ 90, 206, 442; Vism.557 sq., 571; VbhA.142 sq., 166, 184. --âbhisanda (+kusalâbhisanda) meritorious results A.II,54 sq.; III,51, 337; IV,245. --assaya seat of merit DA.I,67. --iddhi the magic power of m. PvA.117. --kata one who has done a deed of m. A.II,32. --kamma good works, righteousness, merit S.I,97, 143; DA.I,10; VvA.32; PvA.54, 87; Sdhp.32. --kāma (adj.) desirous of doing good works S.V,462. --kiriyā a good or meritorious action S.I,87 (°kriyā), 101; PvA.54; usually as °kiriyavatthu item of m. action (of which 3 are usually enum^d: see above) D.III,218; A.IV,241; It.51; Nett 50, 128. --kkhandha mass of merit (only as mahā°) S.V,400; A.III,337. --kkhaya decay (or waning of the effect) of merit D.I,18 (cp. āyukkhaya & DA.I,110). --kkhetta field of m., Ep. of the Saṅgha or any holy personalities, doing good (lit. planting seeds of merit) to whom is a source of future compensation to the benefactor. Usually with adj. anuttara unsurpassed field of m. (see also saṅgha) D.III,5, 227; M.I,446; III,80; S.I,167, 220; V,343, 363, 382; A.I,244; II,34 sq., 56, 113; III,158, 248, 279 sq., 387; IV,10 sq., 292; It.88; Sn.486; Vv 50³¹ (cp. VvA.216); Pv IV.1³³ (of a bhikkhu); Vism.220; VvA.286; PvA.1 (ariyasaṅgha), 5 (Moggallāna), 6 (arahanto), 132, 140, 214 and passim. Cp. BSk. puṇyakṣetra Divy 63, 395 (+udāra). --paṭipadā the meritorious path, path of m. A.I,168; Nett 96. --pasavana creation of m. PvA.31. --pekkha looking for merit (i. e. reward), intent upon m. S.I,167; Sn.463 sq., 487 sq.; Dh.108 (cp. DhA.II,234). --phala the fruit (or result) of m. action S.I,217; Pug.51; DhA.II,4; PvA.8, 50, 52. --bala the power of m. PvA.195. --bhāga taking part in meritorious action S.I,154. --bhāgiya having share in m. M.III,72 sq.; Nett 48. --maya=puñña J.IV,232 (°iddhi); cp. BSk. puñyamaya AvŚ I.183. (Page 464)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '福;善;福德;功德{PS: puñña -- n. or nt [中性词(格;位)]; puññānaṁ -- dat.[与格;(间接)受词)] & gen.属格; 例如 puññānaṁ vipāko 异熟(善果)报 [vipāko 异熟; puññāni -- acc..(直接)受格;(日译)对格;目的格]; nom.[主格] & voc.[呼格]; 例如 sayaṁ katāni puññāni 自作福德[sayaṁ 自己的; katāni 行为的]}', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【中】福，善，功德，功绩，正义。puññakamma,【中】福业(有功德的行动)。puññakata(=katapuñña)﹐作福。puññakāma,【形】想福的，想功德的。puññakiriyā,【阴】好行动，福业。puññakkhandha,【阳】福蕴(大量的功绩)。puññakkhaya,【阳】福尽(功绩的疲惫)。puññatthika,【形】想功绩的。puññapekkha,【形】希望有功德的。puññaphala,【中】福报，福果。puññabhāga,【阳】福份。Puññabhāgiyanti dibbe kāme patthetvā sucaritapāripūriyā devaloke nibbattassa attabhāvo puññabhāgiyo nāma, duccaritapāripūriyā apāye nibbattassa attabhāvo apuññabhāgiyo nāma.(顺福分：已望天国，实践善行，自体再生於天世间的顺福分之名。非顺福分：实践恶行，自体已再生於恶趣顺福分之名。)。puññabhāgī,【形】有福份的。puññabhisaṅkhāra﹐【阳】福行、善行。puññavantu,【形】有福的，有品德的。puññānubhāva,【阳】福的力量。puññabhisanda,【阳】积福。puññasampadā,【阴】功德财。A.9.10./IV,373.：九种补特伽罗者是世间无上福田(anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassa)：Arahā, arahattāya paṭipanno, anāgāmī, anāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno, sakadāgāmī, sakadāgāmiphala- sacchikiriyāya paṭipanno, sotāpanno, sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno, gotrabhū.(阿罗汉、向阿罗汉、不还者、向不还果之现证者、一来者、向一来果之现证者、预流者、向预流果之现证者、(改变凡夫成为圣人的)种姓者。) A.7.58./IV,89.︰Mā bhikkhave puññānaṁ bhāyittha, sukhass’etaṁ bhikkhave adhivacanaṁ, yad idaṁ puññānan ti.(诸比丘！你们不要怕诸褔，这是乐的同义语，这即是诸褔。) Aṭ.7.59./CS:pg.3.182.︰puññānīti yadidaṁ vacanaṁ, etaṁ sukhassa iṭṭhassa vipākassa adhivacanaṁ nāmaṁ. (褔︰这句话，是乐的、令人喜爱的果报的同义语。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】福，功德，功绩，正义。 ~kamma, 【中】福业（有功德的行动）。 ~kāma, 【形】想福的，想功德的。 ~kiriyā, 【阴】好行动，福业。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】福蕴（大量的功绩）。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】福尽（功绩的疲惫）。 ~tthika, 【形】想功绩的。 ~pekkha, 【形】希望有功德的。 ~phala, 【中】福报，福果。 ~bhāga, 【阳】福份。 ~bhāgī, 【形】有福份的。 ~vantu, 【形】有福的，有品德的。 ~ānubhāva, 【阳】福的力量。 ~abhisanda, 【阳】积福。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puññavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. puñña] possessing merit, meritorious, virtuous Ps.II,213; Vism.382; DhA.I,340; PvA.75. (Page 464)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puḷava: {'def': '[etym.? dial; cp. Class. Sk. pulaka erection of the hairs of the body, also given by lexicographers (Hemachandra 1202) in meaning “vermin”] a worm, maggot M.III,168; Sn.672; J.III,177; VI,73; Miln.331, 357; Vism.179 (=kimi) DhA.III,106, 411. See next. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puḷavaka: {'def': '(BB puḷuvaka)=puḷava DhA.IV,46; VvA.76; PvA.14. One of the (asubha) kammaṭṭhānas is called p. “the contemplation (°saññā idea) of the worminfested corpse” S.V,131; Dhs.264; Vism.110, 179 (puḷu°), 194 (id.; as asubha-lakkhaṇa); DhA.IV,47. See also asubha. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puṁ: {'def': 'as a term for Purgatory (niraya): see Bdhgh’s etym. of puggala Vism.310, as quoted under puggala. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '音︰补(as a term for Purgatory (niraya地狱): see Bdhgh’s etym. of puggala补伽罗Vism.310.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puṁs: {'def': '[Vedic puṁs (weak base) and pumāṁs (strong base), often opp. to strī (woman, female); cp. putra & potaka]. Of the simplex no forms are found in Pāli proper. The base puṁ occurs in pukusa (?), puggala (?), pungava, pullinga; puṁs in napuṁsaka (cp. Prk. napuṁsaveya Pischel, Gram. § 412). The role of puṁs as contrast to itthi has in Pāli been taken over by purisa, except in itthi-pumā at the old passage D.III,85. The strong base is in P. puman (q. v.). See also posa1. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puṅgava: {'def': '【阳】公牛，高贵的人。Buddhaguṇagāthāvalī(佛陀功德颂)︰mahāpabodhipuṅgavo, v.53.；munipuṅgavo, v.96.﹑v.814.；paññapuṅgavo, v.141.；purisapuṅgavo, v.508.；isipuṅgavo,v.603.(rsipuṅgava牛王仙, Watapañcāwatka, v.91.)。ñāṇapuṅgavo, v.618.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[puṁ+gava (see go), cp. Class. Sk. pungava in both meanings] a bull, lit “male-cow,” A.I,162; II,75 sq.; Sn.690; J.III,81, 111; V,222, 242, 259, 433; SnA 323. As --° in meaning “best, chief” Vism.78 (muni°); ThA.69 (Ap.V,5) (nara°). (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】公牛，高贵的人。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puṅkha: {'def': '【中】箭羽(箭的羽毛部份the feathered part of an arrow)。Cp. poṅkha.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】箭羽（箭的羽毛部份）。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. puṅkha, etym. puṁ (base of puṁs)+ kha (of khan), thus “man-digging”?] the feathered part of an arrow J.II,89. Cp. poṅkha. (Page 463)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puṇḍarika niraya: {'def': '白莲花地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Puṇḍarīka: {'def': '(nt.) [Non-Aryan (?). Cp. Vedic puṇḍarīka] the white lotus D.I,75=A.III,26 (in sequence uppala, padụma, p.); D.II,4 (Sikhī puṇḍarīkassa mūle abhisambuddho); M.III,93; S.I,138, 204=J.III,309; A.I,145 (uppala paduma p.); II,86 sq. (samaṇa° adj.); Sn.547; J.V,45, 215 (°ttac’aṅgī=ratta-paduma-patta-vaṇṇasarīrā); Vv 4412 (=seta-kamala VvA.191); Pv.II,122; III,33 (pokkharaṇī bahu °ā); Pug.63; DA.I,219, 284 (saṅkho elo uppalo puṇḍarīko ti cattāro nidhayo). N. of a hell S.I,152; Sn.p. 126 (here in sq. Uppalaka, Puṇḍ°, Paduma). (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】白睡莲。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】白睡莲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puṇḍarīkinī: {'def': '(f.) [adj. pundarīkin, of puṇḍarīka] a pool or pond of white lotuses D.I,75≈(M.III,93; S.I,138). (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puṇṇa: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Pūrṇa] ① 富楼那 [アパランタを教化した比丘] . ② = Puṇṇa-Mantāniputta [BSk. Pūrṇa Maitrāyanīputra] 富楼那弥多羅尼子, 満慈子, 満願子 [説法第一の比丘].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[pp. of pṛ, Vedic pṛṇāti, Pass. pūryate, *pelē to fill; cp. Sk. prāṇa & pūrṇa=Av. p∂r∂na; Lith. pílnas; Lat. plēnus; Goth fulls=E. full=Ger voll] full, seldom by itself (only passage so far pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā D.I,47=Sn.p. 139). nor --° (only Sn.835 muttakarīsa°), usually in cpds., and there mostly restricted to phrases relating to the full moon. --ghaṭa a full pitcher (for feeding the bhikkhus, as offering on festive days, cp. J.P.T.S. 1884) DhA.I,147; KhA 118 (v. l. suvaṇṇaghaṭa); DA.I,140 (°paṭimaṇḍita ghara). --canda the full moon J.I,149, 267; V,215. --patta a full bowl (as gift, °ṁ deti to give an ample gift) J.III,535. --baddha at Miln.191 should be read as °bhadda. --bala at DA.I,110 read puñña-bala. --bhadda worshipper of Puṇṇabhadda, perhaps a Yakkha (father of the Yakkha Harikesa) Nd1 92 (Vāsuvadeva, Baladeva, P. and Maṇibhadda, cp. p. 89); Miln.191 (pisācā maṇibhaddā p.). --mā the full moon (night) D.I,47 (komudiyā cātumāsiniyā puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā, cp. DA.I,140); Sn.p. 139 (similar); M.III,21; J.V,215 (dve p-māyo); Vism.292 (puṇṇa-m-uposatha=puṇṇa-māuposatha), 418 (Phagguṇa-puṇṇama-divase); VvA.66 (āsāḷhi p.); PvA.137 (id.); DA.I,140; DhA.III,461 (komudi). --māsa=°mā only in Loc. puṇṇamāse Vv 811 (=puṇṇa-māsiyaṁ sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṁ VvA.314; the similar pass. at VvA.321 reads, prob. by mistake, sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṁ: see pāṭī); J.V,215 (=puṇṇa candāya rattiyā C.). --māsī (f.; fr. °māsa)= mā J.I,86 (Phagguṇi p.); VvA.314; cp. BSk. pūrṇamāsī AvŚ I.182. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pūrati 的【过分】), 已满，已完成。 ~ghaṭa, 【阳】已满的大水罐。~canda, 【阳】满月，望月，月圆。 ~patta, 【中】礼物。 ~māsī, ~mī,【阴】月圆日（农历十五）。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pūrati 的【过分】), 已满，已完成。puṇṇaghaṭa,【阳】已满的大水罐。puṇṇacanda,【阳】满月，望月，月圆。puṇṇapatta,【中】礼物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puṇṇamantānīputta: {'def': '（比库名）本那满答尼补答，（古音译：）富楼那满慈子', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Puṇṇamāsī: {'def': 'puṇṇamī,【阴】月圆日(农历十五。中国民间说「十五的月亮十六圆」，是因为月球绕地球转动，平均需要29天12小时44分钟。在「望」时，月、地、日最接近一条直线，月亮因此也最圆、最亮。月亮每次抵达「望」的时间不同，大多在农历十六日甚至十七日凌晨。目前泰、缅、斯三国的月圆日都不完全一样，会误差为一天。) Thupavaṁso︰Sve puṇṇamuposathadivase uttarāsāḷha nakkhattena﹐以星宿来说是明日「斗宿」的月圆的布萨日。S.22.82./III,100.︰Tena kho pana samayena Bhagavā tadahuposathe pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto ajjhokāse nisinno hoti.(那时，世尊於布萨日，十五满月的月圆之夜，为比丘众所围绕在露地坐。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puṇṇatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. ro puṇṇa] fulness SnA 502. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puṇṇatā: {'def': '【阴】puṇṇatta,【中】满。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to puṇṇa] fulness DA.I,140 (māsa° full-moon). (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】 puṇṇatta, 【中】满。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Puṭa: {'def': '[etym. unknown, prob. dialectical, as shown by N. of Pāṭaliputta, where putta=puṭa since unfamiliar in origin] orig. meaning “tube,” container, hollow, pocket. -- 1. a container, usually made of leaves (cp. J.IV,436; V,441; VI,236), to carry fruit or other viands, a pocket, basket: ucchu° basket for sugar J.IV,363; paṇṇa° leaf-basket PvA.168; phala° fruit basket J.IV,436=VI,236; phānita(ssa)° basket of molasses, sugar-basket S.I,175 (KS.: jar); J.IV,366; DhA.IV,232; mālā° basket for garlands or flowers DhA.III,212 (baddha made, lit. bound). In puṭa-baddha-kummāsa VvA.308 perhaps meaning “cup.” -- 2. a bag or sack, usually referring to food carried for a journey, thus “knapsack” (or directly “provisions,” taking the container for what it contains DA.I,288 puts puṭaṁsa= pātheyya), in bhatta° bag with provisions J.II,82 (with bandhati), 203; III,200; DA.I,270. Also at J.IV,375 “bag” (tamba-kipillaka°). See below °aṁsa & °bhatta. -- 3. a tube, hollow, in nāsā° (nāsa°) nostril J.VI,74; Vism.195, 263, 362; KhA 65; hattha° the hollow of the hand Miln.87; vatthi° bladder(--bag) Vism.264; sippi-puṭa oyster shell J.V,197, 206. puṭaṁ karoti to form a hollow VbhA.34. -- 4. box, container, see °bheda & °bhedana, in pāṭali-puṭa seed box for the P. flower.

--aṁsa “bag-shoulder” (for “shoulder-bag,” cp. aṁsapuṭa (assapuṭa) & Ger. rucksack=knapsack. Rightly expl^d by Bdhgh at DA.I,288), a bag carrying provisions on journeys, hence “provision,” in phrase puṭaṁsena with provisions (v. l. at all places puṭosena) D.I,117; M.III,80; A.II,183; cp. Dialogues I.150; see also mutoḷī. --pāka something cooked in a bag (like a meal-pudding) Vism.500. --baddha kind of moccasins Vin.I,186, see Vin. Texts II.15. Spelt puṭa-bandha at Vism.251=VbhA.234. --bhatta “bag-food,” viaticum, provisions for journey J.II,423; KhA 46. --bheda the breaking of the container (i. e. seed boxes of the Sirīsa plant) VvA.344 (in vatthu where Sirīsa refers to Pāṭaliputta, cp. Vv 84^{52, 53}). --bhedana breaking of the (seed-) boxes of the Pāṭali plant, referring primarily to the N. of Pāṭali-putta, where putta represents a secondary Pālisation of Sk. °putra which again represents P. (or Non-Aryan) puṭa (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 238 & 292). Through popular etym. a wrong conception of the expression arose, which took puṭa in the sense of “wares, provisions, merchandise” (perhaps influenced by puṭaṁsa) and, based on C. on Ud.88 (bhaṇḍakānaṁ mocara-ṭṭhānaṁ vuttaṁ hoti) gave rise to the (wrong) trsln Dial. II.92 “a centre for interchange of all kinds of wares.” See also Miln.trsln I.2; Buddh. Suttas XVI, -- Vin.I,229=D.II,87=Ud.88. After the example of Pāṭaliputta applied to the city of Sāgala at Miln.1 (nānā-puṭa-bhedanaṁ S° nagaraṁ). Here clearly meant for “merchandise.” -- Rh. D. in a note on puṭabhedana gives expln “a town at the confluence or bend of a river” (cp. Jaina Sūtras 2, 451). Puṭaka (nt.) [fr. puṭa] a bag, pocket, knapsack or basket J.II,83 (°bhatta=provisions); DA.I,263; DhA.II,82 (v. l. piṭaka & kutaka); IV,132 (pockets of a serpent’s hood). Cp. bhatta. (Page 464)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'puṭaka, 【阳、中】（通常是以树叶做的）容器，口袋，篮子。 ~baddha,【形】打包成包裹的。 ~bhatta, 【中】一包饭。 ~bhedana, 【中】包裹的口子。 ~aŋsa, 【形】肩上挂个背包的。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'puṭaka,【阳】【中】(通常是以树叶做的)容器，口袋，篮子(“tube,” container, hollow, pocket)。puṭabaddha,【形】打包成包裹的。puṭabhatta,【中】一包饭。puṭabhedana,【中】包裹迸裂(种子)的袋子(breaking of the (seed-) boxes of the Pāṭali plant)。puṭaṁsa,【形】挂肩上的背包(装旅途资粮的肩袋)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Puṭṭha: {'def': '2 (pucchati 的【过分】), 已被问，已被审问。puṭṭhakāla, 已被问之时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(poseti 的【过分】), 喂，滋养，培养。 (pucchati 的【过分】), 已被问，已被审问。(p229)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ see phuṭṭha [=Sk. spṛṣṭa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 311]. Puṭṭhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. puṭṭha1] the fact of being fed or brought up by J.II,405 (vaḍḍhakinā °ā). (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (poseti 的【过分】), 喂，滋养，培养。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of puṣ (see poseti), Vedic puṣṭa] nourished, fed, strengthened, brought up Sn.831; J.III,467. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '²[pp. of pucchati, Vedic pṛsṭa] asked S.II,36; Sn.84, 122, 510 sq., 1036; DhA.IV,132; PvA.10 (after Acc.) 68, 72 with samāno A.I,197. See also pucchita. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Puṭṭhavant: {'def': '[fr. puṭṭha3, cp. same form in Prk. AMg. puṭṭhavaṁ=Sk. spṛṣṭavān: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 569] one who has touched or come in direct contact with ThA.284. (Page 465)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pābhata: {'def': '【中】礼物。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+ābhata),【中】礼物(brought, conveyed)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+ābhata] brought, conveyed DA.I,262; SnA 356 (kathā°). (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pābhati: {'def': '(pa+ā+pp. of bhr支持；“that which has been brought here,”),【中】 1.礼物，贿赂(a present, bribe)。2.金钱，价格(money, price)。kathāpābhati,带来之说(“a tale brought,” occasion for something to tell, news, story)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pa+ā+pp. of bhṛ] “that which has been brought here,” viz. 1. a present, bribe DA.I,262. ‹-› 2. money, price J.I,122; V,401, 452. --kathā° “a tale brought,” occasion for something to tell, news, story J.I,252, 364, 378; SnA 356. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pācaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. pac, cp. pāceti] one who cooks, a cook; f. °ikā J.I,318. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. pac, cp. pāceti),【形】【中】烹饪的，成熟的，消化的，厨师(one who cooks, a cook; f. pācikā)。pācaka tejo(=pācakaggi)﹐消化之火(这是命根九法聚的作用之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】烹饪的，成熟的，消化的，厨师。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pācana: {'def': '² (nt.) [for pājana, cp. pāceti² & SnA 147] a goad, stick S.I,172; Sn.p. 13; V,77; J.III,281; IV,310.

--yaṭṭhi driving stick, goad stick S.I,115. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】刺棒。参考 Pājana。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 (for pājana, cp. pāceti2 & SnA 147),【中】刺棒(a goad, stick)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (fr. pac, Caus. pāceti),【中】烹调(bringing to boil, cooking J.I.318 (yāgupācana)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. pac, Caus. pāceti] bringing to boil, cooking J.I,318 (yāgu°). Cp. pari°. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pācariya: {'def': '【阳】老师的老师，师公。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) [pa+ācariya] only as 2^nd part of a (redupl.) compound ācariya-pācariya in the nature of comb^ns mentioned under a¹ 3 b: “teacher upon teacher” (expl^d by C^Q as “teacher of teachers”) D.I,90 (cp. DA.I,254); II,237, etc. (see ācariya). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】老师的老师，师公(teacher of teachers)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāceti: {'def': '参考 Pācāpeti。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [for pājeti, with c. for j (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 39³); pra+aj: see aja] to drive, urge on Dh.135 (āyuṁ p. ‹-› gopālako viya . . . peseti DhA.III,60). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (Caus. of pacati), 使烹调(to cause to boil, fig. to cause to torment D.I,52 )。ppr. pācayato, Gen., also pācento。参考 Pācāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of pacati] to cause to boil, fig. to cause to torment D.I,52 (ppr. pācayato, Gen., also pācento). Cp. vi°. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (for pājeti, with c. for j (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 393); pra+aj: see aja), 驾驶，促使( to drive, urge on)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pācikā: {'def': '【阴】女厨师。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女厨师。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pācittiya: {'def': '(adj.) [most likely prāk+citta+ika, i. e. of the nature of directing one’s mind upon, cp. pabbhāra= *prāg+bhāra. So expl^d also by S. Lévi J.As. X.20, p. 506. Geiger, P.Gr. § 27, n. 1 inclines to etym. prāyaś+cittaka] requiring expiation, expiatory Vin.I,172, 176; II,242, 306 sq.; IV,1 sq., 258 sq.; A.II,242 (dhamma); Vism.22. -- It is also the name of one of the books of the Vinaya (ed. Oldenberg, vol. IV.). See on term Vin. Texts I.18, 32, 245. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(most likely prāk+citta+ika, i. e. of the nature of directing one’s mind upon, cp. pabbhāra= *prāg+bhāra. So expld also by S. Lévi J.As. X.20, p. 506. Geiger, P.Gr. § 27, n. 1 inclines to etym. prāyaw+cittaka),【形】波逸提，忏悔(requiring expiation, expiatory Vin.I,172, 176; II.242, 306 sq.; IV.1 sq., 258 sq.; A.II,242 (dhamma); Vism.22. -- It is also the name of one of the books of the Vinaya (ed. Oldenberg, vol. IV.). See on term Vin. Texts I.18, 32, 245. 《十诵律》卷第十七(T23.121.2)︰「波逸提者‘煮烧覆障’，若不悔过能障碍道。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pācāpeti: {'def': '(pac + āpe), 使烹调。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pac +āpe), 使烹调。【过】pācāpesi。【过分】pācāpita。【独】pācāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pācīna: {'def': '(Vedic prācīna, fr. adv. prāc bent forward),【形】东方的(eastern i. e. facing the (rising) sun (opp. pacchā))。pācīnadisā,【阴】东部，东方。pācīnamukha,【形】面对东部的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic prācīna, fr. adv. prāc bent forward] eastern i. e. facing the (rising) sun (opp. pacchā) J.I,50 (°sīsaka, of Māyādevī’s couch), 212 (°lokadhātu); Miln.6; DA.I,311 (°mukha facing east); DhA.III,155 (id.); VvA.190; PvA.74, 256. The opposite apācīna (e. g. S.III,84) is only apparently a neg. pācīna, in reality a der. fr. apa (apa+ac), as pācīna is a der. fr. pra+ac. See apācīna. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】东方的。 ~disā, 【阴】东部，东方。 ~mukha, 【形】面对东部的。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāda: {'def': '[Vedic pāda, see etym. under pada] 1. the foot, usually pl. pādā both feet, e. g. Vin.I,9, 34, 188; It.111; Sn.309, 547, 768, 835, 1028; J.II,114; IV,137; DhA.III,196; PvA.4, 10, 40, 68; VvA.105. In sg. scarce, and then specified as eka° & dutiya°, e. g. at Nd² 304^III; J.VI,354. -- 2. foot or base of a mountain Vism.399 (Sineru°); DhA.I,108 (pabbata°). -- 3. the fourth part (“foot”) of a verse (cp. pada 4) SnA 239, 273, 343, 363; ThA.23. -- 4. a coin Vin.III,47; VvA.77 (worth here 1/4 of a kahāpaṇa and double the value of māsaka; see also kākaṇikā).

--aṅguṭṭha a toe M.I,337. --aṅguṭṭhaka same J.II,447; Vism.233. --aṅguli same PvA.125 (opp. to hatth’aṅguli finger). --aṭṭhika bone of the foot M.I,58, 89; III,92; KhA 49. --âpacca offspring fr. the foot (of Brahmā): see bandhu. --ûdara “(using) the belly as feet,” i. e. a snake Sn.604. --odaka water for washing the feet Vin.I,9. --kathalika (°iya) Acc. to Bdhgh either a foot stool or a towel (adhota-pāda-ṭhapanakaṁ pāda-ghaṁsanaṁ vā, see Vin. Texts I.92; II,373) Vin.I,9, 46; II,22; IV,310; Kvu 440; VvA.8; DhA.I,321. --kudārikā holding the feet like an axe (?) Pv IV.1⁴⁷ (expl^d at PvA.240 by pādasaṅkhātā kudārikā; does k. here represent kuṭhārikā? The reading & meaning is uncertain). --khīla a corn in the foot Vin.I,188 (as °ālādha, cp. Vin Texts II.19). --ghaṁsanī a towel for rubbing the feet (dry) Vin.II,130. --cāra moving about on feet J.IV,104. --tala the sole of the foot Vin.I,179; M.III,90; D.III,143, 148; PvA.74. --dhovana cleaning or washing one’s feet DhA.II,9. --pa “drinking with the foot,” N. for tree Pv IV.3⁹ (cp. PvA.251); Miln.117, 376; Vism.533; VvA.212; Sdhp.270. --paricārikā “serving on one’s feet,” i. e. a wife (cp. S.I,125) J.III,95; VI,268; DhA.III,194. --pīṭha a foot-stool Vin.I,9 (cp. Vin. Texts I.92); IV,310; DhA.III,120=186; VvA.291. --puñchana(ka) wiping one’s feet (with a towel) Vism.358 (°rajju-maṇḍalaka, in comparison=VbhA.62); VbhA.285 (°coḷaka); KhA 144; SnA 333; DhA.I,415 (°ka). --puñchanī a towel for the feet Vin.II,174. --bbhañjana ointment for the feet, foot-salve Vin.I,205; J.V,197, 376; PvA.44, 78; anointing the feet VvA.44 (°tėla), 295 (id.). --mūla the sole of the foot, the foot J.IV,131. Cp. mūla. --mūlika “one who sits at one’s feet,” a foot-servant, lackey J.I,122, 438; II,300 sq. (Gāmaṇicaṇḍa); III,417; V,128; VI,30. --lola loafing about, one who lingers after a thing, a greedy person Sn.63, 972; Nd¹ 374; Nd² 433; abstr. f. °lolatā SnA 36, & °loliya Nd² 433. --visāṇa “a horn on the foot,” i. e. an impossibility J.VI,340. --sambāhana massaging the feet DhA.I,38. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】脚，腿，基础，四分之一，第四个诗节。 ~ka, 【形】有脚的，有基础的。【中】基础。 ~kajjhāna, 【中】以禅定形成基础。~kaṭhalikā, 【阴】洗脚时站上的木块。 ~ṅguṭṭha, 【中】拇趾。 ~ṅguli,【阴】脚趾。 ~ṭṭhika, 【中】腿的骨头。 ~tala, 【中】脚掌。 ~paricārikā,【阴】妻子。 ~pīṭha, 【中】脚凳。 ~puñchana, 【中】擦拭脚的地毯。~mūle, 在脚。 ~mūlika, 【阳】仆人，坐在一脚的人。 ~lola, 【形】想到处流浪。 ~sambāhana, 【中】脚的按摩。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】脚，腿，基础，四分之一，第四个诗节。pādaka,【形】有脚的，有基础的。【中】基础。pādakajjhāna,【中】以禅定形成基础。pādakaṭhalikā,【阴】洗脚时站上的木块。pādaṅguṭṭha,【中】拇趾。pādaṅguli,【阴】脚趾。pādaṭṭhika,【中】腿骨(腿的骨头)。pādatala,【中】脚掌。pādaparicārikā,【阴】妻子。pādapīṭha,【中】脚凳。pādapuñchana,【中】擦拭脚的地毯。pādamūle, 在脚。pādamūlika,【阳】仆人，坐在一脚的人。pādalola,【形】想到处流浪。pādasambāhana,【中】脚的按摩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pādaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pāda] 1. having a foot or basis Vin.II,110 (a°); Sn.205; ThA.78. -- 2. fundamental; pādakaṁ karoti to take as a base or foundation Vism.667. -- 3. (nt.) basis, foundation, base PvA.167. ‹-› pādaka-jjhāna meditation forming a basis (for further introspective development) Vism.390, 397, 412 sq., 428, 667. -- Cp. āhacca°. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pādapa: {'def': '【阳】树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】树。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pādodaka: {'def': '【阳】洗脚水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】洗脚水。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pādudara: {'def': '【阳】蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蛇。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāduka: {'def': '[=pādaka] a little foot J.VI,554. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pādukā: {'def': '【阴】拖鞋，鞋。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. pāduka & pādukā] a shoe, slipper, clog Vin.I,190; II,142, 222; J.III,327; IV,129, 379; V,298; VI,23; Miln.330; DA.I,136; DhA.III,451 (muñja°). -- At Vin.II,143 (according to Rh. D.) pādukā (dāru°) is a kind of stool or stand in a privy. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】拖鞋，鞋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pādāsi: {'def': '(padāti 的【过】), 他给了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(padāti 的【过】), 他给了。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'is aor. of padāti. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāgabbhiya: {'def': '【中】大胆，轻率，卤莽。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pagabbha] boldness, impudence, forwardness Sn.930; Nd¹ 228 sq. (3 kinds, viz. kāyika, vācasika, cetasika), 390 sq.; J.II,32; V,449 (pagabbhiya); SnA 165; KhA 242; DhA.III,354 (pa°); VvA.121. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】大胆，轻率，卤莽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāgusa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. vāgusa, a sort of large fish Halāyudha 3, 37] a certain kind of fish J.IV,70 (as gloss, T. reads pāvusa, SS puṭusa, BB pātusa & pāvuma; C. expl^ns as mahā-mukha-maccha). (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāguññatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. of pāguñña, which is der. fr. paguna] being familiar with, experience Dhs.48, 49; Vism.463 sq., 466. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】经历，聪明。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】练达。Abhidhammatthavibhāvinīṭīkā(CS:p.110)：Tā kāya-citta-akammañña-bhāva-vūpasamalakkhaṇā. Paguṇassa bhāvo pāguññaṁ, tadeva pāguññatā, kāyassa pāguññatā kāyapāguññatā.( 它平息心所不适应的状态的相，练达状态的练达，它正是练达性，心所的练达性，为心所练达性。)。Dhs.#48.：Katamā tasmiṁ samaye kāyapāguññatā hoti? Yā tasmiṁ samaye vedanākkhandhassa saññākkhandhassa saṅkhārakkhandhassa 1paguṇatā 2paguṇattaṁ 3paguṇabhāvo--ayaṁ tasmiṁ samaye kāyapāguññatā hoti.(在此时什么是‘心所练达性’？此时是凡是受蕴、想蕴、行蕴的1练达性、2练达、3练达的态，即此时是‘心所练达性’)。Dhs.#49.：Katamā tasmiṁ samaye cittapāguññatā hoti? Yā tasmiṁ samaye viññāṇakkhandhassa 1paguṇatā 2paguṇattaṁ 3paguṇabhāvo--ayaṁ tasmiṁ samaye cittapāguññatā hoti.(在时什么是‘心练达性’？此时是凡是识蕴的1练达性、2练达、3练达的态，即此时是心练达性。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāheti: {'def': '(pa + hi + e), 使送。【过】 pāhesi。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[secondary form. after aor. pāhesi fr. pahiṇati] to send J.I,447; Miln.8; PvA.133. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+hi+e), 使送。【过】pāhesi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāhuna: {'def': '(m. nt.) [fr. pa+ā+hu, see also āhuna & der.] 1. (m.) a guest A.III,260; J.VI,24, 516. -- 2. (nt.) meal for a guest D.I,97=M.II,154; Vism.220; DA.I,267. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāhunaka: {'def': '(m.-nt.) [fr. pāhuna] 1. (m.) a guest J.I,197; IV,274; Miln.107; DA.I,267, 288; DhA.II,17. -- 2. (nt.) meal for a guest S.I,114. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāhuneyyaka: {'def': '=pāhuṇeyya J.III,440. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāhuṇa: {'def': '【阳】客人。【中】招待客人的餐，礼物。 ~ṇeyya, 【形】值得款待的。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】客人。【中】招待客人的餐，礼物。pāhuṇeyya,【形】值得款待的(cf. āhuvanīya可奉献的；值得先供或最先奉献)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāhuṇeyya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pāhuna, see also āhuneyya] worthy of hospitality, deserving to be a guest D.III,5; S.I,220; II,70; A.II,56; III,36, 134, 248, 387; IV,13 sq.; V,67, 198; It.88; Vism.220. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pājana: {'def': '【中】1.驾驶。2.刺棒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+aj, cp. pācana²] a goad SnA 147. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 驾驶。 2. 刺棒。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pājeti: {'def': '(pa+aj+e), 驾驶，带领。【过】pājesi。【过分】pājita。【现分】pājenta。【独】pājetvā。【使】pājāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pa+aj, cp. aja] 1. to drive (cp. pāceti²) J.II,122, 143, III,51 (BB for T. pājāpeti); V,443 (nāvaṁ); VI,32 (yoggaṁ); SnA 147; DhA.IV,160 (goṇe). -- 2. to throw (the dice) J.VI,281. -- Caus. II. pājāpeti (q. v.). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + aj + e), 驾驶，带领。【过】 pājesi。【过分】 pājita。【现分】pājenta。【独】 pājetvā。【使】 pājāpeti。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pājāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of pājeti] to cause to drive or go on J.II,296 (sakaṭāni); III,51 (so read for pajāpeti; BB pāceti & pājeti). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāka: {'def': '【阳】烹饪，被烹调的（饭、菜），成熟。 ~vaṭṭa, 【中】食物的连续补给。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic pāka, see pacati] that which is cooked, cooking, quantity cooked J.VI,161 (tīhi pākehi pacitvā); VvA.186. Esp. in foll. combⁿ tela° “oil cooking,” an oil decoction Vin.II,105; thāli° a th. full of cooking J.I,186; doṇa° a d. full S.I,81; DhA.II,8; sosāna° Dhātumañjūsā 132 (under kaṭh). On pāka in appl^d meaning of “effect, result” see Cpd. 88³. -- As nt. in stanza “pākaṁ pākassa paccayo; apākaṁ avipākassa” at VbhA.175. -- Cp. vi°.

--tela an oil concoction or mixture, used for rubbing the body; usually given with its price worth 100 or 1,000 pieces, e. g. sata° J.II,397; V,376; VvA.68= DhA.III,311; sahassa° J.III,372. --vaṭṭa subsistence, livelihood, maintenance Mhvs 35, 120; DhA.II,29; VvA.220. --haṁsa a species of water bird J.V,356; VI,539; SnA 277. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】烹饪，被烹调的(饭、菜)，成熟。pākavaṭṭa,【中】食物的连续补给。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pākata: {'def': '(adj.) [=pakata; on ā for a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 33¹. Cp. Sk. prakaṭa Halāyudha. The spelling is sometimes pākaṭa] 1. common, vulgar, uncontrolled, in phrase pākat-indriya of uncontrolled mind S.I,61 (=saṁvarâbhāvena gihikāle viya vivaṭa-indriya K.S. 320), 204; III,93; V,269; A.I,70, 266, 280; III,355, 391; Th.1, 109 (C. asaṁvuta, see Brethren 99); Pug.35. -- At Miln.251 pākatā is to be read pāpakā. -- 2. open, common, unconcealed J.I,262 (pākaṭo jāto was found out); SnA. 343; PvA.103 (for āvi). -- 3. commonly known, familiar Vism.279; PvA.17 (devā), 23, 78 (su°), 128; VvA.109 (+paññāta); °ṁ karoti to make manifest Vism.287; °bhāva being known DhsA.243; PvA.103. -- 4. renowned, well-known DA.I,143; PvA.107. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pākatika: {'def': '【形】自然的，最初的。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pakati, cp. BSk. prākṛtaka (loka) Bodhicaryâvatāra v. 3, ed. Poussin] natural, in its original or natural state J.V,274; Miln.218 (maṇiratana); DhA.I,20; VvA.288; PvA.66 (where id. p. J.III,167 reads paṭipākatika), 206; pākatikaṁ karoti to restore to its former condition, to repair, rebuild J.I,354, also fig. to restore a dismissed officer, to reinstate J.V,134. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】自然的，最初的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pākaṭa: {'def': '【形】衆所周知的，明白的，显著的(patent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】众所周知的，出名的。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pākula: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+ākula] read at Ud.5 in combⁿ akkulapakkula (=ākula-pākula) “in great confusion”; read also in gāthā 7 pākula for bakkula. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94 sq. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pākāra: {'def': '(cp. Epic Sk. prākāra, pa+ā+kr),【阳】围墙，篱笆，垒(an encircling wall, put up for obstruction and protection, a fence, rampart Vin.II,121 (3 kinds: made of bricks, of stone, or of wood, viz. iṭṭhakāpākāra, silāpākāra, dārupākāra))。pākāraparikkhitta,【形】被一面墙壁围著的。 parikkhepa-pākāra,。sāṇipākāra, (麻布制的)屏壁(screen-fencing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. prākāra, pa+ā+kṛ] an encircling wall, put up for obstruction and protection, a fence, rampart Vin.II,121 (3 kinds: made of bricks, of stone, or of wood, viz. iṭṭhakā°, silā, dāru°); IV,266 (id.); M.III,11; S.IV,194 (°toraṇa); A.IV,107; V,195; J.I,63; II,50; VI,330 (mahā°), 341 (+parikhā & aṭṭāla); Pv.I,10¹³ (ayo°); Miln.1; Vism.394 (=parikkhepa-pākāra); DhA.III,441 (tiṇṇaṁ pākārānaṁ antare); PvA.24, 52; sāṇi° screen-fencing J.II,88; PvA.283.

--iṭṭhakā brick or tile of a wall J.III,446 (T. iṭṭhikā). --parikkhitta surrounded by a wall DA.I,42. --parikkhepa a fencing Vism.74. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】围墙，垒。 ~parikkhitta, 【形】被一面墙壁围着的。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pākāsiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pa+ā+kāś, cp. pakāsati & Class. Sk. prākāśya] evident, manifest, open, clear J.VI,230 (opp. guyha; C. pākāsika). (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāla: {'def': 'pālaka, pāletu, 【阳】守卫，监护人，保护者。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) [fr. pā, see pāleti] a guard, keeper, guardian, protector S.I,185 (vihāra°); J.V,222 (dhamma°); VvA.288 (ārāma°); Sdhp.285. See also go°, loka°. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pālaka, pāletu,【阳】守卫，监护人，保护者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pālaka: {'def': '(-°) [fr. pā] a guardian, herdsman M.I,79; S.III,154; A.IV,127; J.III,444. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pālana: {'def': '【中】 Pālanā, 【阴】保护，保存，政府。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】pālanā,【阴】保护，保存，政府。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) (& pālanā?) [fr. pāleti 2, to all likelihood for palāyana through *pālāna, with false analogy] moving, running, keeping going, living, in phrase vutti pālana yapana etc. at Vism.145; DhsA.149 167; also in defn of bhuñjati1 as “pālan’ajjhohāresu” by eating & drinking for purposes of living, at Dhtp 379. As pālanā at the Dhs.passages of same context as above (see under yapana). (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pālanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pāleti cp. Ep. Sk. pālana nt.] guarding, keeping J.I,158; Dhs.19, 82,295. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāleti: {'def': '[cp. (Epic) Sk. pālayati, fr. pā] 1. to protect, guard, watch, keep Sn.585; J.I,55; IV,127; VI,589; Miln.4 (paṭhavī lokaṁ pāleti, perhaps in meaning “keeps, holds, encircles,” similar to meaning 2); Sdhp.33. ‹-› 2. (lit. perhaps “to see through safely”; for palāyati by false analogy) to go on, to move, to keep going, in defn of carati as viharati, iriyati, vattati, pāleti, yapeti, yāpeti at Nd2 237; Vbh.252; DhsA.167. Cp. pālana. So also in phrase atthaṁ pāleti (so read for paleti?) “to come home” i. e. to disappear Sn.1074 (see expld Nd2 28). See other refs. under palāyati. ‹-› pp. pālita. See also abhi° & pari°. A contracted (poetical) form is found as pallate at J.V,242, expld by C. as pālayati (pālayate), used as Med.-Pass. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pāl + e), 保护，保卫，保持。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 pālenta。【现分】 pāletabba。【独】 pāletvā。【不】 pāletuŋ。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐pālayati (pāl +e), 保护，保卫，保持。【过】pālesi。【现分】pālenta。【现分】pāletabba。【独】pāletvā。【不】pāletuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāli: {'def': 'paḷi, 【阴】线，范围，佛教经典，巴利语。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Pāḷi,【阴】线，行，范围，本文，佛教经典，巴利语(是一种古代印度俗语，是属於印欧语系、印度-伊朗语族、印度-雅利安语支的一种中古印度-雅利安语，与梵文十分相近。上座部所有的三藏经典都是以巴利文记载)。摩竭陀王朝时代(西元前390～西元182年)，以巴利语为主，但大众系与南方的分别说系使用阿布兰迦语(印度俗语)。案达罗王朝(西元前29～西元233年)时代的空相应大乘经出於大众系的『杂藏』，所以也使用阿布兰迦语；西北方的说一切有系，使用雅语(梵语)。笈多王朝(西元320～540年)前后，真常唯心与秘密经轨，后代论师的作品，才多使用梵语。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Pāḷi) (f.) [cp. Sk. pālī a causeway, bridge Halāyudha III,54] 1. a line, row Dāvs III,61; IV,3; Vism.242 (dvattiṁs’ākāra°), 251 (danta°); SnA 87. -- 2. a line, norm, thus the canon of Buddhist writings; the text of the Pāli Canon, i. e. the original text (opp. to the Commentary; thus “pāliyaṁ” is opposed to “aṭṭhakathāyaṁ” at Vism.107, 450, etc). It is the literary language of the early Buddhists, closely related to Māgadhī. See Grierson, The Home of Lit. Pāli (Bhandarkar Commemoration vol. p. 117 sq.), and literature given by Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt., II.10; III,606, 635. The word is only found in Commentaries, not in the Piṭaka. See also Hardy, Introd. to Nett, p. xi. -- J.IV,447 (°nayena accord. to the Pāli Text); Vism.376 (°nay’anusārena id.), 394, 401, 565 (°anusārato accord. to the text of the Canon); 607, 630, 660 sq., 693, 712; KhA 41; SnA 333, 424, 519, 604; DhsA.157, 168; DhA.IV,93; VvA.117, 203 (pālito+aṭṭhuppattito); PvA.83, 87, 92, 287; and freq. elsewhere. --vaṇṇanā is explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual criticism, as opposed to vinicchaya-kathā analysis, exegesis, interpretation of sense Vbh.291; Vism.240 (contrasted to bhāvanāniddesa). (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(巴利)三藏圣典;巴利(语);线', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '〔巴利，〕和注、疏相对的三藏圣典；或者指记载三藏圣典的语言。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Pāli-bhāsā: {'def': '巴利语', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Pālibhaddaka: {'def': '[fr. palibhadda=pari+bhadda, very auspicious] the tree Butea frondosa J.IV,205; Nd2 680AII; Vism.256 (°aṭṭhi); VbhA.239 (id.); KhA 46, 53; DhsA.14; DhA.I,383. As phālibhaddaka (-vana) at J.II,162 (v. l. pātali°). (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pālicca: {'def': '【中】头发的白色。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. palita] greyness of hair M.I,49; S.II,2, 42; A.III,196; Dhs.644, 736, 869; VbhA.98. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】头发的白色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāliguṇṭhima: {'def': '(adj.) [doubtful, fr pali+guṇṭh, see paliguṇṭhita; hapax legomenon] covered round (of sandals) Vin.I,186 (Vin. Texts II.15: laced boots); v. l. BB °gunṭhika. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pālita: {'def': '(Pāleti‘保护’的【过分】) 保护。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāmaṅga: {'def': '【中】腰带，束腰带(a band or chain)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】腰带，束腰带。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [etym.?] a band or chain Vin.II,106; III,48; Mhvs 11, 28; Dpvs XII.1; DhA.IV,216. See on this Vin. Texts III,69 & Mhvs trsl. 797. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāmeti: {'def': '(pa+mi(梵mā)+e), 比较。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + mi + e), 比较。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāmojja: {'def': 'pāmujja, 【中】高兴，欢喜，快乐。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '=pāmujja [Cp. BSk. prāmodya Divy 13, 82, 239] D.II,214; III,288; M.I,37, 98; S.I,203; II,30; V,157; Dh.376, 381; Ps.I,177; Dhs.9, 86; Miln.84; Vism.2, 107, 177 (T. pa°); DhA.IV,111 (°bahula). (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pāmujja(cp. BSk. prāmodya),【中】高兴，欢喜，快乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāmokkha: {'def': '(adj.) [a grd. form. fr. pamukha, with lengthening of a as frequently in similar forms like pāṭidesanīya, pāṭimokkha, pāmojja] 1. chief, first, excellent, eminent, (m.) a leader. -- A.II,168 (saṅga sa°); Pug.69, 70; Miln.75 (hatthi° state elephant). disā° worldfamed J.I,166, 285; II,278; VI,347. -- Freq. in series agga seṭṭha pāmokkha attama, in exegesis of mahā (at Nd2 502 A e. g., when A.II,95 reads mokkha for p.). See mahā. Defd as “pamukhe sādhū ti” at VbhA.332. -- 2. facing east Pv IV.353 (=pācīna-dis’âbhimukha). (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】1.主要的，第一的，杰出的。2.向东的。【阳】领袖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】主要的，第一的，杰出的。【阳】领袖。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāmujja: {'def': '(nt.) [grd. form. tr. pa+mud, see similar forms under pāmokkha] delight, joy, happiness; often combd with pīti. -- D.I,72, 196; S.III,134; IV,78=351; V,156, 398; A.III,21; V,1 sq., 311 sq., 339, 349; Sn.256; Nett 29; DA.I,217; Sdhp.167. See also pāmojja. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(grd. form. tr. pa+mud欢乐),【中】高兴，欢喜，快乐(delight, joy, happiness; often combd with pīti.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāna: {'def': '【中】喝，饮料，糖浆。 ~ka, 【中】饮料。 ~maṇḍala, ~agāra, 【中】喝亭，酒馆。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic pāna, fr. pā, pibati=Lat. bibo, pp. pīta, Idg. *po[i], cp. Gr. pi/nw to drink, pόtos drink; Obulg. piti to drink, pivo drink; Lith. penas milk; Lat. potus drink, poculum drinking vessel (=Sk. pātra, P. patta)] drink, including water as well as any other liquid. Often comb^d with anna° (food), e. g. Sn.485, 487; Pv.I,52; and °bhojana (id.) e. g. Dh.249; J.I,204. Two sets of 8 drinks are given in detail at Nd1 372. -- Vin.I,245, 249 (yāgu°); S.V,375 (majja°); Sn.82, 398, 924; J.I,202 (dibba°); Pug.51; PvA.7, 8, 50. --âgāra a drinking booth, a tavern Vin.II,267; III,151; J.I,302 (=surā-geha C.); Vbh.247; VbhA.339. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】喝(台语：lim1)，饮料，糖浆(syrup)。pānaka,【中】饮料。pānamaṇḍala, pānagāra,【中】喝亭，酒馆。pānasoṇḍā﹐贪杯者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pānada: {'def': 'in cpd. Pānad’ûpama at J.II,223 is faulty. The meaning is “a badly made sandal,” and the reading should probably be (with v. l. & C.) “dupāhan’ûpama,” i. e. du(ḥ)+upāhanā. The C. expls as “dukkatupāhan’ûpama.” (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pānaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pāna] a drink J.II,285; IV,30; Dāvs.V,2; DhA.III,207 (amba°); VvA.99, 291. -- Der. pānakatta (abstr. nt.) being provided with drink J.V,243 (a°). (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pānudi: {'def': 'see panudati. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pānīya: {'def': '【中】水，饮料（如茶、酒、牛奶、汽水、低度汽水等）。 ~ghaṭa,【阳】水壶。 ~cāṭi, 【阴】饮料容器。 ~thālikā, 【阴】杯子。 ~bhājana,【中】饮料容器。 ~mālaka, 【中】 ~sālā, 【阴】放置饮用水的厅堂。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [Vedic pānīya, fr. pāna] 1. drinkable S.II,111. -- 2. drink, be erage, usually water for drinking Vin.II,207; IV,263; J.I,198, 450; III,491; V,106, 382; Pv.I,107; II,119, 710; PvA.4, 5. A reduced form pāniya (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23) is also found, e. g. Vin.II,153; D.I,148; Pv.II,102. --ghata a pot for drinking water Vin.II,216; J.VI,76, 85. --cāṭika drinking vessel DhA.IV,129. --cāṭī id. J.I,302. --ṭhālika drinking cup Vin.II,214; IV,263. --bhājana id. Vin.II,153. --maṇḍapa water reservoir (BSk. id. e. g. AvŚ II.86) Vin.II,153. --māḷaka (?) J.VI,85 (Hardy: Flacourtia cataphracta). --sālā a hall where drinking water is given Vin.II,153; PvA.102; cp. papā. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】水，饮料(如茶、酒、牛奶、汽水等)。pānīyaghaṭa,【阳】水壶。pānīyacāṭi,【阴】饮料容器。pānīyathālikā,【阴】杯子。pānīyabhājana,【中】饮料容器。pānīyamālaka,【中】pānīyasālā,【阴】放置饮用水的厅堂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpa: {'def': '【中】恶，孽，邪恶，错误的行动。【形】坏的，有罪的，缺德的。pāpakāpagata,【形】已离去恶业。pāpakamma,【中】恶业，罪行，邪恶的行动。pāpakammanta, pāpakammī,【形】作恶者，坏人。pāpakara, pāpakārī,【形】有罪的，坏的。pāpakaraṇa,【中】做恶，干坏事。pāpadhamma,【形】恶法。pāpamitta,【阳】坏朋友。【形】有损友的。pāpamittatā,【阴】结交歹徒。pāpasaṅkappa,【阳】邪思维(邪恶想法)。pāpasamācāra,【阳】恶行。pāpasupina,【中】恶梦。pāpatara, 【形】较恶的。pāpatama,【形】最恶的。pāpiṭṭha, 【形】最恶的。pāpiṭṭhatara, 【形】比最恶还恶的。pāpiṭṭhatama, 【形】最最恶的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】恶，孽，邪恶，错误的行动。【形】坏的，有罪的，缺德的。~kamma, 【中】恶业，罪行，邪恶的行动。 ~kammanta, ~kammī, 【形】作恶者，坏人。 ~kara, ~kārī, 【形】有罪的，坏的。 ~karaṇa, 【中】做恶，干坏事。 ~dhamma, 【形】恶法。 ~mitta, 【阳】坏朋友。【形】有损友的。 ~mittatā, 【阴】结交歹徒。 ~saṅkappa, 【阳】邪思维（邪恶想法）。 ~supina, 【中】恶梦。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [Vedic pāpa, cp. Lat. patior≈E. passion etc.; Gr. phμa suffering, evil; talai/pwros suffering evil] 1. (adj.) evil, bad, wicked, sinful A.II,222 sq. (and compar. pāpatara); Sn.57; Dh.119 (opp. bhadra). Other compar-superl. forms are pāpiṭṭha S.V,96; pāpiṭṭhatara Vin.II,5; pāpiyyasika D.III,254. See pāpiya. -- 2. unfertile (of soil) S.IV,315. -- 3. (nt.) evil, wrong doing, sin Sn.23, 662; Dh.117 (opp. puñña) 183; Pv.I,66; 112; IV,150; DhA.II,11. -- pp. pāpāni Sn.399, 452, 674; Dh.119, 265. --iccha having bad wishes or intentions Vin.I,97; D.III,246; S.I,50; II,156; A.III,119, 191, 219 sq.; IV,1, 22, 155; V,123 sq.; Sn.133, 280; It.85; Nd2 342; Vism.24 (def.); VbhA.476; --icchatā evil intention A.IV,160, 165; DhA.II,77. --kamma evil doing, wickedness, sin, crime D.III,182; It.86; Sn.407; Dh.127; Vism.502; VbhA.440 sq.; PvA.11, 25, 32, 51, 84. --kammanta evil-doer, villain S.I,97. --kammin id. M.I,39 Dh.126. --kara id. Sn.674. --karin id. Dh.15, 17. --dassana sinful view Pv IV.355. --dhamma wickedness, evil habit Dh.248, 307; Pug.37; DhA.III,4; PvA.98; as adj. at PvA. 58. --dhammin one of evil character or habits Pv.I,117. --parikkhaya decay or destruction of demerit (opp. puñña°) Pv.II,615. --mitta an evil associate, a bad companion (opp. kalyāṇa°) M.I,43, 470; D.III,182. --mittatā bad company, association with wicked people A.I,13 sq., 83; IV,160, 165; D.III,212; Dhs.13, 27; Vbh.359, 369, 371. --saṅkappa evil thought Sn.280. --sīla bad morals Sn.246. --supina an evil dream (opp. bhaddaka) Vism.312; DhA.III,4. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāpaka: {'def': '【形】坏的，有罪的，(在【合】中：)导致。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】坏的，有罪的，(在【合】中)：导致。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pāpa] bad, wicked, wretched, sinful Vin.I,8; S.I,149, 207; V,418 (p. akusala citta); Sn.127, 215, 664; Dh.66, 78, 211, 242; J.I,128; Pv.II,716 (=lāmaka C.); II,93; Pug.19; Dhs.30, 101; Miln.204 (opp. kalyāṇa); Vism.268 (=lāmaka), 312 (of dreams, opp. bhaddaka). -- f. pāpikā Dh.164, 310; a° without sin, innocent, of a young maiden (daharā) Th.2, 370; Vv 314; 326 (so expld by VvA, but ThA.explns as faultless, i. e. beautiful). (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāpasamācāra: {'def': '【阳】恶行。Pārā.III,185.︰Pāpasamācāroti mālāvacchaṁ ropetipi ropāpetipi, siñcatipi siñcāpetipi, ocinātipi ocināpetipi, ganthetipi ganthāpetipi.(种植也令种植花圃，浇水也令浇，采集也令采集，编织也令编织者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpaṅka: {'def': '【阳】零售商。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāpaṇika: {'def': '(adj. n.) [pa+āpaṇa+ika] belonging to a shop, i. e. 1. a shopkeeper A.I,115 sq. -- 2. laid out in the shop (of cīvara) Vin.I,255; Vism.62 (=āpaṇa-dvāre patitaka). See also Vin. Texts II.156. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '( pa+āpaṇa市场+ika)﹐【阳】【形】店员(shopkeeper)，商人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpeti: {'def': '¹ [denom. fr. pāpa] to make bad, bring into disgrace Vin.IV,5. -- pp. pāpita. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '²[Caus. of pāpuṇāti] to make attain, to let go to, to cause to reach, to bring to J.IV,494; V,205, 260; DA.I,136. imper. pāpaya S.I,217, and pāpayassu J.IV,20. fut. pāpessati J.I,260 and pāpayissati J.V,8. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + ap + e), 使到…去，使到达，使达到。【过】 pāpesi。【过分】pāpita。【现分】 ~penta。【独】 ~petvā。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2(pa+ap+e)( pāpuṇāti的【使】), 使到…去，使到达，使达到(to make attain, to let go to, to cause to reach, to bring to)。【过】pāpesi。【过分】pāpita。【现分】pāpenta。【独】pāpetvā。imper. pāpaya, and pāpayassu J IV.20. fut. pāpessati and pāpayissati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(DeNom. fr. pāpa)使坏(to make bad)。【过分】pāpita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpika: {'def': '=pāpaka D.I,90 (cp. DA.I,256); A.IV,197. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāpikā: {'def': '(pāpaka 的【阴】)。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pāpaka 的【阴】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpimant: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pāpa, cp. Vedic pāpman] sinful; a sinner, esp. used as Ep. of Māra, i. e. the Evil, the wicked one S.I,103; A.IV,434; Ud.64; Sn.430; Th.1, 1213; Miln.155 sq.; DhA.IV,32. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】【名】罪人，魔王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpimantu: {'def': '【形】罪人，魔王。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāpita: {'def': '[pp. of pāpeti1, in meaning=pāpika] one who has done wrong, sinful, evil M.II,43 (where D.I,90 at id. p. has pāpika); DA.I,256 (for pāpika, v. l. vāpita). (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pāpeti 的【过分】)。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pāpeti 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpiya: {'def': '【形】有罪的。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有罪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpiyo: {'def': '(adj.) [compar. of pāpa, cp. Sk. pāpīyas] worse, more evil or wicked S.I,162, 202; Sn.275; Dh.42, 76; J.I,158; IV,303; Miln.155; DhA.II,108. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāpurati: {'def': '[fr. pa+ā+vṛ, cp. Vedic pravṛṇoti] to cover, veil; shut, hide; only neg. a° and only in phrase apāpurati Amatassa dvāraṁ to open the door of Nibbāna Vin.I,5; Vv 6427 (=vivarati VvA.284). (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + ā + pur + a), 覆盖，包装。（通常写作） Pārupati。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+ā+pur(vr)+a), 披上，覆盖，包装。(通常写作)Pārupati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpuraṇa: {'def': '【中】盖子，宽大外衣，毛毯，绒被。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [through *pāvuraṇa fr. pra+vṛ, cp. Sk. prāvaraṇa] cover, dress, cloak S.I,175; Miln.279; DhA.III,1. See also pārupana. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(through *pāvuraṇa fr. pra+pur(vr), cp. Sk. prāvaraṇa),【中】盖子，宽大外衣，毛毯(cover, dress, cloak)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāpuṇana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pāpuṇāti] attainment J.IV,306. (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】达到，到达。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】达到，到达。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāpuṇāti: {'def': '(pa+āp+uṇā), 到达，达到，达成。【过】pāpuṇi(=apāpuṇi, a-为aor.的「扩增音」)。【现分】pāpuṇanta。【独】pāpuṇitvā, patvā。【不】pāpuṇituṁ, pattuṁ。【义】pāpuṇeyya。apāpuṇitvā﹑apatvā﹐【反】不达成之后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + ap + uṇā), 到达，达到，达成。【过】 pāpuṇi。【现分】~ṇanta。【独】 ~ṇitvā, patvā。【不】 ~ṇituŋ, pattuŋ。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+āp; cp. Sk. prāpnoti] to reach, attain, arrive at, obtain, get to learn. -- pres. pāpuṇāti Vin.II,208; J.IV,285; VI,149; Pug.70; DA. 21; PvA.74, 98, 125, 195; and pappoti S.I,25; Dh.27; Vism.501; DhA.I,395; pot. pāpuṇe Sn.324; Dh.138; J.V,57 (1st pl. pāpuṇeyyāma for T. pappomu); DhA.IV,200. aor. apāpuṇi ThA.64, and pāpuṇi J.II,229. pret. apattha J.V,391 (proh. mā a.). fut. pāpuṇissati J.I,260. ger. pāpuṇitvā S.II,28; patvā Sn.347, 575, and pappuyya S.I,7 (cp. Vin.II,56; A.I,138), 181, 212. inf. pappotuṁ SI. 129=Th.2, 60, and pāpuṇituṁ VbhA.223. -- grd. pattabba S.I,129; II,28; SnA 433. -- pp. patta; Caus. pāpeti2 (q. v.). (Page 453)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāra: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. para] 1. as adv. (°-) beyond, over, across, used as prep. with Abl., e. g. pāra-Gaṅgāya beyond the G. S.I,207, 214; SnA 228. See under cpds. -- 2. as nt. the other side, the opposite shore S.I,169, 183; Sn.1059; Nd¹ 20 (=amataṁ nibbānaṁ); Dh.385; DhA.IV,141 aparā pāraṁ gacchati to go from this side to the other (used with ref. to this world & the world beyond) S.IV,174; A.V,4; Sn.1130; pāraṁ gavesino M.II,64=Th.1, 771--3. Cases adverbially: Acc. pāraṁ see sep.; Abl. pārato from the other side Vin.II,209. -- 3. the guṇa form of para, another: see cpds.:

--atthika (pār’) wishing to cross beyond D.I,244. --ga “going beyond,” traversing, crossing, surmounting S.IV,71 (jātimaraṇassa); Sn.32, 997. --gata one who has reached the opposite shore S.I,34; II,277; IV,157; A.IV,411; Sn.21, 210, 359; Dh.414; Vv 53¹ (cp. VvA.231); one who has gone over to another party Th.1, 209. --gavesin looking for the other shore Dh.355; DhA.IV,80. --gāmin=gata S.I,123; A.V,232 sq., 253 sq.; DhA.II,160. --gū (a) gone beyond, i. e. passed, transcended, crossed S.I,195=Nd² 136^A (dukkhassa), IV.210 (bhavassa); A.II,9 (id.); III,223; It.33 (jarāya); Dh.348. (b) gone to the end of (Gen. or. --°), reached perfection in, well-versed in, familiar with, an authority on Sn.992 (sabbadhammānaṁ), 1105 (cp. Nd² 435); D.I,88 (tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ); DhA.III,361 (id.). --dārika an adulterer, lit. one of another’s wife S.II,259; J.III,43 (so read for para°); DhA.II,10. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】彼岸，另一边。 ~gata,【形】达到终点的人，达到彼岸者。 ~gavesī,【形】找寻终点，寻觅彼岸。 ~gāmī, 【阳】到彼岸去。 ~gū, ~ṅgata,~ppatta, 【形】已超越，经过，越过。 ~lokika, 【形】与另一个世界连接，未来的再生。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】彼岸，另一边。pāragata,【形】达到终点的人，达到彼岸者。pāragavesī,【形】找寻终点，寻觅彼岸。pāragāmī,【阳】到彼岸去。pāragū, pāraṅgata, pārappatta,【形】已超越，经过，越过。pāralokika,【形】与另一个世界连接，未来的再生。lakkhaṇamantapāragū, 精通相术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pārada: {'def': '【阳】水银，汞。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】水银，汞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāradārika: {'def': '【阳】奸夫，通奸者。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】奸夫，通奸者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pārami: {'def': '波罗密;完美的;至高成就的', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Pāramitā: {'def': 'pāramī, 【阴】完成，完美。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [pāramī+tā]=pāramī Nett 87. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pāramī(‹parama),【阴】完成，完美，波罗蜜(completeness, perfection, highest state)。有十种波罗蜜：1布施(dāna)、2持戒(sīla)、3出离(nekkhamma出离欲望)、4智慧(paññā闻.思.修)、5精进(vīriya)、6忍辱(khanti)、7真实(sacca不妄语)、8决意(adhiṭṭhāna不动摇己意、信守诺言)、9慈(mettā增益众生安乐)、10舍(upekkhā旁观、平等心)。「天竺俗法，凡造事成办，皆言到彼岸。」(T25.145.2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pārampariya: {'def': '【中】传统。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】传统。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāramī: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. parama, cp. BSk. mantrāṇāṁ pāramiṁ gata Divy 637] completeness, perfection, highest state Sn.1018, 1020; Pug.70; DhA.I,5; VvA.2 (sāvakañāṇa°); PvA.139; Sdhp.328. In later literature there is mentioned a group of 10 perfections (dasa pāramiyo) as the perfect exercise of the 10 principal virtues by a Bodhisatta, viz. dāna°, sīla°, nekkhamma°, paññā°, viriya°, khanti°, sacca°, adhiṭṭhāna°, mettā°, upekhā° J.I,73; DhA.I,84.

--ppatta (pārami°) having attained perfection M.III,28; Nd² 435; Miln.21 22; cp. Miln.trsl. I.34. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(and pāramitā) Only the Com. deals with this subject, apart from the 3 apocryphal works, Buddhavaṃsa and Cariyapiṭaka, and the Jātaka.', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Pāraŋ: {'def': '【副】超过，横过，越过。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāraṁ: {'def': '【副】超过，横过，越过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.-prep.) [Acc. of pāra] beyond, to the other side D.I,244; M.I,135; Sn.1146 (Maccu-dheyya°, vv. ll. °dheyassa & °dheyya°), expl^d by Nd² 487 as amataṁ nibbānaṁ; VvA.42.

--gata (cp. pāragata) gone to the other side, gone beyond, traversed, transcended M.I,135; S.II,277; Sn.803; Nd¹ 114; Nd² 435; Pug.72; Vism.234. --gamana crossing over, going beyond S.V,24, 81; A.V,4, 313; Sn.1130. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāreti: {'def': '[denom. fr. pāra; cp. Lat. portare] to make go through, to bore through, pierce, break (?) J.III,185 (reading uncertain). (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārevata: {'def': '[the Prk. form (cp. Māgadhi pārevaya) of the Sk. pārāpata, which appears also as such in P.] 1. a dove, pigeon A.I,162 (dove-coloured); Vv 363 (°akkhi= pārāpat’akkhi VvA.167); J.VI,456. -- 2. a species of tree, Diospyros embryopteris J.VI,529, 539. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鸽子。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】鸽子，鸽色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāribhaṭya: {'def': '(nt.) (& der.) [fr. pari+bhṛ] “petting (or spoiling) the children” (Miln.trsl. II.287) but perhaps more likely “fondness of being petted” or “nurture” (as Vism.trsl. 32) (being carried about like on the lap or the back of a nurse, as explⁿ at Vism.28=VbhA.483). The readings are different, thus we find °bhaṭyatā at Vbh.240; VbhA.338, 483; °bhatyatā at Vism.17, 23, 27 (vv. ll. °bhaṭṭatā & °bbhaṭṭatā); °bhaṭṭakatā at Miln.370; °bhaṭṭatā at Vbh.352; KhA 236; Nd2 39. The more det. expln at VbhA.338 is “alaṅkāra-karaṇ’ādīhi dāraka-kīḷāpanaṁ etaṁ adhivacanaṁ.” -- See stock phrase under mugga-sūpyatā. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāribhogik: {'def': 'a (adj.) [fr. paribhoga] belonging to use or enjoyment, with ref. to relics of personal use J.IV,228 (one of the 3 cetiyas, viz. sarīrika, pāribhogika, uddesika); Miln.341 (id.). (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāribhogika: {'def': '(fr. paribhoga),【形】属於使用的、享用的(belonging to use or enjoyment)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】适合使用的，用的。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāricariyā: {'def': '(‹paricarati),【阴】服侍，服务，等候(going about, service, ministration, worship)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】服务，等候。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) same as paricariya serving, waiting on, service, ministration, honour (for=Loc.) D.III,189, 250, 281; M.II,177; S.IV,239; A.II,70; III,284, 325, 328; J.III,408; IV,490; V,154, 158 (kilesa°); PvA.7, 58, 128. Cp. BSk. pāricāryā MVastu II.225. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāricchatta: {'def': '=pāricchattaka, Sn.64 (°ka Nd² 439; expl^d as koviḷāra); J.V,393. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāricchattaka: {'def': '【阳】刺桐（亚洲热带地区和澳大利亚北部的一种有刺小乔木 (Erythrinaindica)）。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=pārijāta),【阳】刺桐(亚洲热带地区和澳大利亚北部的一种有刺小乔木 (the coral tree；Erythrina indica))。又作：昼度树，波利质多罗，香遍树，为生於忉利天之树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Epic Sk. pārijāta, but P. fr. pari+chatta +ka, in pop. etym. “shading all round”] the coral tree Erythmia Indica, a tree in Indra’s heaven Vin.I,30; A.IV,117 sq.; Vv 38¹ (expl^d as Māgadhism at VvA.174 for pārijāta, which is also the BSk. form); J.I,40; II,20; KhA.I,122; SnA 485; DhA.I,273; III,211; DhsA.1; VvA.12, 110; PvA.137. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārihāriya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. parihāra] connected with preservation or attention, fostering, keeping Vism.3 (°paññā), 98 (°kammaṭṭhāna); SnA 54 (id.). (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārijuñña: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. parijuṇṇa, pp. of pari+jur] 1. decay, loss M.II,66; DhA.I,238; VvA.101 (bhoga°). -- 2. loss of property, poverty PvA.3. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(abstr. fr. parijuṇṇa, pp. of pari+jur),【中】1.衰落，损失(decay, loss (bhogapārijuñña)。2.失财(loss of property, poverty)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pārijāta: {'def': '=pāricchattaka, VvA.174. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārikkhattiya: {'def': '=parikkhattatā, Pug.19=VbhA.358. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārima: {'def': '【形】那边的，更远的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [superl. form. fr. pāra] yonder, farther, only comb^d with °tīra the farther shore D.I,244; M.I,134, 135; S.IV,174; Miln.269; DhA.II,100. Cp. BSk. pārimaṁ tīraṁ AvŚ I.148. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】那边的，更远的。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāripanthika: {'def': '【形】胁迫的，危险的，拦路强盗。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. paripantha] 1. highwayman, robber S.II,188; J.V,253. -- 2. connected with danger, threatening, dangerous to (-°) Vism.152; PugA 181 (samādhi°, vipassanā°). (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹paripantha),【形】1.拦路强盗，强盗(highwayman, robber)。2.危险的，胁迫的(connected with danger, threatening)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāripūri: {'def': '【阴】实践，完成。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāripūrī: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. pari+pūr, cp. BSk. pāripūri AvŚ II.107] fulfilment, completion, consummation S.I,139; A.V,114 sq.; Sn.1016; J.VI,298; Nd² 137 (pada°); SnA 28 (id.); Pug.53; Dhs.1367; DhA.I,36; PvA.132, 133; VbhA.468 (°mada conceit of perfection). (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(abstr. fr. pari+pūr充满, cp. BSk. pāripūri),【阴】充满，实践，完成(fulfilment, completion, consummation)。。【单.具﹑离﹑与﹑属﹑处】paripūriyā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pārisajja: {'def': '【形】属于集会的，会议的成员。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】集会的，会议的成员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pārisuddhi: {'def': '【阴】纯净。 ~sīla, 【中】生计的纯净。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】纯净。pārisuddhisīla,【中】生计的纯净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. parisuddha] purity Vin.I,102, 136 (cp. Vin. Texts I,242, 280); M.III,4; A.II,194 sq. (°padhāniy’aṅgāni, the four, viz. sīlapārisuddhi, citta°, diṭṭhi°, vimutti°); Nd1 475; Ps.I,42 (°sīla); Dhs.165; Miln.336 (ājīva°, and in 4th jhāna); Vism.30 (=parisuddhatā), 46 (°sīla), 278; DhA.III,399 (catu° -sīla); IV,111 (ājīva°); Sdhp.342. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārivattaka: {'def': '(adj.)=pari°; changing, turning round (of cīvara) Vin.IV,59, 60. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārivaṭṭaka: {'def': '【形】交换，物物交换。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】交换，物物交换。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pārivāsika: {'def': '=pari° (a probationer), Vin.I,136; II,31 sq, where distinguished from a pakatatta bhikkhu, a regular, ordained bh. to whom a pārivāsika is inferior in rank. Pārisajja [fr. parisā] belonging to an assembly, pl. the members of an assembly, esp. those who sit in council, councillors (cp. BSk. pāriṣadya councillor Divy 291) Vin.I,348; D.I,136; III,64, 65; M.I,326; S.I,145, 222; A.I,142; Miln.234; DA.I,297. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāroha: {'def': '[fr. pra+ruh, cp. Sk. *prāroha] 1. a small (side) branch, new twig (of a Nigrodha tree) J.V,8, 38, 472; VI,199; SnA 304; PvA.113. -- 2. a shoot, sprout (from the root of a tree, tillering) S.I,69 (see C. expln at K.S. 320); J.VI,15; DhA.II,70; VbhA.475; 476. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】树的叉子，从树枝悬垂的根（像孟加拉榕树的）。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】树的叉子，从树枝悬垂的根(像孟加拉榕树的)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pārupana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pārupati] covering, clothing; dress J.I,126, 378; III,82; Miln.279; DhA.I,70, 164; PvA.74, 76. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārupati: {'def': '(pa+ā+rup+a), 裹住，戴面纱，穿上。【过】pārupi。【独】pārupitvā。【现分】pārupanta。pārupana,【中】宽大外衣，袈裟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + ā + rup + a), 裹在，戴面纱，穿上袈裟。【过】 pārupi。【独】~pitvā。【现分】 ~panta。pārupana, 【中】宽大外衣，袈裟。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[metathesis fr. pāpurati=Sk. prāvṛṇoti, pra+ vṛ; see also pāpurati etc.] to cover, dress, hide, veil D.I,246; Vin.IV,283; M.III,94; S.II,281; J.II,24, 109; Pv.II,112 (=nivāseti PvA.147); Mhvs 22, 67; Vism.18; DhA.III,325; VvA.44, 127; PvA.73, 74, 77. -- pp. pāruta (q. v.). (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāruta: {'def': '(Pārupati的【过分】) 裹住，戴面纱，穿上。duppāruta, 穿薄衣的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pārupati] covered, dressed S.I,167, 175; Th.1, 153; J.I,59, 347; SnA 401; PvA.48, 161. --duppāruta not properly dressed (without the upper robe) Vin.I,44; II,212; S.II,231, 271. See also abhipāruta. Note. The form apāruta is apparently only a neg. pāruta, in reality it is apa+ā+vṛta. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pārājika: {'def': '【形】波罗夷(比丘犯的四大重罪：行淫、杀人、偷窃五钱以上、大妄语)。pārājika可能由para-√aj或para-√ji而来；√aj有「驱摈」﹑「赶出」的意思，√ji有「打败」﹑「征服」的意思，所以pārājika可以译为「驱摈」或「他胜」。比丘、比丘尼犯了这一重罪后，会遭到「驱摈」，并取消比丘资格。Pārā.III,28.(CS:Pārā.pg.34)：Pārājiko hotīti seyyathāpi nāma puriso sīsacchinno abhabbo tena sarīrabandhanena jīvituṁ.(驱摈(波罗夷)︰如同人断了头，虽然有身体不可能活命。) Pārā.III,47.(CS:Pārā.pg.58)：Pārājiko hotīti seyyathāpi nāma paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto abhabbo haritatthāya(驱摈︰如同树上掉来的枯叶不可能再绿。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[etym. doubtful; suggested are parā+aj (Burnouf); para+ji; pārācika (S. Lévi, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 38, n. 3; also Childers s. v.)] one who has committed a grave transgression of the rules for bhikkhus; one who merits expulsion (see on term Vin. Texts I.3; Miln.trslⁿ I.268; II,78) Vin.I,172; II,101, 242; A.II,241; III,252; V,70; J.VI,70, 112; Miln.255; Vism.22; KhA 97, DhA.I,76 (as one of the divisions of the Suttavibhaṅga, see also Vin.III,1 sq.). (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】波罗夷（犯四大重罪的比丘）。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pārāpata: {'def': 'pārāvata, 【阳】鸽子。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Epic Sk. pārāvata] a dove, pigeon J.I,242; V,215; VvA.167 (°akkhi); Pgdp 45. See the doublet pārevata. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pārāvata,【阳】鸽子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pārāyana: {'def': 'n. [BSk. Pārāyaṇa] 波羅延, 彼岸道 [経集の第五品].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【中】最终的目标，主要的对象。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [late Sk. pārāyaṇa, the metric form of parāyana] the highest (farthest) point, final aim, chief object, ideal; title of the last Vagga of the Sutta Nipāta A.III,401; Sn.1130; Nd² 438; SnA 163, 370, 604. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】最终的目标，主要的对象。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāsa: {'def': '1 (Vedic pāwa),【阳】pāsaka,【中】陷阱(snare)，弹弓(a sling)，钮扣洞，诱惑，结(tie, fetter)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic pāśa] a sling, snare, tie, fetter S.I,105, 111; A.II,182; IV,197; Vin.IV,153 (? hattha°); Sn.166; It.36 (Māra°); J.III,184; IV,414; PvA.206. On its frequent use in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 111. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 Pāsaka, 【中】弹弓，陷阱，钮扣洞。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ (a stone?) at PvA.63 (pās’antare) is probably a misreading and to be corrected to palāsa (palās’antare, similarly to rukkh’antare, kaṭṭh’-- and mūl’antare), foliage. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [Class. Sk. prāsa fr. pra+as] a spear, a throw Sn.303; A.IV,171 (kuṭhāri° throw of an axe). --asi° a class of deities Miln.191. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsada: {'def': '【阳】大厦，宫殿，城堡。 ~tala, 【中】（大厦的）上层，楼上。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāsaka: {'def': '¹ [fr. pāsa1] a bow, for the dress Vin.II,136; for the hair Th.2, 411 (if Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 45, 46, is right to be corr. fr. pasāda). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】骰子，投。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [fr. pāsa2] a throw, a die J.VI,281. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】骰子，投。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ lintel Vin.II,120=148 (see Vin. Texts III,144). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsati: {'def': '(?) only in “sammaṁ pāsanti” at SnA 321 as expln of sammāpāsa (q. v.). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsaṁsa: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. fr. pasaṁsati with pā for pa as in similar formations (see pāmokkha)] to be praised; praiseworthy M.I,15, 404; II,227 (dasa °ṭṭhānāni); A.V,129 (id.); J.III,493; Pv IV.713; Nett 52. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsaṇḍa: {'def': '[cp. late Sk. pāṣaṇḍa] heresy, sect S.I,133, A.II,466; Th.2, 183 Miln.359; ThA.164. --°ika heretic, sectarian Vin.IV,74. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】异端。 ~ka, ~ḍika, 【阳】异教徒，宗派。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp.梵pārsada),【中】异端。pāsaṇḍaka, pāsaṇḍika,【阳】异教徒，宗派。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāssati: {'def': 'fat. of pibati (for pivissati). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsuka: {'def': '[for the usual phāsuka] a rib Vin.II,266. (loop? Rh.D.). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsuḷa: {'def': '[for phāsuka] a rib Vin.III,105. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsāda: {'def': '(pa+ā+sad, cp. Class. Sk. prāsāda),【阳】大厦，宫殿，城堡(a lofty platform, a building on high foundations, a terrace, palace)。pāsadatala,【中】(大厦的)上层，楼上。Migāramātupāsāda, 【阳】鹿母讲堂。satta-bhūmakapāsāda, 【阳】七层塔(a tower with 7 platforms)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+ā+sad, cp. Class. Sk. prāsāda] a lofty platform, a building on high foundations, a terrace, palace Vin.I,58, 96, 107, 239; II,128, 146, 236 (cp. Vin. Texts I.174; III,178); D.II,21; S.I,137; A.I,64; Sn.409; It.33; Pv.II,125; J.II,447; IV,153 (pillars); V,217; Vism.339 (°tala); DhsA.107; SnA 502; ThA.253, 286; VvA.197; PvA.23, 75, 279 (cp. upari°); Sdhp.299. --satta-bhū- maka° a tower with 7 platforms J.I,227, 346; IV,323, 378; V,426, 577. The Buddha’s 3 castles at D.II,21; A.I,145; J.VI,289. See also J.P.T.S. 1907, 112 (p. in similes). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsādika: {'def': '【形】令人喜爱的，可爱的，亲切的。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. pasāda),【形】1.令人喜爱的，可爱的，亲切的，端正的(pleasing, pleasant, lovely, amiable)。2.舒适的(comfortable)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pasāda] 1. pleasing, pleasant, lovely, amiable Vin.IV,18; D.III,141; S.I,95; II,279; A.II,104 sq., 203; III,255 sq.; DhA.I,119; ThA.266, 281; DA.I,141, 281; VvA.6; PvA.46, 186, 187, 261. --samanta° lovely throughout A.I,24; V,11. -- 2. comfortable Vism.105. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāsāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pasavati] bringing forth S.V,170; J.I,394. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. pasavati) ,【形】产生(bringing forth S.V,170; J.I,394.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāsāṇa: {'def': '【阳】石头，岩石，岩。pāsāṇaguḷa。【阳】石球。pāsāṇacetiya,【中】石塔 (以石头制成的圣地)。pāsāṇapitthi,【阴】岩石的表面。pāsāṇaphalaka,【阳】石板。pāsāṇalekhā,【阴】石碑文。pāsāṇacchatta, 石伞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Epic Sk. pāṣāṇa] a rock, stone A.I,283; Sn.447; J.I,109, 199; V,295; Vism.28, 182, 183; VbhA.64 (its size as cpd with pabbata); DhA.III,151; DhsA.389; VvA.157; Sdhp.328. --guḷa a ball of (soft) stone, used for washing (pumice stone?) A.II,200 (sāla-laṭṭhiṁ . . . taccheyya . . . likheyya . . . pāsāṇaguḷena dhopeyya . . . nadiṁ patāreyya), cp. M.I,233; and Vism.28 “bhājane ṭhapitaṁ guḷapiṇḍaṁ viya pāsāṇaṁ.” --cetiya a stone Caitya DhA.III,253. --tala a natural plateau J.I,207. --piṭṭhe at the back of a rock Vism.116. --pokkharaṇī a natural tank Vism.119. --phalaka a slab of stone J.IV,328. --macchaka a kind of fish (stone-fish) J.IV,70; VI,450. --lekha writing on a stone Pug.32. --sakkharā a little stone, fragment of rock S.II,137; A.IV,237. --sevāla stone Vallisneria J.V,462. --vassa rain of stones SnA 224. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】石头，岩石。 ~guḷa。【阳】石球。 ~cetiya, 【中】石塔（以石头制成的圣地）。 ~pitthi, 【阴】岩石的表面。 ~phalaka, 【阳】石板。 ~lekhā, 【阴】石碑文。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāsāṇaka: {'def': '=pāsāṇa Vin.II,211. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāta: {'def': '【阳】落下，投。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) [fr. pat] 1. fall DA.I,95 (ukkā°); PvA.45 (asani°). The reading “anatthato pātato rakkhito” at PvA.61 is faulty we should prefer to read apagato (apāyato?) rakkhito. -- 2. throwing, a throw Sn.987 (muddha°); PvA.57 (akkhi°). See also piṇḍa. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pat),【阳】1.落下(fall)。2.投(throwing, a throw)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātabba: {'def': '(pivati 的【义】), 可以喝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pivati 的【潜】), 可以喝。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pātana: {'def': '【中】使倒下，丢下，杀害。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pāteti] bringing to fall, destroying, killing, only in gabbha° destroying the fœtus, abortion (q. v.) DhA.I,47 and passim. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】使倒下，丢下，杀害。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātar: {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic prātar, der. fr. *prō, *prā, cp. Lat. prandium (fr. prām-ediom=pātar-āsa); Gr. prwi/ early; Ohg. fruo=Ger. früh] early in the morning, in foll. forms: (1) pātar (before vowels), only in cpd. °āsa morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. prātar-aśana Divy 631] D.III,94; Sn.387; J.I,232; VvA.294, 308; SnA 374 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍa-pātass’etaṁ nāmaṁ). -- katapātarāsa (adj.) after breakfast J.I,227; VI,349 (°bhetta); Vism.391. -- (2) pāto (abs.) D.III,94; DhA.II,60; PvA.54, 126, 128; pāto va right early J.I,226; VI,180. -- (3) pātaṁ S.I,183; II,242; Th.2, 407. ‹-› Note. Should piṇḍa-pāta belong here, as suggested by Bdhgh at SnA 374 (see above)? See detail under piṇḍa. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pātarāsa: {'def': '【阳】早餐。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】早餐。bhuttapātarāsa,【阳】吃早餐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātavyatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pāt, see pāteti] downfall, bringing to fall, felling M.I,305; A.I,266; Vin.IV,34 (°by°); VbhA.499. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=pātabyatā﹐patabyatā ) (‹pāt, see pāteti)【阴】落下、灭亡(downfall, bringing to fall, felling)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāteti: {'def': '(pat + e), 跌落，丢开，杀害。【过】 pātesi。【过分】 pātita。【独】pātetvā。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pat+e), 跌落，丢开，杀害。【过】pātesi。【过分】pātita。【独】pātetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pat] 1. to make fall, drop, throw off S.I,197 (sakuṇo rajaṁ); J.I,93 (udakaṁ); Miln.305 (sāraṁ). -- 2. to bring to fall J.V,198; Miln.187. -- 3. to kill, destroy, cut off (the head) J.I,393; III,177; PvA.31, 115. -- pp. pātita. Caus. II. pātāpeti (q. v.). -- Cp. abhi°. Note. In meaning 3 it would be better to assume confusion with pāṭeti (for phāṭeti=Sk. sphāṭayati to split [sphuṭ=(s)phal], see phāleti & phāṭeti In the same sense we find the phrase kaṭṭhaṁ pāteti to split firewood M.I,21 (MA ereti), besides phāleti. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pātheyya: {'def': '(nt.) [grd. form. fr. patha] “what is necessary for the road,” provisions for a journey, viaticum Vin.I,244; S.I,44; Dh.235, 237; J.V,46, 241; DA.I,288; DhA.I,180; III,335; PvA.5, 154. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】旅程的预备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】旅程的预备。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pātheyyaka: {'def': '(nt.)=patheyya PvA.126. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāti: {'def': '【阴】碗，盘子。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic pāti of pā, cp. Gr. pώu herd, poimήn shepherd, Lat. pāsco to tend sheep] to watch, keep watch, keep J.III,95 (to keep the eyes open, C. ummisati; opp. nimisati); Vism.16 (=rakkhati in def. of pāṭimokkha). (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】碗，盘子，钵。同义词有：patta﹐vitta﹐sarāva﹐dhāropa﹐poṇa﹐pisīlava。(见M.139./III,235.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa+a), 看，保护。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + a), 看，保护。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pātika: {'def': '【中】碟子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '=pātī, read at Vism.28 for patika. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】碟子。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pātimokkha: {'def': '波罗提木叉;戒条;戒本;别解脱', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': "'Disciplinary Code', is the name of the code of monk's rules, which on all full-moon and new moon days is recited before the assembled community of fully ordained monks (bhikkhu).

See The Pātimokkha, Romanized Pāḷi text and transl. by Ñāṇamoli Thera (Bangkok 1966, Mahāmakut Buddhist Bookshop).", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '(pāti)° (nt.) [with Childers plausibly as paṭi+ mokkha, grd. of muc (Caus. mokṣ°) with lengthening of paṭi as in other grd. like pāṭidesaniya. Thus in reality the same as paṭimokkha 2 in sense of binding, obligatory, obligation, cp. J.V,25. The spelling is freq. pāti° (BB pāṭi°). The Sk. prāṭimokṣa is a wrong adaptation fr. P. pātimokkha, it should really be pratimokṣya “that which should be made binding.” An explⁿ of the word after the style of a popular etym. is to be found at Vism.16] a name given to a collection of various precepts contained in the Vinaya (forming the foundation of the Suttavibhaṅga, Vin vols. III & IV., ed. Oldenberg), as they were recited on Uposatha days for the purpose of confession. See Geiger, P. Lit. c. 7, where literature is given; & cp. Vin. Texts I.27 sq.; Franke, Dighanikāya p. 66 sq.; --pāṭimokkhaṁ uddisati to recite the P. Vin.I,102, 112, 175; II,259; III,8; IV,143; Ud.51; opp. °ṁ ṭhapeti to suspend the (recital of the) P. Vin.II,240 sq. -- See Vin.I,65, 68; II,95, 240 sq. 249; S.V,187; Sn.340; Dh.185, 375; Nd¹ 365; Vism.7, 11, 16 sq., 36, 292; DhA.III,237 (=jeṭṭhakasīla); IV,111 (id.); Sdhp.342, 355, 449. --uddesa recitation of the P. Vin.I,102; D.II,46; M.II,8; SnA 199. --uddesaka one who recites the P. Vin.I,115, cp. Vin. Texts I.242. --ṭhapana suspension of the P. Vin.II,241 sq.; A.V,70. --saṁvara “restraint that is binding on a recluse” (Dial. I.79), moral control under the P. Vin.IV,51; D.I,62; II,279; III,77, 266, 285; A.III,113, 135, 151; IV,140; V,71, 198; It.96, 118; Ud.36; Vism.16 (where expl^d in detail); VbhA.323; cp. saṁvuta-pāṭimokkha (adj.) Pv IV.1³². (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】波提木叉（《戒律》中的一集）。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see pāṭi°. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pātimokkha-saṃvara-sīla: {'def': "'morality consisting in restraint with regard to the Disciplinary Code' (Pātimokkha, s. prec.). For details, s. sīla.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Pātin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. pāta] throwing, shooting, only in cpd. dūre° throwing far A.I,284; II,170. See akkhaṇa-vedhin. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pātita: {'def': '[pp. of pāteti] brought to fall, felled, destroyed Sn.631; Dh.407; J.III,176; PvA.31 (so read for patita). (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pāteti 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pāteti 的【过分】)。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāto: {'def': '(pātaṁ),【无】在早晨。pātova,【无】破晓。sāya-pātaṁ, sāyaṁ-pātaṁ, sāyañ ca pāto ca, 朝暮(晚上和早晨)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】在早晨。 ~va, 【无】破晓。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pātu: {'def': '【无】在前面，看得见的，显然的。 ~kamma, ~karana, 【中】显示，令人看得见。 ~bhāva, 【阳】外表，到来显示。 ~bhūta, 【过分】已出现。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】在前面，看得见的，显然的。pātukamma, pātukarana,【中】显示，令人看得见。pātubhāva,【阳】外表，到来显示。pātubhūta,【过分】已出现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātu-: {'def': '﹐【字首】出现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātubhavati: {'def': '(pātu + bhū + a), 变成显然，出现。【过】 ~bhavi。【过分】~bhūta。【独】 ~bhavitvā。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pātu+bhū+a), 变成显然，出现。【过】pātubhavi。【过分】pātubhūta。【独】pātubhavitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātukamyatā: {'def': 'is frequent v. l. for cāṭu-kamyatā, which is probably the correct reading (see this). The meaning (according to Vism.27=VbhA.483) is “putting oneself low,” i. e. flattery, “fawning” (Vism.trsl. 32). A still more explicit defⁿ is found at VbhA.338. The diff. spellings are as follows: cāṭukamyatā Vism.17, 27; KhA 236; VbhA.338, 483; cāṭukammatā Miln.370; pāṭukamyatā Vbh.246; pātukamyatā Nd² 39. See standing phrase under mugga-sūpyatā. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】需要喝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】需要喝。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pātukaroti: {'def': '(pātu + kar + o), 显示。【过】 ~kari。【过分】 ~kata。【独】~karitvā, ~katvā。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pātu+kar行+o), 显示。【过】pātukari。【过分】pātukata。【独】pātukaritvā, pātukatvā。SA.42.1./III,102.︰Pātukarotīti bhaṇḍantaṁ paṭibhaṇḍanto akkosantaṁ paccakkosanto paharantaṁ paṭipaharanto pākaṭaṁ karotīti dasseti.(显示(怒相)︰展现出显著的吵架，争论，臭骂，骂，打，回击。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātukāma: {'def': '【形】想饮料的。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】想饮料的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātur: {'def': '(-°) (°pātu) (indecl.) [cp. Vedic prāduḥ in prādur+ bhu; on t for d see Geiger, P.Gr. § 39⁴. As regards etym. Monier Williams suggests prā=pra+dur, door, thus “before the door, openly”; cp. dvāra] visible, open, manifest; only in compⁿ with kṛ and bhū, and with the rule that pātu° appears before cons., whereas pātur° stands before vowels. (1) with kṛ (to make appear): pres. pātukaroti Sn.316; J.IV,7; Pug.30; SnA 423; aor. pātvākāsi S.II,254; DhA.II,64; pp. pātukata Vv 84⁴¹. -- (2) with bhū (to become manifest, to appear): pres. pātubhavati D.I,220; D.II,12, 15, 20, 226; M.I,445; S IV 78; Pv.II,9⁴¹ (pot. °bhaveyyuṁ); aor. pāturahosi [cp. BSk. prādurabhūt Jtm. 211] Vin.I,5; D.I,215; II,20; S.I,137; Pv.II,8⁶; Miln.10, 18; VvA.188; pl. pāturahaṁsu J.I,11, & °ahiṁsu J.I,54. ‹-› pp. pātubhūta S.III,39; Dhs.1035; PvA.44.

--kamma making visible, manifestation S.II,254; DhA.IV,198. --bhāva appearance, coming into manifestation M.I,50; S.II,3; IV,78; A.I,266; II,130; Sn.560, 998; J.I,63; Nd² s. v.; Vism.437. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāturahosi: {'def': '(pātubbavati 的【过】)。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=pātur + ahosi, pātubbavati 的【过】) , 已变成显然，已出现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātuŋ: {'def': '【不】要喝。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pātuṁ: {'def': '【不】要喝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pātāla: {'def': '【阳】深渊，倾向，地球的另一边。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. pātāla an underground cave] proclivity, cliff, abyss S.I,32, 127, 197; IV,206; Th.1, 1104 (see Brethren 418 for fuller explⁿ); J.III,530 (here expl^d as a cliff in the ocean). (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】深渊，倾向，地球的另一边。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pātāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. II. of pāteti] to cause to fall, to cause an abortus Vin.II,108; DA.I,134. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pātī: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 丢者，射击者。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 丢者，射击者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Pāti (f.) [the femin. of patta, which is Vedic pātra (nt.); to this the f. Ved. pātrī] a bowl, vessel, dish Vin.I,157 (avakkāra°), 352 (id.); II,216 (id.); M.I,25 (kaṁsa°), 207; S.II,233; A.IV,393 (suvaṇṇa°, rūpiya°, kaṁsa°); J.I,347, 501; II,90; V,377 (suvaṇṇa°) VI,510 (kañcana°); VvA.65; PvA.274. (Page 452)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāvacana: {'def': '【中】圣经。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pa+vacana, with lengthening of first a (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331)] a word, esp. the word of the Buddha D I,88; S.II,259; Th.1, 587; 2, 457. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】圣经。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāvadati: {'def': '[=pavadati] to speak out, to tell, show J.II,439; Pv IV.1⁴⁸; PvA.118. (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāvaka: {'def': '【阳】火。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】火。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pu, Vedic pāvaka] 1. (adj.) pure, bright, clear, shining J.V,419. -- 2. (m.) the fire S.I,69; A.IV,97; Dh.71, 140; J.IV,26; V,63 (=kaṇha-vattanin) VI,236 (=aggi C.); Pv.I,85; Vism.170 (=aggi). (Page 455)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāvassi: {'def': '(pavassati 的【过】)。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see pavassati. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pavassati 的【过】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāvaḷa: {'def': '【阳】臀部。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】臀部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāvisa: {'def': '& Pāvekkhi see pavisati. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāvuraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+ā+vṛ; see pāpuraṇa & pārupana] cloak, mantle M.I,359; Vin.IV,255, 289; ThA.22. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāvusa: {'def': '[pa+vṛṣ, cp. Vedic prāvṛṣa & pravarṣa] 1. rain, the rainy season (its first 2 months) Th.1, 597; J.V,202, 206. -- 2. a sort of fish J.IV,70 (gloss pāgusa, q. v.). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】雨季，一种鱼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】雨季，一种鱼。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāvussaka: {'def': '【形】雨季的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】属于雨季的。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pāvusa] raining, shedding rain M. I.306; S.V,51; A.IV,127; J.I,95, 96; Miln.114. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāvāra: {'def': '[fr. pa+vṛ] 1. a cloak, mantle Vin.I,281; J.V,409 (expld as pavara-dibba-vattha!).- 2. the mango tree KhA 58 (°puppha; Vism.258 at id. p. has pāvāraka°). (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】斗蓬(cloak披风)，覆盖物。pāvārika,【形】斗蓬商人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】斗蓬，覆盖物。 ~rika, 【形】斗蓬商人。(p225)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāvārika: {'def': '[fr. pāvāra] a cloak-seller (?) Vin.IV,250. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāvāḷa: {'def': '[see pavāḷa] hair; only in cpd. °nipphoṭanā pulling out one’s hair S.IV,300. (Page 456)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāya: {'def': '[fr. pa+ā+yā] setting out, starting S.II,218 (nava° newly setting out); Instr. pāyena (adv.) for the most part, commonly, usually J.V,490; DA.I,275 (so read for pāṭhena). (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pa+ā+yā),【形】(在【合】中)开始(setting out, starting)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 充满的。 pāyena, 【副】几乎完全地，一般地，主要地，大部分，通常。(p223)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāyaka: {'def': '(‹pā to drink),【形】令人吮吸者，使喝者(drinking)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】令人吮吸者，使喝者。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) [fr. pā to drink] drinking J.I,252 (vāruṇi°) (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāyena: {'def': '(‹pāya),【副】几乎完全地，一般地，主要地，大部分，通常(for the most part, commonly, usually)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāyeti: {'def': '(pa + e), 令人吮吸，令人喝。【过】 pāyesi。【过分】 pāyita。【现分】 pāyenta, pāyamāna。【独】 pāyetvā。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. fr. pā, see pibati] 1. to give to drink, to make drink D.II,19; Sn.398 (Pot. pāyaye); Miln.43, 229; DhA.I,87 (amataṁ); VvA.75 (yāguṁ); PvA.63; aor. apāyesi S.I,143; ger. pāyetvā J.I,202 (dibba-pānaṁ); II,115 (lohitaṁ); III,372 (phāṇīt’odakaṁ); IV,30 (pānakaṁ); VI,392 (suraṁ). -- 2. to irrigate J.I,215. -- ppr. f. pāyamānā a woman giving suck, a nursing woman D.I,166; M.I,77; A.I,295; II,206; III,227; Pug.55; DhA.I,49. -- Caus. II. pāyāpeti J.V,422. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pā(梵pā)喝+e, see pibati), 1.给喝的，做饮料(to give to drink, to make drink)。2.灌溉(to irrigate)。【过】pāyesi, apāyesi。【过分】pāyita。【现分】pāyenta, pāyamāna。【独】pāyetvā。Caus. II. pāyāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāyin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pā, see pivati] drinking J.III,338. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pā, see pivati), 【形】【中】喝(drinking)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāyāsa: {'def': '(cp. Class. Sk. pāyāsa), 牛奶粥(rice boiled in milk, milk-rice, rice porridge)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. pāyāsa] rice boiled in milk, milk-rice, rice porridge S.I,166; Sn.p. 15; J.I,50, 68; IV,391; V,211; Vism.41; SnA 151; DhA.I,171; II,88; VvA.32. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāyāta: {'def': '[pp of pāyāti] gone forth, set out, started J.I,146. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāyāti: {'def': '(pa(pra)+ā+yā去+a), 出发，开始，往前去(to set out, start, go forth)。【过】pāyāsi。pāyī,【形】喝的人。【过分】pāyāta。3rd pl. pāyesuṁ and pāyiṁsu. pp. pāyāta', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pra+ā+yā] to set out, start, go forth DhA.II,42; aor. 3^rd sg. pāyāsi D.II,73; J.I,64, 223; III,333; VvA.64; PvA.272; 3^rd pl. pāyesuṁ J.IV,220, and pāyiṁsu D.II,96; J.I,253; DhA.III,257. -- pp. pāyāta (q. v.). See also the quasi synonymous abhiyāti. (Page 454)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + ā + yā + a), 出发，开始，往前去。【过】 pāyāsi。pāyī, 【形】喝的人。(p224)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāḷi: {'def': '(巴利)三藏圣典;巴利(语);线', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Pāṇa: {'def': '【阳】生命，呼吸，生物。 ~ghāta, 【阳】杀害，杀害生命。 ~ghātī,【阳】杀生者。 ~da, 【形】保护生命者。 ~bhūta,【阳】活的生物。 ~vadha,【阳】生命的破坏。 ~sama, 【形】宝贵如生命的。 ~hara, 【形】夺命的。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+an, cp. Vedic prāṇa breath of life; P. apāna, etc.] living being, life, creature D.III,48, 63, 133; S.I,209, 224; V,43, 227, 441 (mahā-samudde); A.I,161; II,73, 176, 192; Sn.117, 247, 394, 704; Dh.246; DA.I,69, 161; KhA 26; ThA.253; PvA.9, 28, 35; VvA.72; DhA.II,19. -- pl. also pāṇāni, e. g. Sn.117; Dh.270. ‹-› Bdhgh’s defⁿ of pāṇa is “pāṇanatāya pāṇā; assāsapassās’āyatta-vuttitāyā ti attho” Vism.310.

--âtipāta destruction of life, murder Vin.I,83 (in “dasa sikkhāpadāni,” see also sīla), 85, 193; D.III,68, 70, 149, 182, 235; M.I,361; III,23; Sn.242; It.63; J.III,181; Pug.39 sq.; Nett 27; VbhA.383 (var. degrees of murder); DhA.II,19; III,355; DA.I,69; PvA.27. --âtipātin one who takes the life of a living being, destroying life D.III,82; M.III,22; S.II,167; It.92; DhA.II,19. --upeta possessed or endowed with life, alive [cp. BSk. prāṇopeta Divy 72, 462 etc.] S.I,173; Sn.157; DA.I,236. --ghāta slaying life, killing, murder DA.I,69; --ghātin= âtipātin DhA.II,19. --bhu a living being J.IV,494. --bhūta=°bhu M.III,5; A.II,210; III,92; IV,249 sq.; J.IV,498. --vadha=âtipāta DA.I,69. --sama equal to or as dear as life J.II,343; Dpvs XI.26; DhA.I,5. --hara taking away life, destructive M.I,10=III,97; S.IV,206; A.II,116, 143, 153; III,163. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】生命，呼吸，生物，生灵。pāṇaghāta,【阳】杀害，杀害生命。pāṇaghātī,【阳】杀生者。pāṇada,【形】保护生命者。pāṇabhūta,【阳】活的生物。pāṇavadha,【阳】生命的破坏。pāṇasama,【形】宝贵如生命的。pāṇahara,【形】夺命的。pāṇupeta (pāṇa生命+upeta已赋予),终身。Upeti (upa近+i+a), 靠近，获得。pāṇanti, 他们呼吸。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāṇaka: {'def': '(fr. pāṇa), 【形】【阳】生命，有呼吸生物(a living being, endowed with (the breath of))。pāṇakajāta, (小)生物。sappāṇaka, 有生命。appāṇaka, 无生命。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】昆虫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) (usually --°) [fr. pāṇa] a living being, endowed with (the breath of) life S.IV,198 (chap°); DhA.I,20 (v. l. BB mata°); sap° with life, containing living creatures J.I,198 (udaka); ap° without living beings, lifeless Vin.II,216; M.I,13, 243; S.I,169; Sn.p. 15 (udaka); J.I,67 (jhāna). (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】昆虫。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāṇana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pāṇa] breathing Vism.310 (see pāṇa); Dhātupāṭha 273 (“baḷa” pāṇane). (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】呼吸。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】呼吸。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāṇi: {'def': '【阳】1.手、手掌(the hand)。2.手拿。pāṇitala,【中】手掌(the palm of the hand)。pāṇiggaha,【阳】婚姻(台语：牵手)。【工】pāṇinā。payatapāṇi, 张开掌(with outstretched hand, open-handed, liberal )。pāṇibhāga, 手的部份(handshare, division by hand)。pāṇimatta, 手的大小(of the size of a hand, a handful)。pāṇissara, 手的乐器(hand sound, hand music, a cert. kind of musical instrument)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】手，手掌。 ~tala, 【中】手掌。 ~ggaha, 【阳】婚姻。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic pāṇi, cp. Av. p∂r∂nā hand, with n-suffix, where we find m-suffix in Gr. palάmh, Lat. palma, Oir lām, Ohg. folma=Ags. folm] the hand Vin.III,14 (pāṇinā paripuñchati); M.I,78 (pāṇinā parimajjati); S.I,178, 194; Sn.713; Dh.124; J.I,126 (°ṁ paharati); PugA 249 (id.); PvA.56; Sdhp.147, 238. As adj. (-°) “handed,” with a hand, e. g. alla° with clean hand Pv.II,9⁹; payata° with outstretched hand, open-handed, liberal S.V,351; A.III,287; IV,266 sq.; V,331.

--tala the palm of the hand D.II,17. --bhāga handshare, division by hands VvA.96. --matta of the size of a hand, a handful PvA.70, 116, 119. --ssara hand sound, hand music, a cert. kind of musical instrument D.I,6; III,183; DA.I,84 (cp. Dial I.8), 231; J.V,390, 506; cp. BSk. pāṇisvara MVastu II.52. Also adj. one who plays this instrument J.VI,276; cp. BSk. pāṇisvarika MVastu III,113. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṇikā: {'def': '【阴】像手的东西，抹子，耙子。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹pāṇi; Sk. *pāṇikā),【阴】一种汤匙(a sort of spoon)，抹子，耙子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pāṇi; Sk. *pāṇikā] a sort of spoon Vin.II,151. Cp. puthu-pāṇikā (°pāṇiyā?) Vin.II,106. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṇin: {'def': '(‹pāṇa),【形】【中】呼吸，生物，生灵(having life, a living being)。Acc.pl. pāṇine。pāṇinaṁ, pl. 诸有呼吸者，诸生物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. pāṇa] having life, a living being S.I,210, 226, Sn.220 (Acc. pl. pāṇine, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 95²), 587 (id.), 201, 575; PvA.287; DhA.II,19. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṇātipātā: {'def': '(pāṇa呼吸+atipāta杀)﹐杀生(杀有呼吸者)。KhA.31.︰ettha ca pāṇātipātassa pañca aṅgāni bhavanti -- (1)pāṇo ca hoti, (2)pāṇasaññī ca, (3)vadhakacittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, (4)vāyamati, (5)tena ca maratīti.(1.(对象)是众生(pāṇo ca hoti)。2.认定是众生(pāṇasaññī ca生物想)。3.生起杀心(vadhakacittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti)。4.付之行动(vāyamati)(注2)。5.导致死亡(tena ca maratīti)。)KhA.33.︰Pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā cettha aṅgapaccaṅgasampannatā ārohapariṇāhasampattitā javasampattitā suppatiṭṭhitapādatā cārutā mudutā sucitā sūratā mahabbalatā vissatthavacanatā lokapiyatā nelatā abhejjaparisatā acchambhitā duppadhaṁsitā parūpakkamena amaraṇatā anantaparivāratā surūpatā susaṇṭhānatā appābādhatā asokitā piyehi manāpehi saddhiṁ avippayogatā dīghāyukatāti evamādīni phalāni.(离杀生：此中，肢体匀称，长广适中，足善安立，优美、柔软、明净、勇敢、大力，语明了，受世间喜爱，其众不破，无畏惧，不被迫害，被他攻击不死，眷属〔随从〕无量，善姿容，善外形，少病、无忧，与所喜爱、可意的相处而不别离，长寿，如此等。) MA.9./I,198.：Asādhāraṇesu pana pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṁ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṁ.(不共通有情(=别的生物)之杀害，称为‘杀生’，处死有情，杀害有情之谓。‘有情’，此处是从世俗的表达，从胜义谛，称为(具有)命根。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāṇī: {'def': '【阳】生物。(p222)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāṭala: {'def': '【形】淡红色的，粉红的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】淡红色的，粉红的。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pāṭala, to same root as palita & pāṇḍu: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under palleo & cp. paṇḍu] pale red, pink J.IV,114. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭaliputta: {'def': 'm. = Pāṭali-gāma 巴連弗, 華子城 [マガダ国の首都, 今日のパトナ].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. = Pāṭali-gāma 巴連弗, 華子城 [マガダ(Magadha, 摩揭陀)國的首都, 今日的パトナ(Patna, 巴特那)].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【中】华氏城(摩揭陀国的一城名，现在的巴特那〔Patna﹐印度东北部城市，比哈尔邦首府〕)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（城市名）巴嗒厘子，（古音译：）波吒厘子，巴连弗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【中】华氏城（摩揭陀国的一座城市的名字，现在的巴特那〔印度东北部城市，比哈尔邦首府〕）。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāṭalī: {'def': '【阳】喇叭花 (Bignonia suaveolens)。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pāṭalī, to pāṭala] the trumpet flower, Bignonia Suaveolens D.II,4 (Vipassī pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho); Vv 35⁹; J.I,41 (°rukkha as the Bodhi tree); II,162 (pāṭali-bhaddaka sic. v. l. for phālibhaddaka); IV,440; V,189; VI,537; Miln.338; VvA.42, 164; ThA.211, 226. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】喇叭花 (the trumpet-flower；Bignonia suaveolens)，音译：波罗利华、波波罗、波吒厘；重叶树、重生华，春季开香紫花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāṭava: {'def': '【阳】【中】技术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】技术。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. late Sk. pāṭava, fr. paṭu] skill KhA 156. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭaṅkī: {'def': '(f.) “sedan chair” (?) in phrase sivikaṁ pāṭaṅkiṁ at Vin.I,192 (MV V,10, 3) is not clear. The vv. ll. (p. 380) are pāṭaṅgin, pāṭaṅgan pāṭakan. Perhaps pallaṅkaṁ? (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭekka: {'def': '(Pāṭiyekka) (adj.) [paṭi+eka; the diaeretic form of pacceka: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 24] several, distinct, single Vin.I,134; IV,15; J.I,92 (T. pāṭiekka, SS pāṭiyekka); Vism.249 (pāṭiyekka, SS pāṭiekka), 353, 356, 443, 473; DhA.IV,7 (pāṭiy° SS pāṭieka). -- nt. °ṁ (adv.) singly, separately, individually Vism.409 (pāṭiy°); VvA.141. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 pāṭiyekka。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】分开的，单一的。参考 pāṭiyekka。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāṭeti: {'def': '[Caus. of paṭ] to remove; Pass. pāṭiyati Pv IV.1⁴⁷ (turned out of doors); v. l. pātayati (bring to fall). Prob, in sense of Med. at Miln.152 in phrase visaṁ pāṭiyamāno (doubtful, cp. Kern, Toev. II.139, & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 87). (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭha: {'def': '﹐pātha﹐【阳】通道，朗诵文。pāṭhaka,【形】背诵者，阅读者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. paṭh] reading, text-reading; passage of a text, text. Very freq. in Commentaries with phrase “ti pi pāṭho,” i. e. “so is another reading,” e. g. KhA 78, 223; SnA 43 (°ṁ vikappeti), 178, 192, 477; PvA.25 (pamāda° careless text), 48, 58, 86 and passim. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】通道，朗诵文。 ~ka, 【形】背诵者，阅读者。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāṭhaka: {'def': '(-°) [fr. pāṭha] reciter; one who knows, expert Nd¹ 382 (nakkhatta°); J.I,455 (asi-lakkhaṇa°); II,21 (aṅgavijjā°), 250 (id.); V,211 (lakkhaṇa° fortune-teller, wise man). (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭhīna: {'def': '[cp. Sk. pāṭhīna Manu 5, 16; Halāyudha 3, 36] the fish Silurus Boalis, a kind of shad J.IV,70 (C: pāṭhīna-nāmakaṁ pāsāṇa-macchaṁ); V,405; VI,449. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】叉尾鮎(东南亚产的一种大形淡水鮎鱼 (Silurus Boalis))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】叉尾鲇（东南亚产的一种大形淡水鲇鱼 (Silurus Boalis)）。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāṭibhoga: {'def': '【阳】赞助者，保证人，保释，安全。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】赞助者，保证人，保释，安全。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for paṭibhoga (?); difficult to explain, we should suspect a ger. formation *prati-bhogya for *bhujya i. e. “counter-enjoyable,” i. e. one who has to be made use of in place of someone else; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 24] a sponsor A.II,172; Ud.17; It.1 sq.; J.II,93; Vism.555 sq.; DhA.I,398; VbhA.165. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭidesanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of paṭideseti with pāṭi for pāṭi in der.] belonging to confession, (a sin) which ought to be confessed Vin.I,172; II,242; A.II,243 (as °desanīyaka). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭihāra: {'def': '[=pāṭihāra, with pāṭi after analogy of pāṭihāriya] striking, that which strikes (with ref. to marking the time) J.I,121, 122 (v. l. SS pāṭihāriya) (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭihārika: {'def': '[=pāṭihāriya or der. fr. pātihāra in meaning of °hāriya] special, extraordinary; only in cpd. °pakkha an extra holiday A.I,144; Vv 15⁶ (cp. VvA.71, 109); ThA.38. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭihāriya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. paṭi+hṛ (paṭihāra) with usual lengthening of paṭi to pāṭi, as in °desanīya, °mokkha etc. Cp. pāṭihīra; BSk. prātihārya] striking, surprising, extraordinary, special; nt. wonder, miracle. Usually in stock phrase iddhi°, ādesanā°, anusāsanī° as the 3 marvels which characterise a Buddha with regard to his teaching (i. e. superhuman power, mind reading, giving instruction) D.I,212; III,3 sq.; S.IV,290; A.I,170; V,327; Ps.II,227. -- Further: Vin.I,34 (aḍḍhuḍḍha° sahassāni); Vism.378, 390 (yamaka°); VvA.158 (id.); PvA.137 (id.). For yamaka-pāṭihāriya (or °hīra) see yamaka. -- Two kinds of p. are given at Vism.393, viz. pākaṭa° and apākaṭa°. --sappāṭihāriya (with ref. to the Dhamma) wonderful, extraordinary, sublime, as opposed to appāṭi° plain, ordinary, stupid M.II,9 (where Neumann, Majjhima Nikāya II.318 trsl^s sa° “intelligible” and a° “incomprehensible,” referring to Chāndogyopaniṣat I.11, 1); D.II,104; cp. also Windisch, Māra 71.

--pakkha an extra holiday, an ancient festival, not now kept S.I,208 (cp. Th.2, 31); Sn.402 (cp. explⁿ at SnA 378, where var. opinions are given); J.IV,320; VI,118. See also Kern’s discussion of the term at Toev. II.30. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭihīra: {'def': '(adj.) [contracted form of pāṭihāriya viâ metathesis *pāṭihāriya›*pāṭihēra›paṭihīra] wonderful; nt. a wonderful thing, marvel, miracle Ps.I,125 (yamaka°); II,158 (id.); Mhvs 5, 118; Miln.106; Dāvs.I,50; DhA.III,213. --appātihīrakathā stupid talk D.I,193, 239; Kvu 561 (diff. Kern. Toev. II.30); opp. sa° ibid. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Pāṭihera, Pāṭihāriya, Paṭihāra, (‹paṭi+hr)(梵prātihārakapaksaṃ),【中】敲击(striking, that which strikes)；奇迹(=iddhipāṭihāriya)。pāṭihāriyapakkha,【阳】神变日(《杂阿含1121经》：「汝等诸瞿昙！於法斋日及神足月，受持斋戒，修功德不？」神足月：pāṭihāriyapakkha (pāṭihāriya额外的+pakkha半个月(m.)?明晰(a.) )神奇节{an extra holiday, an ancient festival, not now kept (PED, p.451)} (水野弘元译︰神变月?特别の月)(Bodhi译: special periods )。VvA(CS:p.65)：Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcāti paṭiharaṇakapakkhañca, cātuddasīpañcadasī-aṭṭhamīnaṁ yathākkamaṁ ādito antato cāti pavesana-nikkhamanavasena uposathasīlassa paṭiharitabbaṁ pakkhañca terasī pāṭipadā sattamī navamī cāti attho.((及)额外的半月(古译︰神足月)：(及)额外的半月，(一般布萨日)从(农历)初八开始，接著第十四，到第十五(日)结束，延伸布萨戒(的日份)，当是额外的半月，增加第十三，初七、初九之义。) SA.10.5./I,307.︰Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcāti manussā “aṭṭhamī-uposathassa paccuggamanañca anuggamanañca karissāmā”ti sattamiyāpi navamiyāpi uposathaṅgāni samādiyanti, cātuddasīpannarasīnaṁ paccuggamanānuggamanaṁ karontā terasiyāpi pāṭipadepi samādiyanti, “vassāvāsassa anuggamanaṁ karissāmā”ti dvinnaṁ pavāraṇānaṁ antare aḍḍhamāsaṁ nibaddhuposathikā bhavanti. Idaṁ sandhāya vuttaṁ “pāṭihāriyapakkhañcā”ti. ((及)额外的半月︰人“初八布萨，我们去作、跟著去作”，我们承当初七、初九布萨，第十四，到第十五(日)去作、跟著去作，增加第十三(日)也承当，“(三个月的)雨安居，我们去作、跟著去作”，(前雨安居、后雨安居结束时)两次自恣在半月的中间，也继续作(一个月的)布萨，这是关於“(及)额外的半月”。)AA.3.38./II,235.︰Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcāti ettha pāṭihāriyapakkho nāma antovasse temāsaṁ nibaddhuposatho, taṁ asakkontassa dvinnaṁ pavāraṇānaṁ antare ekamāsaṁ nibaddhuposatho, tampi asakkontassa paṭhamapavāraṇato paṭṭhāya eko addhamāso pāṭihāriyapakkhoyeva nāma.((及)额外的半月(古译︰神足月)：此处(及)额外的半月，指内安居(前安居)三个月连续的布萨。他不在两次的自恣之间的一个月继续作布萨，他不在第一次自恣后开始作一个月(作布萨)，称为“额外的半月”。神变月：农历1月1日~2月1日。神变节：农历1月1~14日。神变日：农历 1月15日。tīṇi pāṭihāriyāni(三神变)：Iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ(神通神变) ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṁ(记心神变) anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ(【梵】anuwāsti-prātihārya)(教诫神变)。见A.3.144./I,292.、D.11./I,212.。Pāṭihārika(=pāṭihāriya or der. fr. pātihāra in meaning of pāṭihāriya), 特别的，额外的(special, extraordinary; only in cpd. pāṭihārikapakkha an extra holiday)。yamaka-pāṭihāriya, 双神变(Twin Psychic Phenomenon, Twin Miracles, cf. Pṭs.I,125.；J.I,77, 88, 193.)。《解脱道论》(T32.427.3)作︰「双变智」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāṭikaṅkha: {'def': '【形】被需要的，被预期的。 ~khī, 【阳】需要者，期待者。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】被需要的，被预期的。pāṭikaṅkhī,【阳】需要者，期待者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of paṭikaṅkhati, Sk. *pratikāṅkṣya] to be desired or expected M.I,25; III,97; S.I,88; II,152; A.III,143=Sn.p. 140 (=icchitabba SnA 504); Ud.36; DhA.IV,2 (gati °ā) PvA.63 (id.). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭikaṅkhin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.-n.) [fr. paṭi+kāṅka, cp. patikaṅkhin] hoping for, one who expects or desires D.I,4; M.III,33; A.II,209; J.III,409. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭikkulyatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. paṭikkūla] loathsomeness, objectionableness A.III,32; IV,47 sq.; V,64. Cp. paṭikulyatā, paṭikūlatā & pāṭikulyā. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭikulyā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭi(k)kūla]=pātikkūlyatā (perhaps to be read as such) J.V,253 (nava, cp. Vism.341 sq.). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭikā: {'def': '(f.) [etym. unknown; with pāṭiya cp. Sk. pāṣya?] half-moon stone, the semicircular slab under the staircase Vin.I,180 (cp. Vin. Texts II.3). As pāṭiya at J.VI,278 (=piṭṭhi-pāsāṇa C.). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】半月形石台阶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】半月形石台阶。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pāṭikūlya: {'def': '【中】讨厌。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】讨厌。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pāṭimokkha: {'def': 'Pātimokkha,(fr. paṭi回+ muc(梵muc / moks)释放﹑解脱；梵Praṭimokkha波罗提木叉),【阳】守则。音译：波提木叉、巴帝摩卡。bhikkhupātimokkha,【阳】比丘守则、比丘波提木叉(the code of monastic discipline)。《律藏·大品·诵戒篇》中解释︰「巴帝摩卡者，此是最初，此是头首，此是诸善法之上首，因此称为『巴帝摩卡』。」律注《疑惑度脱》中说︰「巴帝摩卡为极殊胜(pa-atimokkha)、极上首(atipamokkha)、极尊、极上之义。」《清净道论》中说︰「若他看护(pāti)、保护此者，能使他解脱(mokkheti)、脱离恶趣等苦，所以称为『巴帝摩卡』。」sāvakā āraññakā pantasenāsanā āraññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni ajjhogahetvā viharati. Te anvaḍḍhamāsaṁ sajghamajjhe osarati pātimokkhuddesāya.(诸弟子住闲林者、住边地坐卧处者，潜入森、林、薮、边地而住。他们每半月为了诵戒而入众。) 。《善见律毘婆沙》卷第七(T24.719.1)︰「於诸光明日光为王，於诸山中须弥为最，一切世间学波罗提木叉为最。如来出世便有此法，若无佛出世，无有众生能竖立此法，身口意行诸恶业，佛以‘无等学’而制。」《五分律》卷十八说：「波罗提木叉者，以此戒防护诸根，增长善法，於诸善法最为初门故，名为波罗提木叉。」(T22.122.1)。《毘尼母经》(卷二：大正24.809.1)卷三：大正24.814.2) )：「波罗提木叉者，名最胜义。以何义故名为最胜，诸善之本，以戒为根，众善得生，故名胜义。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '波罗提木叉;戒条;戒本;别解脱', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Pāṭipada: {'def': '【阳】阴历初一(或十六日)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】阴历初一（或十六日）。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [fr. paṭi+pad, see patipajjati & cp. paṭipadā] lit, “entering, beginning”; the first day of the lunar fortnight Vin.I,132; J.IV,100; VvA.72 (°sattamī). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [the adj. form of paṭipadā] following the (right) Path M.I,354=It.80 (+sekha). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭipadaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pāṭipada²] belonging to the 1^st day of the lunar fortnight; only with ref. to bhatta (food) & in combⁿ with pakkhika & uposathika, i. e. food given on the half-moon days, on the 7^th day of the week & on the first day of the fortnight Vin.I,58= II.175; IV,75; (f. °ikā), 78. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭipuggalika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭipuggala] belonging to one’s equal M.III,254 sq. (dakkhiṇā). (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭirūpika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭirūpa, cp. paṭirūpaka] assuming a disguise, deceitful, false Sn.246. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭiyekka: {'def': '【形】分开的，单一的。pāṭiyekkaṁ,【副】分开地，个别地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】分开的，单一的。 ~kaŋ, 【副】分开地，个别地。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see pāṭekka. (Page 450)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭuka: {'def': '& Pāṭubha only neg. a° (q. v.). (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pāṭī: {'def': '(f.) [?] at VvA.321 in phrase sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṁ “in the moonlight half” is doubtful. Hardy in Index registers it as “part, half-,” but pakkha already means “half” and is enough by itself. We should probably read paṭipāṭiyaṁ “successively.” Note that the similar passage VvA.314 reads sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṁ. (Page 451)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pīlikoḷikā: {'def': '(f.) [reading not quite sure, cp. koḷikā] eyesecretion Th.2, 395 (=akkhigūthaka ThA.259, q. v. for fuller expln; see also J.P.T.S. 1884, 88). (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(reading not quite sure, cp. koḷikā) ,【阴】眼屎(眼的分泌物)(eyesecretion)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pīna: {'def': '【形】肥的，胖的，膨胀的。【梵】pīnāyatakarṇa(having a full and prominent ears), (两)耳厚长(八十种好之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】肥的，胖的，膨胀的。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. pīna of pī to swell up (with fat); to which also Vedic pīvan & pīvara fat, Gr. pimelή & pi\\on fat, Lat. opīmus fat, Ger. feist & fett=E. fat] fat, swollen Th.2, 265 (of breasts). (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pīta: {'def': '(pivati 的【过分】)。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Epic Sk. pīta, etym. unclear] yellow, goldencoloured Vin.I,217 (virecana); D.I,76 (nīla p. lohita odāta); III,268 (°kasiṇa); M.I,281 (pīta-nisita, belonging here or under pīta1?), cp. 385 (below); A.III,239; IV,263, 305, 349; V,61; J.VI,185 (nīla p. lohita odāta mañjeṭṭhaka), 449 (°alaṅkāra, °vasana °uttara, cp. 503); Dhs.203 (°kasiṇa), 246, 247 (nīla p. lohitaka, odāta); Vism.173 (°kasiṇa). -- pīta is prominent (in the sense of golden) in the description of Vimānas or other heavenly abodes. A typical example is Vv 47 (Pītavimāna V.1 & 2), where everything is characterised as pīta, viz. vattha, dhaja, alaṅkāra, candana, uppala, pāsāda, āsana, bhojana, chatta, ratha, assa, bījanī; the C. expln of pīta at this passage is “suvaṇṇa”; cp. Vv 361 (=parisuddha, hemamaya VvA.166); 784 (=suvaṇṇamaya C. 304). --antara a yellow dress or mantle Vv 36 (=pītavaṇṇā uttarīyā C. 166). --aruṇa yellowish red Th.2, 479. --âvalepana “golden-daubed” M.I,385. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pītaka, 【形】黄色的，金色的。【阳】黄色。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'pītaka,【形】黄色的，金色的。【阳】黄色。pītakasiṇa黄遍。kaṇikārapupphasamānaṁ pītakaṁ﹐相似於翅子树花(之色)，为金色 (Pterospermum Acerifolium)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of pivati] 1. having drunk or (pred.) being drunk (as liquid) S.I,212 (madhu°); J.I,198; PvA.25 (with asita, khāyita & sāyita as fourfold food). ‹-› 2. soaked or saturated with (-°), in kasāyarasa° J.II,98 (or=pīta2?) and visapīta (of an arrow) J.V,36; Vism.303, 381; which may however be read (on acct. of v. l. visappīta) as visappita “poison-applied” (see appita). Does M.I,281 pīta-nisita belong here (=visapīta)? ‹-› 3. (nt.) drink M.I,220 sq.=A.V,347 sq.; A.V,359; Th.1, 503; Pv.II,710; Nett 29, 80. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pivati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pītaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pīta] yellow Vin.IV,159; Th.2, 260; J.II,274; Pv III,13 (=suvaṇṇavaṇṇa PvA.170); Dhs.617 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta kāḷaka mañjeṭṭhaka); ThA.211. --pītakā (f.) saffron, turmeric M.I,36. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pītana: {'def': '【中】黄色素，黄色颜料。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】黄色素，黄色顔料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pīti: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. prīti & Vedic prīta pp. of prī, see pīneti & piya] emotion of joy, delight, zest, exuberance. On term see Dhs. trsl. 11 and Cpd. 243. Classed under saṅkhārakkhandha, not vedanā°. -- D.I,37, 75; III,241, 265, 288; M.I,37; S.II,30; IV,236; A.III,26, 285 sq.; IV,411, 450; V,1 sq., 135, 311 sq., 333 sq.; Sn.257, 687, 695, 969, 1143 (=Bhagavantaṁ ārabbha p. pāmujjaṁ modanā pamodanā citti-odagyaṁ etc. Nd2 446); Nd1 3, 491; Pug.68; Dhs.9, 62, 86, 172, 584, 999; Nett 29; Vism.145 (& sukha in contrasted relation), 212, 287 (in detail); DA.I,53 (characterised by ānanda); DhA.I,32; Sdhp.247, 461. On relation to jhāna see the latter. In series pīti passaddhi samādhi upekkhā under sambojjhaṅga (with eleven means of cultivation: see Vism.132 & VbhA.282). -- Phrase pītiyā sarīraṁ pharati “to pervade or thrill the body with joy” (aor. phari), at J.I,33; V,494; DhA.II,118; IV,102; all passages refer to pīti as the fivefold pīti, pañcavaṇṇā pīti, or joy of the 5 grades (see Dhs. trsl. 11, 12, and Cpd. 56), viz. khuddikā (slight sense of interest), khaṇikā (momentary joy), okkantikā (oscillating interest, flood of joy), ubbegā (ecstasy, thrilling emotion), and pharaṇā pīti (interest amounting to rapture, suffusing joy). Thus given at DhsA.115 & Vism.143, referred to at DhsA.166. -- pīti as nirāmisa (pure) and sāmisa (material) at M.III,85; S.IV,235. --gamanīya pleasant or enjoyable to walk M.I,117. --pāmojja joy and gladness A.III,181. 307 (°pāmujja); Dh.374; DhA.IV,110; KhA 82. --pharaṇatā state of being pervaded with joy, joyous rapture, ecstasy D.III,277; Ps.I,48; Vbh.334; Nett 89. --bhakkha feeding on joy (Ep. of the Ābhassara Devas) D.I,17; III,28, 84, 90; A.V,60; Dh.200; A.I,110; DhA.III,258; Sdhp.255. --mana joyful-hearted, exhilarated, glad of heart or mind M.I,37; III,86; S.I,181; A.III,21; V,3; Sn.766; Nd1 3; J.III,411; Vbh.227. --rasa taste or emotion of joy VvA.86. --sambojjhaṅga the joy-constituent of enlightenment M.III,86; D.III,106, 226, 252, 282. Eleven results of such a state are enumd at DhsA.75, viz. the 6 anussatis, upam’ânussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā, siniddha-pug.-sevanatā, pasādanīyasuttanta-paccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatā (cp. Vism.132 & VbhA.282). --sahagata followed or accompanied by joy, bringing joy Dhs.1578 (dhammā, various things or states); Vism.86 (samādhi). --sukha zest and happiness, intrinsic joy (cp. Cpd. 56, 243) S.I,203; D.III,131, 222; Dhs.160; Vism.158; ThA.160. According to DhsA.166 “rapture and bliss,” cp. Expositor 222. --somanassa joy and satisfaction J.V,371; Sn.512; PvA.6, 27, 132. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '喜。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '喜', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(‹pīṇayati使清新),【阴】禅悦，欢喜，高兴。pītipāmojja,【中】欢喜和高兴。pītibhakkha,【形】以禅悦为食的。pītimana,【形】心的喜悦，使高兴的。pītirasa,【阳】禅悦的味道，禅悦的情绪。sambojjhaṅga,【阳】喜觉支。pītisahagata,【形】有喜陪伴的。《分别论》(vibha.567)：Tattha katamā pīti? Yā pīti pāmojjaṁ āmodanā pamodanā hāso pahāso vitti odagyaṁ attamanatā cittassa--ayaṁ vuccati “pīti”.(此中，什么是喜呢？凡是喜、高兴、喜悦、极悦、欢乐、极欢乐、幸福、洋洋得意、心满意足，称为‘喜’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】禅悦，欢喜，高兴，情绪。 ~pāmojja, 【中】欢喜和高兴。 ~bhakkha,【形】以禅悦为食的。 ~mana, 【形】心的喜悦，使高兴的。 ~rasa, 【阳】禅悦的味道，禅悦的情绪。 sambojjhaṅga,【阳】喜觉支。 ~sahagata,【形】有喜陪伴的。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pītika: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. pīti] belonging to joy; only as sappītika & nippītika bringing joy & devoid of joy, with & without exuberance (of sukha) A.III,26; IV,300, 441. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pītin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pīta1) drinking, only at Dh.79 in cpd. dhamma° drinking in the Truth, expld as dhammapāyako, dhammaṁ pivanto at DhA.II,126. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pīḷaka: {'def': '【形】压迫，压迫者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pīd?] a (sort of) boil Vism.35; see pilaka. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】压迫，压迫者。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pīḷana: {'def': '【中】 Pīḷa, 【阴】压抑，受伤，损害。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】pīḷa,【阴】压抑，受伤，损害。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pīḍ, cp. pīḷā] oppression, injury, suffering (from dukkha) Vism.212=494; also in nakkhatta° harm to a constellation, i. e. occultation DhA.I,166 sq. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pīḷeti: {'def': '(pīḷ + e), 压迫，压破，折磨，使屈服。【过】 pīḷesi。【过分】 pīḷita。【独】 pīḷetvā。(p228)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pīḷ虐待+e, cp. Vedic pīḍayati, pīḍ压), 压迫，压，压碎，使屈服，骚扰(to press, to weigh down heavily, to crush, to keep under, subjugate, to molest)。【过】pīḷesi。【过分】pīḷita。【独】pīḷetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic pīḍayati, pīḍ, cp. Gr. piέzw (*pisedQw?) to press, oppress (lit. sit upon?)] 1. to press, press down Vin.II,225 (coḷakaṁ). -- 2. to weigh down heavily J.I,25 (ppr. pīḷiyamāna), 138. -- 3. to press, clench Miln.418 (muṭṭhiṁ pīḷayati); DhA.IV,69 (aṅguliyā pīḷiyamānāya). -- 4. to crush, keep under, subjugate Miln.277 (janaṁ). -- 5. to molest VvA.348 (pīḷanto ppr. for pīḷento?). -- pp. pīḷita. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pīḷita: {'def': '[pp. of pīḷeti] crushed, oppressed, molested, harassed Vin.IV,261; Vism.415 (dubbhikkha°); DhA.IV,70; ThA.271. Cp. abhi°, pa°. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[pp. of pīḷeti] 已压迫，已折磨。dubbhikkhapīḷita, 食物缺乏的折磨。cp. abhipīḷita, papīḷita.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pīḷā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pīḍā fr. pīḍ] 1. pain, suffering J.I,421; Miln.278; Vism.42. -- 2. oppression, damage, injury SnA 353; DA.I,259. (Page 462)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Class. Sk. pīḍā fr. pīḍ) ,【阴】1.痛苦(pain, suffering )。2.压迫，伤害(oppression, damage, injury)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pīṇana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. prī, cp. pīti] 1. gladdening, thrill, satisfaction Vism.143=DhsA.115. -- 2. embellishment Vism.32 (=maṇḍana). (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】喜悦，满足。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】喜悦，满足。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pīṇeti: {'def': '﹐高兴(to gladden)，快乐(please, cheer)，满意(satisfy),使强壮(to invigorate)。【过分】pīṇita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic prīṇāti, prī, see piya. The meaning in Pāli however has been partly confused with pī, pinvati (see pīna), as suggested by Bdhgh in DA.I,157: “pīṇentī ti pīṇitaṁ thāma-bal’ûpetaṁ karonti”] to gladden, please, satisfy, cheer; to invigorate, make strong, often in phrase (attānaṁ) sukheti pīṇeti “makes happy and pleases” D.I,51; III,130 sq.; S.I,90; IV,331; PvA.283: cp. DhsA.403 (sarīraṁ p.). It also occurs in def. of pīti (pīṇayatī ti pīti) at Vism.143=DhsA.115. -- pp. pīṇita. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pīṇ + e), 使喜悦，取悦，使满意，鼓舞。【过】 pīṇesi。【过分】 pīṇita。【独】 pīṇetvā。【现分】 pīṇenta。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pīṇ+e), 使喜悦，取悦，使满意，鼓舞，使清新。【过】pīṇesi。【过分】pīṇita。【独】pīṇetvā。【现分】pīṇenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pīṇita: {'def': '[pp. of pīṇeti] pleased, gladdened, satisfied Vv 1613 (=tuṭṭha VvA.84); Miln.238, 249, 361; usually in phrase pīṇitindriya with satisfied senses, with joyful heart M.II,121; PvA.46, 70. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pīṭha: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Fpic Sk. pīṭha] a seat, chair, stool, bench. -- 4. kinds are given at Vin.IV,40=168, viz. masāraka, bundikābaddha, kuḷirapādaka, āhaccapādaka (same categories as given under mañca). -- Vin.I,47, 180; II,114, 149, 225; A.III,51 (mañca°, Dvandva); IV,133 (ayo°); Ps.I,176; Vv 11 (see discussed in detail at VvA.8); VvA.295 (mañca°). -- pāda° footstool J.IV,378; VvA.291; bhadda° state-chair, throne J.III,410. --sappin “one who crawls by means of a chair or bench,” i. e. one who walks on a sort of crutch or support, a cripple (pīṭha here in sense of “hatthena gahana-yogga” VvA.8; exlpd by Bdhgh as “chinn’iriyāpatha” Vin. Texts I.225) J.I,76, 418; V,426 (khujja+) VI,4, 10; Miln.205, 245, 276; Vism.596 (& jaccandha, in simile); DhA.I,194; II,69; PugA 227; PvA.282. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】椅子，座位。pīṭhaka,【中】pīṭhikā,【阴】小椅子，长椅子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】椅子，座位。 ~ka, 【中】 ~ṭhikā, 【阴】小椅子，长椅子。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pīṭhaka: {'def': '[fr. pīṭha] a chair, stool VvA.8, 124. See also palāla°. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pīṭhasappī: {'def': '【阳】跛者(cripple)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】跛子。(p227)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pīṭhikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pīṭha] a bench, stool Vin.II,149 (“cushioned chair” Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts III,165); J.IV,349; DA.I,41; VvA.8. (Page 461)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūga: {'def': '【阳】公会，社团。【中】堆，槟榔果。 ~rukkha, 【阳】槟榔树（一种棕榈属 (Areca) 和散尾葵属 (Chrysalidocarpus)的东半球热带棕榈植物）。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹(nt.) [etym.? cp. Vedic pūga in meaning of both pūga1 & pūga2] heap, quantity; either as n. with Gen. or as adj.=many, a lot Sn.1073 (pūgaṁ vassānaṁ= bahūni vassāni Nd2 452); Pv IV.79 (pūgāni vassāni); VbhA.2 (khandhaṭṭha, piṇḍ°, pūg°). (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】公会，社团。【中】堆，槟榔果(青仔)。pūgarukkha,【阳】槟榔树(台语：青仔欉chenn a2 cang5)(一种棕榈属 (Areca) 和散尾葵属 (Chrysalidocarpus) 的东半球热带棕榈植物)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ [Class. Sk. pūga] the betel-palm, betel nut tree J.V,37 (°rukkha-ppamāṇaṁ ucchu-vanaṁ). (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (m.) [see preceding] corporation, guild Vin.II,109, 212; IV,30, 78, 226, 252; M.III,48; A.III,300; Ud.71; Pug.29 (=seṇi PugA 210). --āyatana guild’s property J.VI,108 (=pūga-santaka dhana C.). --gāmaṇika superintendant of a guild, guildmaster A.III,76. --majjhagata gone into a guild A.I,128=Pug.29; SnA 377. (Page 470)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūja: {'def': '(adj.) [Epic Sk. pūjya, cp. pujja] to be honoured, honourable A.III,78 (v. l.; T. pūjja); J.III,83 (apūja= apūjanīya C.); pūjaṁ karoti to do homage Vism.312. ‹-› See also pūjiya. Pūjanā (f.) [fr. pūjeti] veneration, worship A.II,203 sq.; Dh.106, 107; Pug.19; Dhs.1121; Miln.162. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūjana: {'def': 'pūjā(fr. pūj, see pūjeti),【阴】供奉，尊敬，尊崇(devotional attention, honour, worship)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'pūjā, 【阴】尊敬，尊崇，供奉。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pūjaneyya: {'def': '& Pūjanīya [grd. of pūjeti] to be honoured, entitled to homage S.I,175; SnA 277; --īya J.III,83; Sdhp.230, 551. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pūjanīya, pūjāraha,【形】有尊崇资格的，庄严的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '~nīya, pūjāraha, 【形】有尊崇资格的，庄严的。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pūjetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. pūjeti] one who shows attention or care A.V,347 sq., 350 sq. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūjeti: {'def': '(pūj + e), 尊敬，尊重，供奉。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 pūjenta, pūjayamāna。【独】 pūjetvā。【不】 pūjetuŋ。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pūj, occurring in Rigveda only in śācipūjana RV VIII,16, 12] to honour, respect, worship, revere Sn.316 (Pot. pūjayeyya), 485 (imper. pūjetha); Dh.106, 195; DA.I,256; PvA.54 (aor. sakkariṁsu garukkariṁsu mānesuṁ pūjesuṁ); Sdhp.538. -- pp. pūjita (q. v.). Pūti (adj.) [cp. Sk. pūti, pūyati to fester; Gr. pu/qw, pu_on= pus; Lat. pūtidus putrid; Goth. fūls=Ger. faul, E. foul] putrid, stinking, rotten, fetid D.II,353 (khaṇḍāni pūtīni); M.I,73, 89=III,92 (aṭṭhikāni pūtīni); Vin.III,236 (anto°); S.III,54; Pv.I,32; I,61 (=kuṇapagandha PvA.32); Vism.261 (=pūtika at KhA 61), 645 (°pajā itthi, in simile); PvA.67; Sdhp.258. -- See also puccaṇḍatā. --kāya foul body, mass of corruption, Ep. of the human body M.II,65; S.I,131; III,120; Th.2, 466; ThA.283; SnA 40; DhA.III,111. --kummāsa rotten junket Vism.343. --gandha bad smell, ill-smelling Pv.I,31 (=kuṇapa° PvA.15); J.V,72. --dadhi rancid curds Vism.362; VbhA.68; cp. pūti-takka Vism.108. --deha=°kāya S.I,236. --maccha stinking fish M.III,168 (+°kuṇapa & °kummāsa); in simile at It.68=J.IV,435 =VI,236=KhA 127. --mukha having a putrid mouth SnA 458 (āsīvisa); PvA.12, 14. --mutta strong-smelling urine, usually urine of cattle used as medicine by the bhikkhu Vin.I,58=96 (°bhesajja); M.I,316; It.103; VvA.5 (°harītaka). --mūla having fetid roots M.I,80. --latā “stinking creeper,” a sort of creeper or shrub (Coccolus cordifolius, otherwise gaḷoci) Sn.29=Miln.369; Vism.36, 183; KhA 47 (°saṇṭhāna); DhA.III,110, 111 (taruṇā galoci-latā pūtilatā ti vuccati). --lohitaka with putrid blood Pv.I,78 (=kuṇapa° PvA.37). --sandeha=°kāya Dh.148. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pūj+e), 尊敬，尊重，供奉。【过】pūjesi。【现分】pūjenta, pūjayamāna。【独】pūjetvā。【不】pūjetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pūjita: {'def': '(pūjeti的【过分】) 尊敬，尊重，供奉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pūjeti] honoured, revered, done a service S.I,175, 178; II,119; Th.1, 186; Sn.316; Ud.73 (sakkata mānita p. apacita); Pv.I,42 (=paṭimānita C.); II,810. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūjiya: {'def': '[=pūja, Sk. pūjya] worthy to be honoured Sn.527; J.V,405; Sdhp.542. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】值得被尊敬的。【中】尊敬的对象。pūjiyamāna,【形】被尊敬的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】值得被尊敬的。【中】尊敬的对象。 ~māna, 【形】被尊敬的。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pūjā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pūj, see pūjeti] honour, worship, devotional attention A.I,93 (āmisa°, dhamma°); V,347 sq.; Sn.906; Dh.73, 104; Pv.I,55; I,512; Dpvs VII.12 (cetiya°); SnA 350; PvA.8; Sdhp.213, 230, 542, 551. --âraha worthy of veneration, deserving attention Dh.194; DhA.III,251. --karaṇa doing service, paying homage PvA.30. --kāra=karaṇa DhA.II,44. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūpa: {'def': '【阳、中】蛋糕。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】蛋糕。pūpakāra﹐制面包人(baker)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. pūpa; “a rich cake of wheaten flour” Hȧlāyudha, 2, 164; and BSk. pūpalikā Av.Ś II.116] a special kind of cake, baked or boiled in a bag J.V,46 (°pasibbaka cake-bag); DhA.I,319 (jāla° net-cake; v. l. pūva). See also pūva. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūpiya: {'def': '【阳】蛋糕商。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】蛋糕商。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pūra: {'def': '【形】满的，充满的。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】满的，充满的。duppūra,【形】难满的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pūra; fr. pṛ, see pūreti] full; full of (with Gen.) D.I,244 (nadī); M.I,215; III,90, 96; A.IV,230; Sn.195, 721; Ud.90 (nadī); J.I,146; Pv IV.313 (=pānīyena puṇṇa PvA.251); Pug.45, 46; PvA.29. --dup° difficult to fill J.V,425. -- pūraṁ (-°) nt. as adv. in kucchi-pūraṁ to his belly’s fill J.III,268; Vism.108 (udara-pūra-mattaṁ). (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūraka: {'def': '(adj.) [=pāra+ka] filling (-°) Vism.106 (mukha°). (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】装满者，实践，完成。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】装满者，实践，完成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pūratta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. pūra] getting or being full, fulness Vin.II,239 (opp. unattaṁ). (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūraḷāsa: {'def': '[cp. Vedic puroḍāśa] sacrificial cake (brahmanic), oblation Sn.459 (=carukañ ca pūvañ ca SnA 405), 467, 479 (=havyasesa C.), 486. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūraṇa: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pūreti] 1. (adj.) filling Sn.312 (? better read purāṇa with SnA 324); PvA.70 (eka-thālaka°), 77 (id.). As Np. in Pūraṇa Kassapa, which however seems to be distorted from Purāṇa K. (D.I,47; Sn.p. 92, cp. KhA 126, 175; SnA 200, 237, 372). The expln (popular etym.) of the name at DA.I,142 refers it to pūreti (“kulassa ekūnaṁ dāsa-sataṁ pūrayamāno jāto” i. e. making the hundred of servants full). ‹-› 2. (nt.) an expletive particle (pada° “verse-filler”), so in C. style of “a” SnA 590; “kho” ib. 139; “kho pana” ib. 137; “taṁ” KhA 219; “tato” SnA 378; “pi” ib. 536; “su” ib. 230; “ha” ib. 416; “hi” ib. 377. See pada°. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pūreti) 【形】【中】1.【形】充满(filling)。2.【中】填充物(an expletive particle)。padapūraṇa，偈诵填词(verse-filler)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pūraṇa-Kassapa: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Pūraṇa-Kāśyapa] 富蘭迦葉 [六師外道の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Pūreti: {'def': '[Caus. of pṛ, pṛṇāti to fill, intrs. pūryate, cp. Lat. pleo; Gr. pi/m-plhmi, plήqw, polu/Q much, Goth. filu= Ger. viel; Ohg. folc=folk] 1. to fill (with=Gen. or Instr.) S.I,173; Sn.30, 305; J.I,50 (pāyāsassa), 347; II,112 (pret. pūrayittha); IV,272 (sagga-padaṁ pūrayiṁsu filled with deva world); DhA.II,82 (sakaṭāni ratanehi); IV,200 (pattaṁ); PvA.100 (bhaṇḍassa), 145 (suvaṇṇassa). -- 2. to fulfil DhA.I,68. -- 3. (Caus.) to make fill Vism.I 37 (lakāraṁ). -- pp. puṇṇa. See also pari°. Caus. II. pūrāpeti to cause to fill S.II,259: J.I,99. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pūr充满+e；‹ caus. of pūrati ‹ pūr；梵prṇa(ā)ti ‹pr), 使充满，使填充，使实践，使完成，使圆满。【过】pūresi。【过分】pūrita。【现分】pūrenta, pūrayamāna。【独】pūretvā。【不】pūretuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pūr + e), 填充，实践，完成。【过】 pūresi。【过分】 pūrita。【现分】 pūrenta。【独】 pūretvā。【不】 pūretuŋ。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pūrita: {'def': '[pp. of pūreti] filled with (-°), full Pv.II,120 (=paripuṇṇa PvA.77); PvA.134. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūrāpeti: {'def': '(pūreti‘填充’的【使】), 使填充。【过】pūrāpesi。【过分】pūrāpita。【独】pūrāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pūti: {'def': 'pūtika, 【形】腐烂的，腐败的，发恶臭的。 ~kāya, 【阳】藏满污秽的身体。 ~gandha, 【阳】臭味。 ~maccha, 【阳】臭鱼。 ~mukha, 【形】有烂口的。~mutta,【中】牛的小便。 ~latā,【阴】心叶青牛胆（见 Gaḷocī）。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'pūtika,【形】腐烂的，腐败的，发恶臭的。pūtikāya,【阳】藏满污秽的身体。pūtigandha,【阳】臭味。pūtimaccha,【阳】臭鱼。pūtimukha,【形】有烂口的。pūtimutta,【中】牛的小便。pūtilatā,【阴】心叶青牛胆(见 Gaḷocī)。pūtimuttabhesajja﹐陈弃药(尿疗法，据说，每日喝自己的尿100c.c.以上才有疗效)。pūtimuttaṁ bhesajjānaṁ, 尿药(误译︰陈弃药)︰AA.4.27./III,43.︰Pūtimuttanti yaṁkiñci muttaṁ. Yathā hi suvaṇṇavaṇṇopi kāyo pūtikāyoti vuccati, evaṁ abhinavampi muttaṁ pūtimuttameva.(牛的小便︰任何(牛)尿；金黄色身体的牛尿，正是这样新鲜的牛尿。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pūtika: {'def': '(adj.)=pūti M.I,449; S.V,51; A.I,261; J.I,164; II,275; Miln.252; DhA.I,321; III,111; VvA.76. --apūtika not rotten, fresh M.I,449; A.I,261; J.V,198; Miln.252. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pūva: {'def': '【阳】【中】蛋糕，面包。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. pūpa; with v for p] a cake, baked in a pan (kapalla) A.III,76; J.I,345 (kapalla° pan-cake), 347; III,10 (pakka°); Vv 136; 296 (=kapalla-pūva VvA.123); Pv IV.313 (=khajjaka PvA.251); Vism.108 (jāla° net-cake, cp. jāla-pūpa), 359 (pūvaṁ vyāpetvā, in comp.); VbhA.65, 255 (simile of woman going to bake a cake); KhA 56; DA.I,142; VvA.67, 73 (°surā, one of the 5 kinds of intoxication liquors, see surā); PvA.244. See also Vin. Texts I.39 (sweetmeats, sent as presents). (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】蛋糕，面包。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pūvika: {'def': '[fr. pūva] a cake-seller, confectioner Miln.331. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蛋糕经销商。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蛋糕经销商。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pūya: {'def': '【阳】脓。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】脓(pus)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

R: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十七个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 r。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十七个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 r。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rabhasa: {'def': '[rabh=labh, which see for etym. Cp. also Lat rabies. -- Dhtp 205 expl^s rabh (correctly) by ārambha & Dhtm 301 by rābhassa] wild, terrible, violent D.I,91, expl^d by “bahu-bhāṇin” at DA.I,256. There are several vv. ll. at this passage. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Racanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. rac] 1. arrangement (of flowers in a garland) VvA.354. -- 2. composition (of a book) Sdhp.619. (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】安排，论文。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】安排，论文。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Racayati: {'def': '(rac + aya), 安排，组成，准备。【过】 ~yi。【过分】 racita。【独】racitvā。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(rac组成+aya), 安排，组成，准备。【过】racayi。【过分】racita。【独】racitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Racchā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. rathyā. This the contracted form. The diaeretic forms are rathiyā & rathikā (q.v.)] a carriage road Vin.II,194; III,151; IV,271 (=rathiyā); V,205 (raccha-gata); J.I,425; V,335; VI,276 (in its relation to vīthi); Dāvs.V,48; PvA.24 (koṇa°). (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】街道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】街道。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Racita: {'def': '[pp. of racati] 1. arranged J.V,157 (su° in C. for samocita; v. l. sucarita). -- 2. strung (of flowers) Mhvs 34, 54. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rada: {'def': '【阳】长牙。例： dvirada = 两只长牙（象）。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'at ThA.257 in cpd. “sannivesa-visiṭṭha-rada-visesayutta” is not quite clear (“splitting”?). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】长牙。例：dvirada = 两只长牙(象)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Radati: {'def': '[rad: see etym. at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rado (“rase”). Given in meaning “vilekhana” at Dhtp 159 & Dhtm 220. Besides this it is given at Dhtm 224 in meaning “bhakkhana”] to scratch Dhtp 159; cp. rada & radana tooth Abhp 261. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rahada: {'def': '【阳】湖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】湖。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic hrada, with diæresis & metathesis *harada ›rahada; the other metathetic form of the same hrada is *draha›daha] a (deep) pond, a lake D.I,50 (°ṁ iva vippasannaṁ udānaṁ); S.I,169=183 (dhammo rahado sīla-tittho); Sn.721=Miln.414 (rahado pūro va paṇḍito); It.92 (rahado va nivāto), 114 (r. sa-ummi sāvaṭṭo sagaho); DhA.II,152. -- As udaka° at D.I,74, 84; A.III,25 (ubbhid-odako); Pug.47. -- On r. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rahas: {'def': '& Raho (nt.) [Vedic rahas. The Pāli word is restricted to the forms raho and rahā° (=*rahaḥ); a Loc. rahasi is mentioned by Childers, but not found in the Canon. -- To rahati] lonely place, solitude, loneliness; secrecy, privacy. -- 1. raho: occurring only as adv. “secretly, lonely, in secret,” either absolutely, e. g. S.I,46; Sn.388; Pv.II,7¹⁶ (opp. āvi openly); IV,1⁴⁰ (raho nisinna); Vism.201 (na raho karoti pāpāni: arahaṁ tena vuccati); or in cpds. e. g. °gata being in private, being alone D.I,134 (+paṭisallīna); Sn.p. 60. See also under paṭisallīna; °gama “secret convention, secret intercourse,” fig. a secret adviser J.VI,369 (after Kern, not found!); °vāda secret talk M.III,230. See also anu°. -- 2. rahā°, only in cpd. rahā-bhāva secrecy, in defⁿ of arahant at DA.I,146=Vism.201 (rahābhāvena ten’esa arahan ti). See also der. rāha-seyyaka. Note. Hardy’s reading yathā rahaṁ at Pv.II,9²³ & PvA.78 is not correct, it should be yath’ârahaṁ (cp. similarly pūj-âraha). In the same sense we would preferably read agg’āsan’ādi-arahānaṁ “of those who merit the first seat etc.” at J.I,217, although all MSS. have aggāsanādi-rahānaṁ, thus postulating a form raha=araha. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rahassa: {'def': '【中】秘密。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [Sk. rahasya] secret, private; nt. secrecy, secret Mhvs 35, 64 (vatvā rahassaṁ); Instr. rahassena (as adv.) secretly Mhvs 36, 80; Acc. rahassaṁ id. Pv IV. 1⁶⁵.

--kathā secret speech, whispered words J.I,411; II,6. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】秘密。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rahassaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. rahassa] secret Miln.91 (guyhaṁ na kātabbaṁ na rahassakaṁ). (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rahati: {'def': '[rah, def^d at Dhtp 339 & 632 by “cāga,” giving up, also at Dhtm 490 by “cāgasmiṁ,” 876 by cāga and gata] to leave, desert: see pp. rahita & der. rahas, rahassa. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rahita: {'def': '【形】剥夺的，没有的。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】剥夺的，没有的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of rah] 1. lonely, forsaken Th.2, 373 (gantum icchasi rahitaṁ bhiṁsanakaṁ mahāvanaṁ). -- 2. deprived of, without (-°) J.III,369 (buddhiyā rahitā sattā); DA.I,36 (avaṇṇa°); PvA.63 (bhoga°), 67 (ācāra°), 77 (gandha°). Note. samantarahita is to be divided as sam-antarahita. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raho: {'def': '【无】秘密地，在保密中，偏僻的地方。 ~gata, 【形】到偏僻的地方去的。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】秘密地，在保密中，偏僻的地方。rahogata,【形】到偏僻的地方去的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rahābhāva: {'def': '【阳】不是秘密的情形。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】不是秘密的情形。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rahāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. rahas; not corresponding to Sk. rahayati, C. of rahati to cause to leave] to be lonely, to wish to be alone M.II,119. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raja: {'def': '(梵rajas),【阳】【中】(mano-group), 灰尘，尘垢微细之物质)，污垢，花粉，杂质。据《俱舍论》卷十二载，尘又有微尘(梵 aṇu-rajas)、金尘(梵 loha-rajas，又作铜尘、铁尘)、水尘(梵 ab-rajas)、兔毛尘(梵 wawa-rajas)、羊毛尘(梵avi-rajas)、牛毛尘(梵go-rajas)、隙游尘(vātāyanacchidra-rajas。又作向游尘、日光尘)等分别，七个极微，合为一微尘；七个微尘，合为一金尘；七金尘合为一水尘；顺次类推。rajakkha,【形】(在【合】中) 弄脏的。rajakkhandha,【阳】一大堆灰尘。DhA.v.182./CS:pg.2.150-1.︰“Kiṁsu adhippatī rājā, kiṁsu rājā rajjissaro; Kathaṁsu virajo hoti, kathaṁ bāloti vuccatī”ti.(谁是主宰王？谁是染污王？怎样评论离染？怎样评论愚蠢？) “Chadvārādhippatī rājā, rajjamāno rajjissaro; Arajjaṁ virajo hoti, rajjaṁ bāloti vuccatī”ti.(主宰六门者称王。受染污者为染污王。无染者为离染。染者称为愚蠢。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano-组), 灰尘，污垢，花粉，弄脏，杂质。 ~kkha, 【形】(在【合】中) 弄脏的。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】一大堆灰尘。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rajaka: {'def': '[fr. rajati] a dyer (& “washerman” in the same function), more correctly “bleacher.” See remarks of Kern’s at Toev. II.45 on distinction of washerman & dyer. -- D.I,51 (in list of occupations); Vin.III,45; S.II,101=III,152 (in simile; comb^d with cittakāra, here perhaps “painter”?); S.III,131; J.V,186; VbhA.331 (in simile). (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】染工。《中阿含经》作：染家。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】洗衣人。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rajakkha: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [rajo+ending ka, in combⁿ *rajas-ka =rajakkha, like *puras-kata=purakkhata. The °ka belongs to the whole cpd.] only in combⁿ with appa° and mahā° i. e. having little (or no) and much defilement (or blemish of character) M.I,169; S.I,137 (here further comb^d with °jātika; cp. BSk. alpa-rajaskajātīya MVastu III,322); Vin.I,5 (id.); Ps.I,121; II,33, 195; Nd¹ 358; Nd² 235 No. 3 p²; Vbh.341; Miln.263; Vism.205; VbhA.458. (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rajakkhatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. rajakkha] is Kern’s (problematic) proposed reading (Toev. s. v.) for rājakhāda at Sn.831 (rājakhādāya phuṭṭho), which is however unjustified, as the original reading is well-attested and expl^d in the Niddesa as such. The term as proposed would not occur by itself either (like rajakkha, only --°). (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rajana: {'def': '【中】涂顔色，染料，染顔色。rajanakamma。【中】染。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. raj] colouring, dye D.I,110 (suddhaṁ vatthaṁ . . . sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭigaṇheyya); Vin.I,50=53 II.227; Vin.I,286 (6 dyes allowed to the bhikkhus: mūla°, khandha°, taca°, patta°, puppha°, phala°, or made of the root, the trunk, bark, leaf, flower, fruit of trees) Th.1, 965; S.II,101 (here either as f. or adj.); J.I,220 (washing?).

--kamma (the job of) dyeing J.I,118; Vism.65. --pacana boiling the dye Vism.389 (cp. rajana-pakka Vin. Texts II.49). --bhājana dye-vessel Vin.I,286. --sālā colouringworkshop, dyeing-hall Vism.65. (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】涂颜色，染料，染颜色。 ~kamma。【中】染。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rajani: {'def': '(f.) [fr. raj, cp. rajanīya 2] the night Dāvs.I,39; Abhp 69; PvA.205. (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rajanī: {'def': '【阴】夜晚。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】夜晚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rajanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of rajati] of the nature of rajas, i. e. leading to lust, apt to rouse excitement, enticing, lustful. -- 1. As Ep. of rūpa (vedanā saññā etc.) S.III,79; also at D.I,152 sq. (dibbāni rupāni passāmi piya-rūpāni kām’ûpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni; & the same with saddāni). In another formula (relating to the 5 kāmaguṇā): rūpā (saddā etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kām’ûpasaṁhitā rajanīyā D.I,245; M.I,85. The explⁿ of this passage at DA.I,311 is: r.=rāgajanaka. -- The expression rajanīyā dhammā “things (or thoughts) causing excitement” is contrasted with vimocaniyā dh. “that which leads to emancipation” at A.II,196. The same takes the places of lobhanīyā dhammā in combⁿ with dosanīyā & mohanīyā dh. at S.IV,307; A.II,120; III,169. Another pair is mentioned at Nett 18, viz. r. dhammā and pariyuṭṭhāniyā dh. ‹-› 2. In diff. connections it means simply “delightful, lovely” and is e. g. an Ep. of the night. So at Pv III,7¹, where the passage runs “yuvā rajanīye kāmaguṇehi sobhasi”: youthful thou shinest with the qualities of enjoyment in the enjoyable (night), which at PvA.205 is expl^d in a twofold manner viz. first as “ramaṇīyehi rāguppatti-hetu-bhūtehi” (viz. kāmagunehi), referring to a v. l. rajanīyehi, and then as “rajanī ti vā rattīsu, ye ti nipātamattaṁ” and “virocasi rattiyaṁ.” Thus rajanī is here taken directly as “night” (cp. Abhp 69). -- At Pv IV.6² the passage runs “pamattā rajaniyesu kām’assād’âbhinandhino” i. e. not heeding the enjoyment of the taste of craving at nights; here as m. & not f. -- The meaning “lovely” is appl^d to sounds at Th.1, 1233 (sarena rajanīyena); VvA.37 (r. nigghosa). (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】令人耽溺的，激情的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】诱骗的，激情的。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rajassāyatana: {'def': '染缸。SnA.v.406./II,381.︰Rajassāyatananti kambojādayo viya assādīnaṁ, rāgādirajassa uppattideso.(染缸︰如处在瓮等之中，诸味、染等杂烩生起的地方。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rajata: {'def': '【中】银。 ~paṭṭa, 银碟子，银片。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic rajata; see etym. under rajati] silver D.I,5 (expl^d at DA.I,78 as a general name for all coins except gold: kahāpaṇas etc.); S.I,92; Sn.962 (in simile; expl^d at Nd¹ 478 as jātarūpa), J.V,50; 416 (hema° gold & silver); Vv 35¹ (°hema-jāla); DhA.II,42 (°paṭṭa silver tablet or salver); IV,105 (°gabbha silver money box or cabinet for silver, alongside of kahāpaṇa-gabbha and suvaṇṇa°); VbhA.64 (expl^d as “kahāpaṇa”); PvA.95 (for rūpiya). (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】银。rajatapaṭṭa, 银碟子，银片。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rajati: {'def': '[raj & rañj to shine, to be coloured or light (-red); to Idg. *areg to be bright, as in Lat. argus, Gr. a)rgήs & a)rgόs light; Sk. arjuna (see ajjuna); to which also rajati silver=Lat. argentum, Gr. a)ρguros; Gallic Argento-ratum (N. of Strassburg); Oir argat.] usually intrs. rajjati (q.v.). As rajitabba (grd.) in meaning “to be bleached” (dhovitabba+) only in meaning “bleach” (as compared with dhovati clean, & vijaṭeti to disentangle, smoothe) Vin.III,235 (ppr. fr. pl. dhovantiyo rajantiyo etc.); J.I,8 (rajitabba, grd.; dhovitabba+). -- Somehow it is difficult to distinguish between the meanings “bleach” and “dye” (cp. rajaka), in some comb^ns with dhovati it clearly means “dye,” as at Vin.I,50 (forms: rajati, rajitabba, rajiyetha 3 sg. Pot. Med.); Vism.65 (forms: rajitvā, rajitabba, rajituṁ). -- Another grd. rajanīya in diff. meaning (see sep.). Caus. rajeti to paint, colour Th.1, 1155 (inf. rajetave: (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 204, 1. a). Caus. also rañjeti (see under rañjati). Med. Pass. rajjati (q. v.). -- Caus. II. rajāpeti to cause to be bleached Vin.III,206 (dhovāpeyya rajāpeyya ākoṭāpeyya), 235 (dhovapeti r. vijaṭāpeti); J.II,197 (ovaṭṭikaṁ sibbāpetvā rajāpetvā). (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(raj+a), 染。【过】raji。【独】rajitvā。【义】rajitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(raj + a), 染。【过】 raji。【独】 rajitvā。【潜】 rajitabba。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(rāj + a), 照耀。【过】 rāji。【过分】 rājita。【现分】 rajamāna。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rajja: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. rājya, fr. rāj] kingship, royalty, kingdom, empire; reign, throne; (fig.) sovereignty A.III,300 (°ṁ kāreti); Sn.114, 553 (°ṁ kāreti to reign); J.I,57; 64 (ekarattena tīṇi rajjāni atikkamma; 3 kingdoms); III,170 (°ṁ amaccānaṁ niyyādetvā), 199 (dukkhaseyyaṁ api rajjaṁ pi kāraye); IV,96, 105, 393 (nava rajja new kingship, newly (or lately) crowned king); VI,4 (rajjato me sussitvā maraṇam eva seyyo: death by withering is better than kingship); VvA.314 (=J.I,64 as above); PvA.73 sq.; Mhvs 10, 52 (rājā rajjaṁ akārayi). --cakkavatti° rule of a universal king DhA.III,191; deva° reign amongst gods KhA 227; padesa° local sovereignty It.15; Kh VIII,12 (cp. KhA 227).

--siri-dāyikā (devatā) (goddess) giving success to the empire DhA.II,17. --sīma border of the empire Vism.121. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】王国，君主身份。 ~siri, 【阴】主权。 ~sīmā, 【阴】国界。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】王国，君主身份。rajjasiri,【阴】主权。rajjasīmā,【阴】国界。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rajjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rajjati] defilement DA.I,195. Cp. muyhana. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】弄脏，污秽。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】弄脏，污秽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rajjati: {'def': '[cp. Sk. rajyati, raj or rañj, Med. of rajati] to be excited, attached to (Loc.), to find pleasure in S.IV,74 (na so rajjati rūpesu; =viratta-citta); Sn.160, 813 (contrasted with virajjati); Ps.I,58, 77 sq., 130, 178; Nd¹ 138; Miln.386 (rajjasi rajanīyesu etc.: in combⁿ with dosa & moha or derivations, representing rāga or lobha, cp. lobhanīya); VbhA.11. -- ppr. rajjamāna PvA.3; Pot. rajjeyya Miln.280 (kampeyya+); grd. rajjitabba Miln.386 (rajanīyesu r.; with dussanīyesu and muyhanīyesu; followed by kampitabba); fut. rajjissati DhsA.194; aor. arañji Vin.I,36=J.I,83 (na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiṁ). -- pp. ratta. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(raj +ya), 寻乐趣，执著於。【过】rajji。【过分】ratta。【现分】rajjanta。【独】rajjitvā。So bhave na rajjati, sambhave na rajjati﹐彼不染於生存，不染於出生(有乐不染，合会不著)。virattacitto, 心无执著(S.35.95.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(raj + ya), 寻乐趣，执着于。【过】 rajji。【过分】 ratta。【现分】 rajjanta。【独】 rajjitvā。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rajju: {'def': '【阴】粗绳(cord)，绳索(rope)。rajjugāhaka,【阳】土地测量员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic rajju, cp. Lat. restis rope, Lith. r&etilde; ƶgis wicker, basket] a cord, line, rope S.II,128; Vin.II,120, 148 (āviñchana°); Nd² 304; J.I,464, 483 (fisherman’s line); V,173; Mhvs 10, 61; DhA.IV,54; VbhA.163; KhA 57; VvA.207; Sdhp.148, 153.

--kāra rope-maker Miln.331. --gāhaka “rope-holder,” (king’s) land-surveyor J.II,367=DhA.IV,88 (see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 97). (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】粗绳，绳索。 ~gāhaka, 【阳】土地测量员。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rajjuka: {'def': '[rajju+ka] 1. a rope, line J.I,164 (bandhana°); ThA.257. -- 2.=rajjugāhaka, king’s land surveyor J.II,367. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rajo: {'def': '(rajas) & Raja (nt.) [raj, see rajati & rañjati. Vedic rajaḥ meaning: (a) space, as region of mist & cloud, similar to antarīksa, (b) a kind of (shiny) metal (cp. rajata); see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 55]. A Forms. Both rajo & rajaṁ occur as noun & Acc. sg., e. g. rajo at D.II,19; Sn.207, 334; Dhs.617; rajaṁ at Sn.275; It.83; once (in verse) rajo occurs as m, viz. Sn.662. The other cases are formed from the a-stem only, e. g. rajassa Sn.406; pl. rajāni Sn.517, 974. In compⁿ we find both forms, viz. (1) rajas either in visarga form rajah, as (a) rajo-, (b) raja- and (c) rajā- (stressed), or in s-form (d) rajas-; (2) raja-, appearing apostrophied as (e) raj-. B Meanings. (1) (lit.) dust, dirt; usually wet, staining dust D.II,19 (tiṇa+); Sn.662=PvA.116 (sukhumo rajo paṭivātaṁ khitto); It.83; Dhs.617 (dhūmo+). adj. rāja°: in sa° & a° vāta Vin.II,209; Vism.31. The meaning “pollen” [Sk. raja, m.] may be seen in “raja-missakaṁ rasaṁ” at DhA.I,375. ‹-› 2. (fig.) stain, dirt, defilement, impurity. Thus taken conventionally by the P. commentators as the 3--fold blemish of man’s character: rāga, dosa, moha, e. g. Nd¹ 505; SnA 255; DhA.III,485; or as kilesa-raja at SnA 479. -- Sn.207 (niketā jāyate rajo), 334, 665 (rajaṁ ākirasi, metaph.), 974 (pañca rajāni loke, viz. the excitement caused by the 5 bāhirāni āyatanāni Nd¹ 505. Also in stanza rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati (with dosa & moha the same) Nd¹ 505=Nd² 590 (slightly diff.)=J.I,117=Vism.388, cp. Divy 491 with interesting variation. -- adj. raja° in two phrases apagata° VvA.236 & vigata° Nd¹ 505 ≈ free from defilement. -- On raja in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 126. Cp. vi°. -- C. Compounds. (a) rajo-: °jalla dust and (wet) dirt, muddy dirt D.II,18; Vin.III,70; J.IV,322; V,241; Miln.133, 195, 258, 410; SnA 248, 291. --jallika living in dirty mud, designation of a class of ascetics M.I,281; J.I,390. --dhātu “dust-element” (doubtful trslⁿ) D.I,54, which DA.I,163 expl^ns as “raja-okiṇṇa-ṭṭhānāni,” i. e. dusty places. Dial. trsl. “places where dust accumulates,” Franke, Dīgha p. 57 as “Staubiges” but rightly sees a deeper, speculative meaning in the expression (Sāṅkhya doctrine of rajas?). --mala dust & dirt J.I,24. --vajalla [this expression is difficult to explain. It may simply be a condensed phrase rajo’va jalla, or a redupl. cpd. rajo+avajalla, which was spelt raj-ovajalla for ava° because of rajo, or represents a contamination of raj-avajalla and raj-ojalla, or it is a metric diaeresis of rajo-jalla] dust and dirt Dh.141 (=kaddama-limpan’ākārena sarīre sannicita-rajo DhA.III,77). --haraṇa dirt-taking, cleaning; wet rag, floor-cloth, duster Vin.II,291; A.IV,376; J.I,117; DhA.I,245. -- (b) raja-: --reṇu dirt and dust J.IV,362; --vaḍḍhana indulgence in or increase of defilement Th.2, 343 (“fleshly lusts” trsl.); ThA.240 (=rāga-raj’ādi-saṁvaḍḍhana). -- (c) rajā-: °patha dusty place, dustiness, dust-hole D.I,62, 250; S.II,219; DA.I,180 (here taken metaphorically: rāga-raj’ādīnaṁ uṭṭhāna-ṭṭhānaṁ). -- (d) rajas-: °sira with dusty head Sn.980; J.IV,184, 362, 371. See paṅkadanta. -- (e) raj-: --°agga a heap of dust, dirt J.V,187 (=rajakkhandha C.); fig.=kilesa Pug.65, 68 (here perhaps nt. of a distorted rajakkha? So Kern, Toev. s. v.). --°upavāhana taking away the dust (or dirt) Sn.391, 392. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rajoharaṇa: {'def': '【中】去除污垢，掸子。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】去除污垢，掸子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rajojalla: {'def': '【中】多泥的污垢。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】多泥的污垢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rakkha: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. base rakkh] guarding or to be guarded; -- (a) act.: dhamma° guardian of righteousness or truth Miln.344. -- (b) pass.: in cpd. dū°, v. l. du° hard to guard DhA.I,295. °kathā, s. l. rukkha-°, warding talk ThA.1, in Brethren, 185, cp. note 416. (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rakkhaka: {'def': '【阳】保卫者，观察者，看守者，守卫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. rakkha] 1. guarding, protecting, watching, taking care PvA.7; f. °ikā (dāsī) DhA.IV,103 (a servant watching the house). -- 2. observing, keeping J.I,205 (sīla°). -- 3. a cultivator J.II,110. -- 4. a sentry J.I,332. (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】保卫者，观察者，看守者，守卫。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rakkhana: {'def': 'rakkhaṇa﹐【中】保护，遵守。rakkhanaka,【形】观察的，保卫的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】保护，遵守。 ~ka, 【形】观察的，保卫的。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rakkh] 1. keeping, protection, guarding Nett 41; Mhvs 35, 72 (rahassa°-atthāya so that he should keep the secret); PvA.7. -- 2. observance, keeping VvA.71 (uposatha-sīla°); PvA.102 (sīla°), 210 (uposatha°). (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rakkhanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. rakkhana] observing, keeping; one who observes J.I,228 (pañca-sīla°; so read for rakkhānaka). (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rakkhasa: {'def': '【阳】罗刹，鬼，魔鬼。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic rakṣa, either fr. rakṣ to injure, or more likely fr. rakṣ to protect or ward off (see details at Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 162--164)] a kind of harmful (nocturnal) demon, usually making the water its haunt and devouring men Th.1, 931; Sn.310 (Asura°); J.I,127 (daka°=udaka°), 170 (id.); VI,469 (id.); DhA.I,367 (°pariggahita-pokkharaṇī); III,74 (udaka°); Sdhp.189, 313, 366. -- f. rakkhasī J.III,147 (r. pajā); Mhvs 12, 45 (rudda°, coming out of the ocean). (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵raksas, rāksasa),【阳】罗刹，鬼，魔鬼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rakkhati: {'def': '(rakkh + a), 保护，保卫，观察，保持。【过】 rakkhi。【过分】~khita。【现分】 ~khanta。【独】 ~khitvā。【潜】 ~khitabba。(p263)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic raksati, rakṣ to Idg. *ark (cp. Lat. arceo etc.) in enlarged form *aleq=Gr. a)lέcw to protect (Alexander!); a)lkή strength; Ags. ealgian to protect, Goth. alhs=Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also base *areq in P. aggala. The Dhtp 18 expl^s rakkh by “pālana”] 1. to protect, shelter, save, preserve Sn.220; J.IV,255 (maṁ rakkheyyātha); VI,589 (=pāleti); Pv.II,9⁴³ (dhanaṁ); Miln.166 (rukkhaṁ), 280 (attānaṁ rakkheyya save himself); PvA.7. -- grd. rakkhiya to be protected Mhvs 33, 45. Neg. arakkhiya & arakkheyya (in meaning 3) see separately. -- Pass. ppr. rakkhiyamāna J.I,140. -- 2. to observe, guard, take care of, control (with ref. to cittaṁ the heart, and sīlaṁ good character or morals) It.67 (sīlaṁ); DhA.I,295 (cittaṁ rakkha, equivalent with cittaṁ dama), 397 (ācāraṁ); J.IV,255 (vācaṁ); VvA.59 (sīlāni rakkhi); PvA.66 (sīlaṁ rakkhatha, uposathaṁ karotha). -- 3. to keep (a) secret, to put away, to guard against (i. e. to keep away from) Sn.702 (mano-padosaṁ rakkheyya); Miln.170 (vacīduccaritaṁ rakkheyya). -- pp. rakkhita. See also parīpāleti & parirakkhati. (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(rakkh保护+a), 保护，保卫，观察，保持。【过】rakkhi。【过分】rakkhita。【现分】rakkhanta。【独】rakkhitvā。【义】rakkhitabba。Bhavatu sabbamaṅgalaṁ rakkhantu sabbadevatā.(希望你有诸吉祥，希望诸天守护你。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rakkhita: {'def': '[pp. of rakkhati] guarded, protected, saved S.IV,112 (rakkhitena kāyena, rakkhitāya vācāya etc.); A.I,7 (cittaṁ r.); Sn.288 (dhamma°), 315 (gottā°); VvA.72 (mātu°, pitu° etc.); PvA.61, 130. -- Note. rakkhitaṁ karoti at Mhvs 28, 43 Childers trsl^s “take under protection,” but Geiger reads rakkhike and trsl^s “appoint as watchers.”

--atta one who guards his character S.I,154; J.I,412; SnA 324. --indriya guarding one’s senses Sn.697. --mānasāna guarding one’s mind Sn.63 (=gopitamānasāno-rakkhita-citto Nd² 535). (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(rakkhati 的【过分】), 已保护，已观察。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(rakkhati 的【过分】), 已保护，已观察。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rakkhiya: {'def': '【形】被保护的。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】被保护的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rakkhā: {'def': '【阴】保护，安全，庇护所。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】保护，安全，庇护所。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [verb-noun fr. rakkh] shelter, protection, care A.II,73 (+parittā); Mhvs 25, 3; J.I,140 (bahūhi rakkhāhi rakkhiyamāna); PvA.198 (°ṁ saṁvidahati). Often in combⁿ rakkhā+āvaraṇa (+gutti) shelter & defence, e. g. at Vin.II,194; D.I,61 (dhammikaṁ r.-v.‹-› guttiṁ saṁvidaheyyāma); M.II,101; J.IV,292. -- Cp. gorakkhā. -- Note. rakkhā at J.III,144 is an old misreading for rukkhā. (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rama: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. ram] delighting, enjoyable; only in cpd. dū° (=duḥ) difficult to enjoy, not fit for pleasures; as nt. absence of enjoyment Dh.87=S.V,24; and mano° gladdening the mind (q. v.). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ramana: {'def': '【中】享乐。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】享乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ramanī: {'def': '【阴】女人。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ramanīya: {'def': '【形】令人愉快的，迷人的，娇媚的。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】令人愉快的，迷人的，娇媚的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ramati: {'def': '[ram; def^d by Dhtp 224 & Dhtm 318 by “kīḷāyaṁ”] 1. to enjoy oneself, to delight in; to sport, find amusement in (Loc.) S.I,179; Vin 197 (ariyo na r. pāpe); Sn.985 (jhāne); Dh.79 (ariya-ppavedite dhamme sadā r. paṇḍito); subj. 1^st pl. ramāmase Th.2, 370 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 126); med. 1^st sg. rame J.V,363; imper. rama Pv.II,12²⁰ (r. deva mayā saha; better with v. l. as ramma); -- fut. ramissati PvA.153. -- ger. ramma Pv.II,12²⁰ (v. l. for rama). grd. ramma & ramanīya (q. v.). -- pp. rata. -- Caus. I. rameti to give pleasure to, to please, to fondle Th.1, 13; J.V,204; VI,3 (pp. ramayamāna); Miln.313. -- pp. ramita (q. v.). ‹-› Caus. II. ramāpeti to enjoy oneself J.VI,114. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ram乐於+a), 使高兴，过得快乐(to enjoy oneself, to delight in; to sport, find amusement in)。【过】rami。【过分】rata。【现分】ramanta, ramamāna。【独】ramitvā。【不】ramituṁ。【使】rameti(制造欢乐气氛)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ram + a), 使高兴，过得快乐。【过】 rami。【过分】 rata。【现分】ramanta, ~māna。【独】 ramitvā。【不】 ramituŋ。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ramaṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ramati; cp. Sk. ramaṇa] pleasing, charming, delightful DhA.II,202 (°ṭṭhāna). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ramaṇaka: {'def': '(adj.)=ramaṇa J.III,207. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ramaṇīya: {'def': '(& °nīya) (adj.) [grd. of ramati] delightful, pleasing, charming, pleasant, beautiful D.I,47 (°ṇīyā dosinā ratti, cp. DA.I,141); Sn.1013; Mhvs 15, 69 (ṇ); PvA.42, 51 (explⁿ for rucira). As ramaṇeyya at S.I,233. Cp. rāmaṇeyya(ka). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rambati: {'def': '(& lambati) [lamb] to hang down. Both forms are given with meaning “avasaṁsane” at Dhtp 198 and Dhtm 283. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rambhā: {'def': '【阴】芭蕉（见 Moca）。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】芭蕉(plantain tree﹐见 Moca)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. rambhā] a plantain or banana tree Abhp 589. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ramita: {'def': '[pp. of rameti] having enjoyed, enjoying, taking delight in, amusing oneself with (Loc. or saha) Sn.709 (vanante r. siyā); Dh.305 (id.=abhirata DhA.III,472); Pv.II,12²¹ (‘mhi tayā saha). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ramma: {'def': '【形】迷人的，可享受的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】迷人的，可享受的。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of ramati] enjoyable, charming, beautiful Sn.305; ThA.71 (v. 30); Mhvs 1, 73; 14, 47; Sdhp.248, 512. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rammaka: {'def': '【阳】然玛尬月(月份名，见 Citta，2月16至3月15)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】然玛尬月（月份名，见 Citta）。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk ramyaka] N. of the month Chaitra J.V,63. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Randha: {'def': '¹ [for Sk. raddha, pp. of randhati 2] cooked J.V,505; VI,24; Miln.107. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [Sk. randhra, fr. randhati 1; the P. form viâ *randdha: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 581] opening, cleft, open spot; flaw, defect, weak spot A.IV,25; Sn.255, 826 randhamesin looking for somebody’s weak spot; cp. Nd¹ 165 (“virandham° aparandham° khalitam° gaḷitam° vivaram-esī ti”); J.II,53; III,192; SnA 393 (+vivara); DhA.III,376, 377 (°gavesita). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】开口处，裂缝，弱点，过失。 ~gavesī, 【阳】挑剔者，寻弱点的人。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】开口处，裂缝，弱点，过失。randhagavesī,【阳】挑剔者，寻弱点的人。randhagavesita﹐挑剔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Randhaka: {'def': '【阳】厨子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】厨子。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. randhati 2] one who cooks, cooking, a cook J.IV,431 (bhatta°). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Randhana: {'def': '【中】烹饪，煮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】烹饪，煮。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Randhati: {'def': '[radh or randh, differentiated in Pāli to 2 meanings & 2 verbs according to Dhtm: “hiṁsāyaṁ” (148), and “pāke” (827). In the former sense given as raṇḍ, in the latter randh. The root is freq. in the Vedas, in meaning 1. It belongs perhaps to Ags. rendan to rend: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s, v. lumbus] to be or make subject to, (intrs.) to be in one’s power; (trs.) to harass, oppress, vex, hurt (mostly Caus. randheti=Sk. randhayati). Only in Imper. randhehi J.I,332, and in Prohib. mā randhayi J.V,121, and pl. mā randhayuṁ Dh.248 (=mā randhantu mā mathantu DhA.III,357). See also randha². -- 2. to cook (cp. Sk. randhi & randhana) Miln.107 (bhojanaṁ randheyya). -- pp. randha¹. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Randheti: {'def': '(randh+e), 煮沸，烹调。【过】randhesi。【过分】randhita。【独】randhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(randh + e), 煮沸，烹调。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dhita。【独】~dhetvā。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rapati: {'def': '[rap] to chatter, whisper Dhtp 187 (“vacane”); Dhtm 266 (“akkose”). See also lapati. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rasa: {'def': '² (-°) is a dial. form of °dasa ten, and occurs in Classic Pāli only in the numerals for 13 (terasa), 15 (paṇṇa-rasa, pannarasa), 17 (sattarasa) & 18 (aṭṭhārasa, late). The Prk. has gone further: see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 245. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】味道，汁，滋味，水银。 ~gga, 【中】最好的味道。 ~ñjana, 【中】洗眼剂。 ~taṇhā, 【阴】渴望味道。 ~vatī, 【阴】厨房。 ~haraṇī, 【阴】味蕾。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic rasa; with Lat. ros “dew,” Lith. rasā id., and Av Ranhā N. of a river, to Idg. *eres to flow, as in Sk. arṣati, Gr. a]/yorros (to r(έw); also Sk. ṛṣabha: see usabha¹. -- Dhtp 325 defines as “assādane” 629 as “assāda-snehanesu”; Dhtm 451 as “assāde.” -- The decl. is usually as regular a-stem, but a secondary Instr. fr. an s-stem is to be found in rasasā by taste A.II,63; J.III,328) that which is connected with the sense of taste. The defⁿ given at Vism.447 is as follows: “jivhā-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇo raso, jivhā-viññāṇassa visaya-bhāvo raso, tass’eva gocara-paccupaṭṭhāno, mūla-raso khandha-raso ti ādinā nayena anekavidho,” i. e. rasa is physiologically & psychologically peculiar to the tongue (sense-object & sense-perception), and also consists as a manifold object in extractions from roots, trunk etc. (see next). -- The conventional encyclopædic defⁿ of rasa at Nd¹ 240; Nd² 540, Dhs.629 gives taste according to: (a) the 6--fold objective source as mūla-rasa, khandha°, taca°, patta°, puppha°, phala°, or taste (i. e. juice, liquid) of root, trunk, bark, leaf, flower & fruit; and -- (b) the 12--fold subjective (physiological) sense-perception as ambila, madhura, tittika, kaṭuka loṇika, khārika, lambila (Miln.56: ambila), kasāva; sādu, asādu, sīta, uṇha, or sour, sweet, bitter, pungent, salt, alkaline, sour, astringent; pleasant, unpleasant, cold & hot. Miln.56 has the foll.: ambila, lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura. -- 1. juice [as applied in the Veda to the Soma juice], e.g. in the foll. comb^ns: ucchu° of sugar cane, extract of sugar, cane syrup Vin.I,246; VvA.180; patta° & puppha° of leaf & flower Vin.I,246; madhura° of honey PvA.119. -- 2. taste as (objective) quality, the sense-object of taste (cp. above def^ns). In the list of the āyatanas, or senses with their complementary sense-objects (sentient and sensed) rasa occupies the 4^th place, following upon gandha. It is stated that one tastes (or “senses”) taste with the tongue (no reference to palate): jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā (or viññeyya). See also āyatana 3 and rūpa. -- M.III,55 (jivhā-viññeyya r.), 267; D.III,244, 250; Sn.387; Dhs.609; PvA.50 (vaṇṇagandha-rasa-sampanna bhojana: see below 5). -- 3. sense of taste, as quality & personal accomplishment. Thus in the list of senses marking superiority (the 10 ādhipateyyas or ṭhāṇas), similar to rasa as special distinction of the Mahāpurisa (see cpd. ras-agga) S.IV,275 =Pv.II,9⁵⁸; A.IV,242. -- 4. object or act of enjoyment, sensual stimulus, material enjoyment, pleasure (usually in pl.) Sn.65 (rasesu gedha, see materialistic exegesis at Nd² 540), 854 (rase na anugijjhati; perhaps better rasesu, as SnA); A.III,237 (puriso agga°-parititto: perhaps to No. 2). -- 5. flavour and its substance (or substratum), e. g. soup VvA.243 (kakkaṭaka° crabsoup), cp. S.V,149, where 8 soup flavours are given (ambila, tittaka, kaṭuka, madhura, khārika, akhārika, loṇika, aloṇika); Pv.II,1¹⁵ (aneka-rasa-vyañjana “with exceptionally flavoured sauce”); J.V,459, 465. gorasa “flavour of cow, i. e. produce of cow: see under go. Also metaphorically: “flavour, relish, pleasure”: Sn.257 (pariveka°, dhamma-pīṭi°, cp. SnA 299 “assād’aṭṭhena” i. e. tastiness); PvA.287 (vimutti° relish of salvation). So also as attha°, dhamma°, vimutti° Ps.II,89. -- 6. (in grammar & style) essential property, elegance, brightness; in dramatic art “sentiment” (flavour) (see Childers s. v. naṭya-rasa) Miln.340 (with opamma and lakkhaṇa: perhaps to No. 7); PvA.122 (°rasa as ending in Np. Aṅgīrasa, expl^d as jutiyā adhivacanaṁ, “ i. e. brightness, excellency). -- 7. at t. t. in philosophy “essential property” (Expos. 84), comb^d with lakkhaṇa etc. (cp. Cpd. 13, 213), either kicca° function or sampatti° property DhsA.63, 249; Vism.8, 448; Miln.148. -- 8. fine substance, semi-solid semiliquid substance, extract, delicacy, fineness, dust. Thus in paṭhavī° “essence of earth,” humus S.I,134 (trslⁿ “taste of earth,” rather abstract); or rasapaṭhavī earth as dust or in great fineness, “primitive earth” (before taking solid shape) D.III,86 sq. (trsl. “savoury earth,” not quite clear), opp. to bhūmipappaṭaka; Vism.418; pabbata-rasa mountain extract, rock-substance J.III,55; suvaṇṇa° gold dust J.I,93. ‹-› 9. (adj. --°) tasting Vv 16¹¹ (Amatarasā f.=nibbānarasāvinī VvA.85).

--agga finest quality (of taste), only in further compⁿ with °aggita (ras-agga-s-aggita) most delicate sense trslⁿ Dial.) D.III,167, and °aggin (ras-agga-s-aggin, cp. MVastu II.306: rasa-ras’âgrin) of the best quality (of taste, cp. above 2), said of the Mahāpurisa D.II,18= III,144 (cp. trslⁿ Dial. II.15 “his taste is supremely acute”). The phrase & its wording are still a little doubtful. Childers gives etym. of rasaggas-aggin as rasa-ggas-aggin, ggas representing gras to swallow (not otherwise found in Pāli!), and expl^s the BSk. ras’âgrin as a distortion of the P. form. --añjana a sort of ointment (among 5 kinds), “vitriol” (Rh. D.) Vin.I,203. --âda enjoying the objects of taste M.III,168. --āyatana the sphere of taste D.III,243, 290; Dhs.629, 653, 1195 (insert after gandha°, see Dhs. trsl. 319). --ārammaṇa object of taste Dhs.12, 147, 157. --āsā craving for tastes Dhs.1059. --garuka bent on enjoyment SnA 107. --taṇhā thirst for taste, lust of sensual enjoyment D.III,244, 280; J.V,293; Dhs.1059; DhA.IV,196. --saññā perception of tastes D.III,244 (where also °sañcetanā). --haraṇī (f.) [ph. °haraṇiyo, in compⁿ haraṇi°] taste-conductor, taste-receiver; the salivary canals of the mouth or the nerves of sensation; these are in later literature given as numbering 7000, e. g. at J.V,293 (khobhetvā phari); DhA.I,134 (anuphari); KhA 51 (only as 7!); SnA 107 (paṭhama-kabaḷe mukhe pakkhitta-matte satta rasa-haraṇi-sahassāni amaten’eva phutāni ahesuṁ). Older passages are: Vin.II,137; D.III,167 (referring to the Mahāpurisa: “sampajjasā r-haranī susaṇṭhitā,” trslⁿ: erect taste-bearers planted well [in throat]). (Page 566)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.味道，汁，滋味，水银。rasagga,【中】最好的味道。rasajana,【中】洗眼剂。rasataṇhā,【阴】渴望味道。rasavatī,【阴】厨房。rasaharaṇī,【阴】味蕾。rasāyanika﹐化学家(chemist)。2.作用。DhsA.(CS:p.106)：Kiccaṁ vā sampatti vā raso nāma.(作(用)或达成，称为’作用’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rasaka: {'def': '【阳】厨子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】厨子。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. rasa, cp. Classic Sk. rasaka] a cook J.V,460, 461, 507. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rasanā: {'def': '【阴】女人的腰带。见 mekhalā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女人的腰带。见 mekhalā。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rasati: {'def': '[ras] to shout, howl J.II,407 (vv. ll. rayati, vasati; C. expl^s as “nadati”)=IV.346 (v. l. sarati). (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rasatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rasa] taste, sweetness SnA 299. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rasavatī: {'def': '(f.) [rasa+vant] “possessing flavours” i. e. a kitchen Vin.I,140. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rasmi: {'def': '【阴】绳索，繮绳，光线。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】绳索，缰绳，光线。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see raṁsi. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rassa: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. hrasva: Geiger, P.Gr. § 49². The Prk. forms are rahassa & hassa: Pischel § 354] short (opp. dīgha) D.I,193 (dīghā vā r. vā majjhimā ti vā), 223 (in contrast with d.); Sn.633; Dh.409; J.I,356; Dhs.617; Vism.272 (def.); DhA.IV,184. -- Cp. ati°.

--ādesa reduction of the determination (here of vowel in ending) J.III,489. --sarīra (adj.) dwarfish, stunted J.I,356. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】短的，像侏儒的，矮小的。rassatta,【中】短。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】短的，像侏儒的，矮小的。 ~tta, 【中】短。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rassatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rassa] shortness, reduction (of vowel) DhsA.149. (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rasāvin: {'def': '(adj. [fr. rasa] tasting VvA.85 (nibbāna°). (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rasīyati: {'def': '[Pass.-Demon.-formation fr. rasa] to find taste or satisfaction in (Gen.), to delight in, to be pleased A.IV,387 (bhāsitassa), 388 (C.: tussati, see p. 470). (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rata: {'def': '[pp. of ramati] delighting in (Loc. or --°), intent on, devoted to S.IV,117 (dhamme jhāne), 389 sq. (bhava° etc.); Sn.54 (saṅgaṇika°) 212, 250, 327, 330 (dhamme), 461 (yaññe), 737 (upasame); Mhvs. 1, 44 (mahākāruṇiko Satthā sabba-loka-hite rato); 32, 84 (rato puññe); PvA.3, 12, 19 (°mānasa). (Page 563)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ramati 的【过分】), 已高兴，已献身。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ramati 的【过分】), 已高兴，已献身。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ratana: {'def': '【中】1.珠宝，宝贵的事物。2.腕尺。ratanattaya,【中】三宝(即：佛、法、僧)。ratanavara,【中】最好的珠宝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [most likely=Sk. aratni: see ratani] a linear measure (which Abhp p. 23 gives as equal to 12 aṅgula, or 7 ratanas=1 yaṭṭhi: see Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 335. The same is given by Bdhgh. at VbhA.343: dve vidatthiyo ratanaṁ; satta r. yaṭṭhi) J.V,36 (vīsaṁr-sataṁ); VI,401 (°mattaṁ); VvA.321 (so given by Hardy in Index as “measure of length,” but to be taken as ratana¹, as indicated clearly by context & C.); Miln.282 (satta-patiṭṭhito aṭṭha-ratan’ubbedho nava-ratan’āyāma-pariṇāho pāsādiko dassanīyo Uposatho nāgarājā: alluding to ratana¹ 2!). (Page 563)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 珠宝，宝贵的事物。 2. 腕尺。 ~ttaya, 【中】三宝（即：佛、法、僧）。 ~vara, 【中】最好的珠宝。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Vedic ratna, gift; the BSk. form is ratna (Divy 26) as well as ratana (AvŚ II.199)] 1. (lit.) a gem, jewel VvA.321 (not=ratana², as Hardy in Index); PvA.53 (nānāvidhāni). -- The 7 ratanas are enum^d under veḷuriya (Miln.267). They are (the precious minerals) suvaṇṇa, rajata, muttā, maṇi, veḷuriya, vajira, pavāḷa. (So at Abhp 490.) These 7 are said to be used in the outfit of a ship to give it more splendour: J.II,112. The 7 (unspecified) are mentioned at Th.2, 487 (satta ratanāni vasseyya vuṭṭhimā “all seven kinds of gems”); and at DhA.I,274, where it is said of a ratana-maṇḍapa that in it there were raised flags “sattaratana-mayā.” On ratana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1909, 127. -- 2. (fig.) treasure, gem of (-°) Sn.836 (etādisaṁ r.=dibb’itthi-ratana SnA 544); Miln.262 (dussa° a very fine garment). -- Usually as a set of 7 valuables, belonging to the throne (the empire) of a (world-) king. Thus at D.II,16 sq.; of Mahā-Sudassana D.II,172 sq. They are enum^d singly as follows: the wheel (cakka) D.II,172 sq., the elephant (hatthi, called Uposatha) D.II,174, 187, 197; the horse (assa, Valāhaka) ibid.; the gem (maṇi) D.II,175, 187; the woman (itthi) ibid.; the treasurer (gahapati) D.II,176, 188; the adviser (pariṇāyaka) ibid. The same 7 are enum^d at D.I,89; Sn.p. 106; DA.I,250; also at J.IV,232, where their origins (homes) are given as: cakka° out of Cakkadaha; hatthi from the Uposatha-race; assa° from the clan of Valāhassarāja, maṇi° from Vepulla, and the last 3 without specification. See also remarks on gahapati. Kern, Toev. s. v. ratana suspects the latter to be originally “major domus” (cp. his attributes as “wealthy” at MVastu I.108). As to the exact meaning of pariṇāyaka he is doubtful, which mythical tradition has obscured. -- The 7 (moral) ratanas at S.II,217 & III,83 are probably the same as are given in detail at Miln.336, viz. the 5: sīla°, samādhi°, paññā°, vimutti°, vimutti-ñāṇadassana (also given under the collective name sīla-kkhandha or dhamma-kkhandha), to which are added the 2: paṭisambhidā° & bojjhaṅga°. These 7 are probably meant at PvA.66, where it is said that Sakka “endowed their house with the 7 jewels” (sattar.-bharitaṁ katvā). -- Very frequent is a Triad of Gems (ratana-ttaya), consisting of Dhamma, Saṅgha, Buddha, or the Doctrine, the Church and the Buddha [cp. BSk. ratna-traya Divy 481], e. g. Mhvs 5, 81; VbhA.284; VvA.123; PvA.1, 49, 141.

--ākara a pearl-mine, a mine of precious metals Th.1, 1049; J.II,414; VI,459; Dpvs.I,18. --kūṭa a jewelled top DhA.I,159. --paliveṭhana a wrapper for a gem or jewel Pug.34. --vara the best of gems Sn.683 (=vararatana-bhūta SnA 486). --sutta the Suttanta of the (3) Treasures (viz. Dhamma, Saṅgha, Buddha), representing Sutta Nipāta II.1 (P.T.S. ed. pp. 39--42), mentioned as a parittā at Vism.414 (with 4 others) and at Miln.150 (with 5 others), cp. KhA 63; SnA 201. (Page 563)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ratana-ttaya: {'def': '三宝', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Ratanaka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [ratana+ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.] characteristic of a gem, or a king’s treasure; in phrase aniggata-ratanake “When the treasure has not gone out” Vin.IV,160, where the chief queen is meant with “treasure.” (Page 563)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ratani: {'def': '[Sk. aratni “elbow” with apocope and diaeresis; given at Halāyudha 2, 381 as “a cubit, or measure from the elbow to the tip of the little finger.” The form ratni also occurs in Sk. The etym. is fr. Idg. *ole (to bend), cp. Av. ar∂pna elbow; Sk. arāla bent; of which enlarged bases *olen in Lat. ulna, ond *oleq in Lat. lacertus, Sk. lakutaḥ=P. laguḷa. See cognates in Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus] a cubit Miln.85 (aṭṭha rataniyo). (Page 563)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ratanika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ratana] a ratana in length J.I,7 (aḍḍha°); Miln.312 (aṭṭha°). (Page 563)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 有很多腕尺的长度或宽度。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 有很多腕尺的长度或宽度。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ratha: {'def': '¹ [Vedic ratha, Av. rapa, Lat. rota wheel, rotundus (“rotund” & round), Oir. roth=Ohg rad wheel, Lith. rãtas id.] a two-wheeled carriage, chariot (for riding, driving or fighting S.I,33 (ethically); A.IV,191 (horse & cart; diff. parts of a ratha); M.I,396; Sn.300, 654; Vism.593 (in its compⁿ of akkha, cakka, pañjara, īsā etc.); J.III,239 (passaddha° carriage slowing up); Th.2, 229 (caturassaṁ rathaṁ, i. e. a Vimāna); Mhvs 35, 42 (goṇā rathe yuttā); VvA.78 (500), 104, 267 (=Vimāna), PvA.74. --assatarī° a chariot drawn by a she-mule Vv 20⁸=43⁸; Pv.I,11¹; J.VI,355. -- Phussa-ratha state carriage J.III,238; VI,30 sq. See under ph. -- On ratha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127.

--atthara (rathatthara) a rug for a chariot D.I,7; Vin.I,192; II,163. --anīka array of chariots Vin.IV,108. --īsā carriage pole A.IV,191. --ûpatthara chariot or carriage cover D.I,103; DA.I,273. --esabha (ratha+ ṛṣabha, Sk. rathārṣabha) lord of charioteers. Ratha here in meaning of “charioteer”; Childers sees rathin in this cpd.; Trenckner, Notes 59, suggests distortion from rathe śubha. Dhpāla at PvA.163 clearly under‹-› stands it as ratha-=charioteer explaining “rathesu usabha-sadiso mahā-ratho ti attho”; as does Bdhgh. at SnA 321 (on Sn.303): “mahā-rathesu khattiyesu akampiy’aṭṭhena usabha-sadiso.” -- Sn.303--308, 552; Pv.II,13¹; Mhvs 5, 246; 15, 11; 29, 12. --kāra carriagebuilder, chariot-maker, considered as a class of very low social standing, rebirth in which is a punishment (cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 56, 207, 209 sq.) S.I,93; Vin.IV,9 (as term of abuse, enum^d with other low grades: caṇḍāla veṇa nesāda r. pukkusa), 12 (°jāti); M.II,152, 183 f.; as kārin at Pv III,1¹³ (expl^d as cammakārin PvA.175). As Npl. name of one of the 7 Great Lakes in the Himālaya (Rathakāradaha), e. g. at Vism.416; SnA 407. --cakka wheel of a chariot or carriage Vism.238 (in simile, concerning its circumference); PvA.65. --pañjara the body (lit. “cage” or “frame”) of a carriage Vv 83¹ (=rath’ûpattha VvA.326); J.II,172; IV,60; DhA.I,28. --yuga a chariot yoke J.VI,42. --reṇu “chariot-dust,” a very minute quantity (as a measure), a mite. Childers compares Sk. trasareṇu a mote of dust, atom. It is said to consist of 36 tajjāri’s, and 36 ratha-reṇu’s are equal to one likkhā: VbhA.343. --vinīta “led by a chariot,” a chariot-drive (Neumann, “Eilpost”), name of the 24^th Suttanta of Majjhima (M.I,145 sq.), quoted at Vism.93, 671 and SnA 446. --sālā chariot shed DhA.III,121. (Page 564)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (‹ram, cp.Sk.ratha)喜悦(pleasure, joy, delight)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1,【阳】马车(chariot)，二轮战车(two-wheeled carriage)。rathakāra,【阳】造车者，木匠。rathaṅga,【中】马车的一部份。rathagutti,【阴】车甲(马车的防卫物)。rathacakka,【中】车轮。rathapañjara,【阳】车身。rathayuga,【中】车轭(a chariot yoke)。rathareṇu,【阳】车子的尘埃(36 tajjāri =1 rathareṇu；36 rathareṇu =1虮likkhā﹐Sammohavinodani 343)，恙虫(mite。恙虫病是一种急性热病，感染此病原10~12天就会开始发高烧、剧烈头痛及淋巴腺炎，若不治疗，死亡率在0.6％~40％之间。)。rathācariya,【阳】战车的御者，赶车人。rathaṇīka,【中】一队战车。rathāroha,【阳】二轮战车的战士。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [fr. ram, cp. Sk. ratha] pleasure, joy, delight: see mano°. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】马车，二轮战车。 ~kāra, 【阳】造车者，木匠。 ~ṅga, 【中】马车的一部份。 ~gutti, 【阴】车甲（马车的防卫物）。 ~cakka, 【中】车轮。 ~pañjara, 【阳】车身。 ~yuga, 【中】车轭。 ~reṇu, 【阳】尘埃。 ~ācariya, 【阳】战车的御者，赶车人。 ~aṇīka, 【中】一队战车。~āroha, 【阳】二轮战车的战士。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rathaka: {'def': '² (adj.) [ratha+ka] having a chariot, neg. a° without a chariot J.VI,515. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. ratha, cp. Sk. rathaka m.] a little carriage, a toy cart D.I,6 (cp. DA.I,86: khuddakarathaṁ); Vin.II,10; III,180; M.I,226; Miln.229. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rathika: {'def': '[fr. ratha] fighter fr. a chariot, charioteer M.I,397 (saññāto kusalo rathassa aṅga-paccaṅgānaṁ); D.I,51 (in list of var. occupations, cp. DA.I,156); J.VI,15 (+patti-kārika), 463 (id.). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】在二轮战车上打仗的人。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】在二轮战车上战士。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rathikā: {'def': '【阴】车道，街道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】街道。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Rathiyā (f.) [Vedic rathya belonging to the chariot, later Sk. rathyā road. See also racchā] a carriage-road. -- (a) rathikā: Vin.II,268; Vism.60; PvA.4, 67. -- (b) rathiyā: D.I,83; Vin.I,237, 344; M.II,108; III,163; S.I,201; II,128; IV,344. In compⁿ rathiya°, e. g. rathiya-coḷa “street-rag” Vism.62 (expl^d as rathikāya chaḍḍita-coḷaka). (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rati: {'def': '(f.) [Classic Sk. rati, fr. ram] love, attachment, pleasure, liking for (Loc.), fondness of S.I,133 (°ṁ paccanubhavati), 207; III,256; Sn.41 (=anukkhaṇṭhit’adhivacanaṁ Nd² 537), 59 (id.), 270, 642, 956 (=nekkhamma-rati paviveka°, upasama° Nd¹ 457); J.III,277 (kilesa°); DhA.IV,225; PvA.77. --arati dislike, aversion S.I,7, 54, 128, 180, 197; V,64; Sn.270 (+rati), 642 (id.); Dh.418 (rati+); Th.2, 339; DhsA.193; PvA.64; Sdhp.476. --ratiṁ karoti to delight in, to make love Vism.195 (purisā itthīsu). (Page 563)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】执著，爱情(对特定的人，如恋爱)，爱好。ratikīḷā,【阴】性交。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】执着，爱，爱好。 ~kīḷā, 【阴】性交。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ratin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. rati] fond of, devoted to, keen on, fostering; f. ratinī J.IV,320 (ahiṁsā°). (Page 564)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ratta: {'def': '¹ [pp. of rañjati, cp. Sk. rakta] 1. dyed, coloured M.I,36 (dūratta-vaṇṇa difficult to dye or badly dyed; MA 167 reads duratta and expl^s as durañjita-vaṇṇa; opp. suratta ibid.); Sn.287 (nānā-rattehi vatthehi); Vism.415 (°vattha-nivattha, as sign of mourning); DhA.IV,226 (°vattha). -- 2. red. This is used of a high red colour, more like crimson. Sometimes it comes near a meaning like “shiny, shining, glittering” (as in ratta-suvaṇṇa the glittering gold), cp. etym. & meaning of rajati and rajana. It may also be taken as “bleached” in ratta-kambala. In ratta-phalika (crystal) it approaches the meaning of “white,” as also in explⁿ of puṇḍarīka at J.V,216 with ratta-paduma “white lotus.” -- It is most commonly found in foll. comb^ns at foll. passages: Miln.191 (°lohita-candana); Vism.172 (°kambala), 174 (°koraṇḍaka), 191 (°paṭākā); J.I,394 (pavāla-ratta-kambala); III,30 (°puppha-dāma); V,37 (°sālivana), 216 (°paduma); 372 (°suvaṇṇa); DhA.I,393 (id.), 248 (°kambala); IV,189 (°candanarukkha red-sandal tree); SnA 125 (where paduma is given as “ratta-set’ādivasena”); VvA.4 (°dupaṭṭa), 65 (°suvaṇṇa), 177 (°phalika); PvA.4 (°virala-mālā; garland of red flowers for the convict to be executed, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104), 157 (°paduma), 191 (°sāli); Mhvs 30, 36 (°kambala); 36, 82 (rattāni akkhīni bloodshot eyes). With the latter cp. cpd. rattakkha “with red eyes” (fr. crying) at PvA.39 (v. l. BB.), and Np. rattakkhin “Red-eye” (Ep. of a Yakkha). ‹-› 3. (fig.) excited, infatuated, impassioned S.IV,339; Sn.795 (virāga°); It.92 (maccā rattā); Miln.220. Also in combⁿ ratta duṭṭha mūḷha: see Nd² s. v. chanda; cp. bhava-rāga-ratta. (Page 564)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1,【形】1.染的，有颜色的。2.红色的。【中】血。【过分】已染色，已彩色，已性冲动。rattakkha,【形】有红眼睛的。rattacandana,【中】紫檀(见 Mañjiṭṭhā)。rattaphalā,【阴】红果藤(有红色椭圆形的果实的藤本植物)。rattapaduma,【中】红睡莲。rattamaṇi,【阳】红宝石。rattatisāra,【阳】赤痢(bloody diarrhoea)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】红色的。【中】血。【过分】已染色，已彩色，已性冲动。 ~kkha,【形】有红眼睛的。 ~candana, 【中】紫檀（见 Mañjiṭṭhā）。 ~phalā,【阴】红果藤（有红色椭圆形的果实的藤本植物）。 ~paduma, 【中】红睡莲。 ~maṇi, 【阳】红宝石。 ~atisāra, 【阳】赤痢。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) & (poet.) rattā (f.) [Epic Sk. rātra; Vedic rātra only in cpd. aho-rātraṁ. Semantically an abstr. formation in collect. meaning “the space of a night’s time,” hence “interval of time” in general. Otherwise rātri: see under ratti] (rarely) night; (usually) time in general. Occurs only --°, with expressions giving a definite time. Independently (besides cpds. mentioned below) only at one (doubtful) passage, viz. Sn.1071, where BB MSS. read rattam-ahā for rattaṁ aho, which corresponds to the Vedic phrase aho-rātraṁ (=P. ahorattaṁ). The P.T.S. ed. reads nattaṁ; SnA 593 reads nattaṁ, but expl^s as rattin-divaṁ, whereas Nd² 538 reads rattaṁ & expl^s: “rattaṁ vuccati ratti, ahā (sic lege!) ti divaso, rattiñ ca divañ ca.” -- Otherwise only in foll. adv. expressions (meaning either “time” or “night”): Instr. eka-rattena in one night J.I,64; satta° after one week (lit. a seven-night) Sn.570. -- Acc. sg. cira-rattaṁ a long time Sn.665; dīgha° id. [cp. BSk. dīrgha-rātraṁ freq.] Sn.22; M.I,445; aḍḍha° at “halfnight,” i. e. midnight A.III,407; pubba-ratt’âpararattaṁ one night after the other (lit. the last one and the next) DhA.IV,129. -- Acc. pl. cira rattāni a long time J.V,268. -- Loc. in var. forms, viz. vassa-ratte in the rainy season J.V,38 (Kern, Toev. s. v. gives wrongly III,37, 143; aḍḍha-ratte at midnight PvA.152; aḍḍha‹-› rattāyaṁ at midnight Vv 81¹⁶ (=aḍḍharattiyaṁ VvA.315); divā ca ratto ca day & night Vv 31⁵ (=rattiyaṁ VvA.130); cira-rattāya a long time J.V,267; Pv.I,9⁴.

--andhakāra the dark of night, nightly darkness Vin.IV,268 (oggate suriye); M.I,448. --ûparata abstaining from food at night D.I,5 (cp. DA.I,77). --ññu of long standing, recognised D.I,48 (in phrase: r. cira-pabbajito addhagato etc.; expl^d at DA.I,143 as “pabbajjato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātī ti r.”); A.II,27 (here the pl. rattaññā, as if fr. sg. ratta-ñña); Sn.p. 92 (therā r. cira-pabbajitā; the explⁿ at SnA 423 is rather fanciful with the choice of either=ratana-ññu, i. e. knowing the gem of Nibbāna, or=bahu-ratti-vidū, i. e. knowing many nights); ThA.141. A f. abstr. °ññutā “recognition” is found at M.I,445 (spelt rataññūtā, but v. l. °utā). --samaye (Loc., adv.) at the time of (night) J.I,63 (aḍḍha-ratta° at midnight), 264 (id.); IV,74 (vassa° in the rainy season); PvA.216 (aḍḍha°). (Page 564)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2,【中】& (poet.) rattā ,【阴】晚上((rarely) night。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rattandhakāra: {'def': '【阳】夜里的黑暗。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】夜里的黑暗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rattapā: {'def': '【阴】水蛭。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】水蛭(leech) (台语：蜈蜞ngo5 khi5)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rattaññū: {'def': '【形】长期存在的。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】长期存在的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ratti: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic rātrī & later Sk. rātri. -- Idg *lādh as in Gr. lήqw=Lat. lateo to hide; Sk rāhu dark demon; also Gr. *lhtw/ (=Lat. Latona) Goddess of night; Mhg. luoder insidiousness; cp. further Gr. lanqάnw to be hidden, lήqh oblivion (E. lethargy). -- The by-form of ratti is ratta²] night D.I,47 (dosinā). Gen. sg. ratyā (for *rattiyā) Th.1, 517; Sn.710 (vivasane=ratti-samatikkame SnA 496); J.VI,491. Abl. sg. rattiyā in phrases abhikkantāya r. at the waning of night D.II,220; Vin.I,26; S.I,16; M.I,143; & pabhātāya r. when night grew light, i. e. dawn J.I,81, 500. Instr. pl. rattīsu Vin.I,288 (hemantikāsu r.). A Loc. ratyā (for *rātryām) and a Nom. pl. ratyo (for *rātryaḥ) is given by Geiger, P.Gr. § 58³. -- Very often comb^d with and opp. to diva in foll. comb^ns: rattin-diva [cp. BSk. rātrindiva=Gr. nuxqήmeron, AvŚ I.274, 278; II,176; Divy 124] a day & a night (something like our “24 hours”), in phrase dasa rattindivā a decade of n. & d. (i. e. a 10--day week) A.V,85 sq.; adverbially satta-rattin-divaṁ a week DhA.I,108. As adv. in Acc. sg.: rattin-divaṁ night and day A.III,57; Sn.507, 1142; It.93; J.I,30; or rattiñ ca divañ ca Nd² 538, or rattiṁ opposed to adv. divā by night-by day M.I,143; PvA.43. -- Other cases as adv.: Acc. eka rattiṁ one night J.I,62; Pv.II,9⁷; PvA.42; taṁ rattiṁ that night Mhvs 4, 38; imaṁ r. this night M.I,143; yañ car. . . . yañ car. . . . etasmiṁ antare in between yon night and yon night It.121; rattiṁ at night Miln.42; rattiṁ rattiṁ night after night Mhvs 30, 16. -- Gen. rattiyā ca divasassa ca by n. & by day S.II,95. -- Loc. rattiyañ by night VvA.130, 315 (aḍḍha° at midnight); PvA.22; and ratto in phrase divā ca ratto ca Sn.223; Th.2, 312; Dh.296; Vv 31⁵; 84³²; S.I,33.

--khaya the wane of night J.I,19. --cāra (sabba°) allnight wandering S.I,201 (trsl. “festival”). --cheda interruption of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin.II,34 (three such: sahavāsa, vippavāsa, anārocanā). --dhūmāyanā smouldering at night Vism.107 (v. l. dhūp°), comb^d with divā-pajjalanā, cp. M.I,143: ayaṁ vammīko rattiṁ dhūmāyati divā pajjalati. --pariyanta limitation of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin.II,59. --bhāga night-time J.III,43 (°bhāge); Miln.18 (°bhāgena). --bhojana eating at night M.I,473; DA.I,77. --samaya night-time, only in Loc. aḍḍha-ratti-samaye at midnight VvA.255; PvA.155. (Page 564)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】夜晚。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】夜尽（夜晚近尾梢，近破晓了）。 ~khitta,【形】夜晚射击。 ~bhāga, 【阳】夜晚时分。 ~bhojana, 【中】晚餐。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】夜晚，宿(ㄒㄧㄡˇ，夜的俗称)。rattikkhaya,【阳】夜尽(近破晓了)。rattikhitta,【形】夜晚射击。ratticāra,【阳】夜行者。rattibhāga,【阳】夜晚时分。rattibhojana,【中】晚餐。rattindivaṁ﹐日夜。sabbarattiṁ﹐彻夜(夜晚的三时分)。rattiyā paṭhamaṁ yāmaṁ, 初夜(6-10pm)。rattiyā majjhimaṁ yāmaṁ, 中夜(10pm-2am)。rattiyā pacchimaṁ yāmaṁ, 后夜(2-6am)。rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādīsu(DhA.CS:pg.1.358.), 不分昼夜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rattāvasesa: {'def': '【阳】残余的夜(2~3个nāḍikā(24分钟)，即天亮 (aruṇuggamana明相)之前48~72分钟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rattūparata: {'def': '【形】戒除在晚上吃食物的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】戒除在晚上吃食物的。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rava: {'def': '【阳】噪音，吼，哭声。ravana,【中】吼声，嚎叫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [for raya, with v. for y as freq. in Pāli, Dhtm 352: ru “gate”] speed, exceeding swiftness, galloping, in combⁿ with dava running at Vin.II,101; IV,4; M.I,446 (better reading here dav’atthe rav’atthe for dhāve ravatthe, cp. vv. ll. on p. 567 & Neumann, Mittl. Sammlg. II.672 n. 49). Note. At the Vin passages it refers to speaking & making blunders by over-hurrying oneself in speaking. -- The Dhtm (No. 871) gives rava as a synonym of rasa (with assāda & sneha). It is not clear what the connection is between those two meanings. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】噪音，吼，哭声。 ~na, 【中】吼声，嚎叫。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [fr. ru, cp. Vedic rava] loud sound, roar, shout, cry; any noise uttered by animals J.II,110; III,277; DhA.I,232 (sabba-rava-ññu knowing all sounds of animals); Miln.357 (kāruñña°). See also rāva & ruta. (Page 566)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ravaka: {'def': '=rava, in go° a cow’s bellowing M.I,225. (Page 566)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ravati: {'def': '(ru+a), 发出噪音，哭。【过】ravi。【现分】ravanta, ravamāna。【独】ravitvā。【过分】ravita, ruta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ru + a), 发出噪音，哭。【过】 ravi。【现分】 ravanta, ravamāna。【独】 ravitvā。【过分】 ravita, ruta。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ru: Idg. *re & *reu, cp. Lat. ravus “raw, hoarse,” raucus, rūmor “rumour”; Gr. w)ruόmai to shout, w)rudόn roaring, etc.; Dhtp 240: ru “sadde”] to shout, cry, make a (loud) noise Miln.254. -- aor. ravi J.I,162 (baddha-rāvaṁ ravi); II,110; III,102; PvA.100; arāvi Mhvs 10, 69 (mahā-rāvaṁ); and aravi Mhvs 32, 79. ‹-› pp. ravita & ruta. -- Cp. abhi°, vi°. (Page 566)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ravaṇa: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. ravati] roaring, howling, singing, only in cpd. °ghaṭa a certain kind of pitcher, where meaning of ravaṇa is uncertain. Only at identical passages (in illustration) Vism.264=362=KhA 68 (reading peḷā-ghaṭa, but see App. p. 870 ravaṇa°)= VbhA.68 (where v. l. yavana°, with?). (Page 566)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ravi: {'def': '[cp. Sk. ravi] the sun J.II,375 (taruṇa°-vaṇṇaratha).

--inda “king of the sun,” N. of the lotus Dāvs III,37. --haṁsa “sun-swan,” N. of a bird J.VI,539. (Page 566)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】太阳。 ~haŋsa, 【阳】 “太阳鹅”（鸟名）。(p265)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】太阳。ravihaṁsa,【阳】“太阳鹅”(鸟名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ravita: {'def': '[pp. of ravati] shouted, cried, uttered Miln.178 (sakuṇa-ruta°). (Page 566)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ravivāro: {'def': '﹐【阳】星期日(sunday)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Raya: {'def': '[fr. ri, riṇāti to let loose or flow, which is taken as ray at Dhtp 234, def^d as “gamana,” and at Dhtm 336 as “gati.” The root ri itself is given at Dhtm 351 in meaning “santati,” i. e. continuation. -- On etym. cp. Vedic retaḥ; Lat. rivus river=Gall, Rēnos “Rhine.” See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rivus] speed, lit. current Abhp 40. See rava¹. (Page 565)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rañjana: {'def': '(‹rañjati) 找快乐(finding pleasure)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rañjati] delighting, finding pleasure, excitement DhsA.363 (rañjan’aṭṭhena rāgo; v. l. rajano°; perhaps better to be read rajjana°). (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rañjati: {'def': '(ranj + a), 寻快乐。【过】 rañji。【过分】 rajita, ratta。【现分】 ~janta,~jamāna。【独】 ~jitvā。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ranj+a), 找快乐。【过】rañji。【过分】rajita, ratta。【现分】rañjanta, rañjamāna。【独】rañjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[rañj=raj: see rajati & rajjati -- Dhtp 66 & 398 defines rañja=rāge] 1. to colour, dye J.I,220. ‹-› 2. (=rajjati) to find delight in, to be excited Sn.424 (ettha me r. mano; v. l. BB rajjati). -- Caus. rañjeti to delight or make glad D.III,93 (in etym. of rājā (q. v.). -- pp rañjita. -- Caus. II. rañjāpeti to cause to be coloured or dyed DhA.IV,106 (v. l. raj°). (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rañjeti: {'def': '(rañj + e), 给乐趣，彩色，染色。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】 ~jenta。【独】 ~jetvā。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(rañj+e), 给乐趣，彩色，染色。【过】rañjesi。【过分】rañjita。【现分】rañjenta。【独】rañjetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rañjita: {'def': '[pp. of rañjeti] coloured, soiled, in raja° affected with stain, defiled J.I,117. -- See also anu° & pari°. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raŋsi: {'def': '【阴】光，光线。 ~mantu, 【阳】太阳。【形】发光的。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Raṁsi: {'def': '& Rasmi [Vedic raśmi. The form raṁsi is the proper Pali form, originating fr. raśmi through metathesis like amhi for asmi, tamhā for tasmā etc. Cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 50². The form rasmi is a Sanskritism and later] a rein, a ray. -- 1. In meaning “rein” only as rasmi, viz. at M.I,124; Dh.222; J.I,57; IV,149. -- 2. In meaning “ray” both raṁsi and rasmi: (a) raṁsi (in poetry) Sn.1016 (vīta°? perhaps pīta°? See note in P.T.S. ed.); Vv 53⁵ (pl. raṁsī=rasmiyo VvA.236); 63²⁷ (sahassa° having a thousand rays;=suriya VvA.268); Sdhp.124. Also in cpd. raṁsi-jāla a blaze of rays J.I,89; PvA.154; VvA.12 (°sammujjala), 14 (id.), 166 (id.). -- (b) rasmi (in prose, late) DhA.I,27 (°ṁ vissajjesi); DhsA.13 (nīla-rasmiyo); VvA.125 (candima-suriya°). Also in cpd. buddha-rasmi the ray of enlightenment, the halo around a Buddha, consisting of 6 colours (chabbaṇṇa) J.I,444, 501 (°rasmiyo vissajjento); SnA 132; VvA.207, 234, 323; Mhbv 6, 15, 38. (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Rasmi(The form rasmi is a Sanskritism and later),【阴】1.繮绳，缰绳。光，光线(a rein, a ray)。raṁsimantu,【阳】太阳。【形】发光的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Raṁsika: {'def': '(adj.) [raṁsi+ka] having rays, radiant, in sahassa° having 1000 rays Vv 64⁵ (=suriya-maṇḍala viya VvA.277). (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raṁsimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. raṁsi] having rays, radiant; n. sg. raṁsimā the sun Vv 81² (=suriya VvA.314). (Page 560)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raṅga: {'def': '¹ [fr. raj¹, rajati, to be coloured or to have colour] colour, paint Miln.11 (°palibodha).

--kāra dyer Miln.331. --jāta colour M.I,385; VbhA.331. --ratta dyed crimson Vin.I,185=306. (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 染料，油漆。 2. 舞台，剧场，剧本。 ~kara, 【阳】染工，演员。 ~jāta, 【中】各种不同的染料。 ~ratta,【形】用…染的。 ~ājīva,【阳】画家，染工。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.染料，油漆。2.舞台，剧场，剧本。raṅgakara,【阳】染工，演员。raṅgajāta,【中】各种不同的染料。raṅgaratta,【形】用…染的。raṅgājīva,【阳】画家，染工。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [fr. raj², irajyati, to straighten, order, direct etc.: see uju. The Dhtp (27) only gives one raj in meaning “gamana”] a stage, theatre, dancing place, playhouse Vv 33¹; J.II,252. --raṅgaṁ karoti to play theatre DhA.IV,62. --raṅgamajjha the stage, the theatre, usually in Loc. °majjhe, on the stage, S.IV,306; J.IV,495; DhA.III,79; same with °maṇḍale J.II,253. Racati [rac, later Sk.] to arrange, prepare, compose. The root is defined at Dhtp 546 by “paṭiyattane” (with v. l. car), and given at No. 542 as v. l. of pac in meaning “vitthāre.” -- pp. racita. (Page 561)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raṇa: {'def': '【中】战争，打战，罪，过失。 ~ñjaha, 【形】避免激情的扰乱。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】战争，打战，罪，过失。raṇañjaha,【形】避免激情的扰乱。SA.2.11./I,109.︰Raṇañjahāti kilesañjahā.(过失扰乱︰染污扰乱。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic raṇa, both “enjoyment,” and “battle.” The Dhtp (115) only knows of ran as a sound-base saddatthā (=Sk. ran² to tinkle)] fight, battle; only in Th.2, 360 (raṇaṁ karitvā kāmānaṁ): see discussed below; also late at Mhvs 35, 69 (Subharājaṁ raṇe hantvā). -- 2. intoxication, desire, sin, fault. This meaning is the Buddhist development of Vedic raṇa= enjoyment. Various influences have played a part in determining the meaning & its explⁿ in the scholastic terms of the dogmatists and exegetics. It is often expl^d as pāpa or rāga. The Ṭīkā on DhsA.50 (see Expos. 67) gives the foll. expl^ns (late & speculative): (a)=reṇu, dust or mist of lust etc.; (b) fight, war (against the Paths); (c) pain, anguish & distress. -- The trslⁿ (Expos. 67) takes raṇa as “cause of grief,” or “harm,” hence araṇa “harmless” and saraṇa “harmful” (the latter trsl^d as “concomitant with war” by Dhs. trsl. of Dhs.1294; and asaraṇa as opp. “not concomitant”; doubtful). At S.I,148 (rūpe raṇaṁ disvā) it is almost syn. with raja. Bdhgh. expl^s this passage (see K.S. 320) as “rūpamhi jāti-jarā-bhaṅga-saṅkhātaṁ dosaṁ,” trslⁿ (K.S. 186): “discerning canker in visible objects material.”

The term is not sufficiently cleared yet. At Th.2, 358 we read “(kāmā) appassādā raṇakarā sukkapakkha-visosanā,” and v. 360 reads “raṇaṁ karitvā kāmānaṁ.” ThA.244 expl^s v 358 by “rāg’ādi sambandhanato”; v. 360 by “kāmānaṁ raṇaṁ te ca mayā kātabbaṁ ariyamaggaṁ sampahāraṁ katvā.” The first is evidently “grief,” the second “fight,” but the trslⁿ (Sisters 145) gives “stirring strife” for v. 358, and “fight with worldly lusts” for v. 360; whereas Kern, Toev. s. v. raṇakara gives “causing sinful desire” as trsl.

The word araṇa (see araṇa²) was regarded as neg. of raṇa in both meanings (1 & 2); thus either “freedom fr. passion” or “not fighting.” The trslⁿ of DhsA.50 (Expos. 67) takes it in a slightly diff. sense as “harmless” (i. e. having no grievous causes) -- At M.III,235 araṇa is a quâsi summing up of “adukkha an-upaghāta anupāyāsa etc.,” and saraṇa of their positives. Here a meaning like “harmfulness” & “harmlessness” seems to be fitting. Other passages of araṇa see under araṇa.

--jaha (raṇañjaha) giving up desires or sin, leaving causes of harmfulness behind. The expression is old and stereotype. It has caused trouble among interpreters: Trenckner would like to read raṇañjaya “victorious in battle” (Notes 83). It is also BSk., e. g. Lal. Vist. 50; AvŚ II.131 (see Speyer’s note 3 on this page. He justifies trslⁿ “pacifier, peace-maker”). At foll. passages: S.I,52 (trslⁿ “quitting corruption”); It.108 (Seidenstücker trsl^s: “dem Kampfgewühl entronnen”); Miln.21; Nett 54; Sdhp.493, 569. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raṭati: {'def': '[raṭ; Dhtp 86: “paribhāsane”] to yell, cry; shout (at), scold, revile: not found in the texts. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raṭṭha: {'def': '【中】国家。 ~piṇḍa, 【阳】从民众获得的食物。 ~vāsī, ~vāsika, 【阳】国民（国家的居民）。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】国家。raṭṭhapiṇḍa,【阳】从民衆获得的食物。raṭṭhavāsin, raṭṭhavāsika,【阳】国民(国家的居民)。raṭṭhavantopi khattiyā,领国刹帝利(S.1.28./I,15.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic rāṣṭra] reign, kingdom, empire; country, realm Sn.46 (expl^d at Nd² 536 as “raṭṭhañ ca janapadañ ca koṭṭhāgārañ ca . . . nagarañ ca”), 287, 444, 619; J IV 389 (°ṁ araṭṭhaṁ karoti); PvA.19 (°ṁ kāreti to reign, govern). Pabbata° mountain-kingdom SnA 26; Magadha° the kingdom of Magadha PvA.67.

--piṇḍa the country’s alms-food (°ṁ bhuñjati) Dh.308 (saddhāya dinnaṁ); A.I,10; S.II,221; M.III,127; Th.2, 110; It.43, 90. --vāsin inhabitant of the realm, subject DhA.III,481 (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raṭṭhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. rāṣṭraka] belonging to the kingdom, royal, sovereign J.IV,91 (senāvāhana). -- Cp. raṭṭhika. (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raṭṭhavant: {'def': '(adj.) [raṭṭha+vant] possessing a kingdom or kingship Pv.II,6¹¹ (°nto khattiyā). (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Raṭṭhika: {'def': '【形】国家的，官员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】属于国家的，官员。(p264)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. raṭṭha, cp. Sk. rāṣṭrika] 1. one belonging to a kingdom, subject in general, inhabitant J.II,241 (brāhmaṇa gahapati-r.-do ārik’ādayo). -- 2. an official of the kingdom [op Sk. rāṣṭriya a pretender; also king’s brother in-law] A.III,76=300 (r. pettanika senāya senāpatika). (Page 562)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Re: {'def': '(indecl.) [shortened for are, q. v.] a part. of exclamation, mostly implying contempt, or deprecation, (DA.I,276) “hīḷanavasena āmantanaṁ” i. e. address of disdain: heigh, go on, get away, hallo. -- D.I,96, 107; J.III,184 (C.=āmantaṇe nipāto); often comb^d with similar particles of exhortation, like cara pi re get away with you! M.II,108; Vin.IV,139 (so read for cara pire which the C. takes as “para,” amamaka); or ehi re come on then! J.I,225; ha re look out! here they are! PvA.4; aho vata re wish I would! Pv.II,9⁴⁵ (re ti ālapanaṁ PvA.131); no ca vata re vattabbe but indeed, good sir . . . (Kvu 1). (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Recana: {'def': '(fr. ric),【中】松弛，发射(letting loose, emission Dhtm 610. Cp. virecana)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】发射。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ric] letting loose, emission Dhtm 610. Cp. vi°. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rekhā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. rikh, for which the Pāli form is likh, cp. Sk. rekhā, Lat. rīma, Ohg. rīga row] line, streak Abhp 539. See lekhā. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹likh (梵rikh), cp. Sk. rekhā) ,【阴】线(line, streak Abhp 539. See lekhā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Reruka: {'def': '[etym.? Probably dialectical] “elephant’s tooth,” ivory J.II,230 (=hatthi-danta C.). (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Revata: {'def': '（比库名）勒瓦答，（古音译：）离婆多，离越', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Revatī: {'def': '【阴】奎宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】奎宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Reṇu: {'def': '【阳、阴】灰尘，花粉。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic reṇu] 1. dust; pl. reṇū particles of dust. -- Vin.I,32 (°hatā bhūmi); Vism.338=Nd¹ 505=J.I,117 (rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati); J.IV,362 (okiṇṇā raja-reṇūhi; C. expl^s by “paṁsūhi”); Miln.274 (pl.); SnA 132 (reṇuṁ vūpasāmeti allays). -- 2. pollen (in this meaning found only in the so-called Jātaka-style) J.I,233 (mahā-tumba-matta), 349 (pupphato reṇuṁ gaṇhāti); III,320; V,39 (puppha°); VI,530 (padumakinjakkha°); DhA.IV,203 (°vaṭṭhi). (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic reṇu),【阳】【阴】1.灰尘(dust; pl. reṇū particles of dust)。2.花粉(pollen)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rindī: {'def': 'at Th.2, 265 is doubtful. The T. reading is “te rindī va lambante’nodaka,” said of breasts hanging down in old age. The C. compares them with leather water bottles without water (udaka-bhastā viya). We have to read either with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 94 “rittī va” (=rittā iva), “as it were, empty,” or (preferably) with ThA.212 “therī ti va” (“like an old woman”). The trslⁿ (Sisters, p. 124) takes the C. explⁿ of udaka-bhastā as equivalent to T. reading rindi, in saying “shrunken as skins without water”; but rindī is altogether doubtful & it is better to read therī which is according to the context. We find the same meaning of therī (“old woman”) at Pv.II,11⁶. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rissati: {'def': '[Vedic riṣ, riṣyati] to be hurt, to suffer harm M.I,85 (ḍāṁsa-makasa-vāt’ātapa-siriṁsapa-samphassehi rissamāno; where Nd² 199 in same passage reads samphassamāna). (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ritta: {'def': '[pp. of riñcati; cp. atireka] devoid, empty, free, rid (of) M.I,207 (+tuccha), 414; Vin.I,157=II.216; Sn.823 (emancipated: ritto muni=vivitta etc. Nd¹ 158), 844 (opp. to aritta); Th.2, 265 (see rindi); J.I,29 (v. 222); III,492; Miln.383.

--assāda finding one’s taste in empty things A.I,280 (+bāhir-assāda. Kern, Toev. s. v. reads rittāsa and trsl^s “impure (of food),” not according to the sense at all). --āsana an empty seat Sn.963 (expl^d at Nd¹ 481 as “opportunity for sitting down which is free from unbefitting sights”). --pesuṇa free fr. slander Sn.941 (expl^d at Nd¹ 422: “yassa pesuññaṁ pahīnaṁ” etc.). --muṭṭhi an empty fist (°sadisa: comparing someone as regards ignorance) SnA 306=DhA.IV,38. --hattha (adj.) empty-handed J.V,46; Sdhp.309. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Riñcati’倒空’的【过分】), 已缺乏，已空，已摆脱。rittamuṭṭhi,【阳】空拳。rittahattha,【形】空手的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rittaka: {'def': '(adj.) [ritta+ka] empty, void, without reality Th.1, 41; 2, 394 (=tucchaka anto-sāra-rahita ThA.258); Pv III,6⁵ (of a river=tuccha PvA.202); PvA.139 (=suñña, virahita). Usually in combⁿ with tucchaka as a standing phrase denoting absolute emptiness & worthlessness, e. g. at D.I,240; M.I,329; S.III,141. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Riñcana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. riñc] leaving behind, giving up Dhtp 44. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Riñcati: {'def': '(ric倒空+ṁ-a), 疏忽，放弃，倒空。【过】riñci。【过分】ritta。【独】riñcitvā。【现分】riñcamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ric + ŋ-a), 疏忽，放弃，倒空。【过】 riñci。【过分】 ritta。【独】riñcitvā。【现分】 riñcamāna。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ric, in Vedic & Sk. rinakti; cp. Av. irinaxti to leave; Gr. lei/pw id., loipόs left; Lat. linquo id.; Goth. leiQ an=Ohg. līhan to lend; Ags l&amacremacr;n=loan, cp. E. leave etc. -- The defⁿ of the root at Dhtp is given in two forms, viz. ric as “virecane” (No. 396; cp. Dhtm 517 “kharaṇe,” i. e. flowing; 610 “recane”), and riñc as “riñcane” (No. 44)] to leave, abandon, leave behind, give up, neglect Vin.I,190 (also fut. riñcissati); M.I,155 (riñcissati), 403; S.IV,206; A.III,86 sq., 108 sq., 343 sq., 366 sq., 437; Th.1, 1052; Sn.156; Miln.419; J.V,403. -- ppr. med. with neg.: ariñcamāna Sn.69; ger. riñcitvā (for Sk. riktvā) Th.2, 93. -- pp. ritta. -- Pass. riccati [Sk. ricyate] to be left: see ati°. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Riṇāti: {'def': 'see under raya. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rocana: {'def': '【中】爱好，选择，光亮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】爱好，选择，光亮。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rocati: {'def': '(ruc+a), 照耀。【过】roci。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic rocate, ruc, Idg. *leuq, as in Lat. luceo to be bright (cp. lūx light, lūmen, lūna etc.); Sk. rocana splendid, ruci light, roka & rukṣa light; Av. raocantshining; Gr. amfi-lu/kh twi-light, leukόs white; also with 1: Sk. loka world, locate to perceive, locana eye; Lith. laukti to await; Goth. liuhap light=Ohg. lioht, E. light; Oir lōche lightning. -- The Dhtp (& Dhtm) gives 2 roots ruc, viz. the one with meaning “ditti” (Dhtp 37), the other as “rocana” (Dhtp 395), both signifying “light” or “splendour,” but the second probably to be taken in sense of “pleasing”] 1. to please, i. e. it pleases (with Dat. of person) Th.2, 415 (rocate); Mhvs 15, 9 (nivāso rocatu). Cp. BSk. rocyate AvŚ II.158. -- 2. to find pleasure in (Loc.) Miln.338 (bhave). -- Caus. roceti: 1. to be pleased, to give one’s consent DhA.I,387 (gloss K rucitha ruceyyātha). ‹-› 2. (with Acc. of object) to find pleasing, to find delight in, to be attached to, to approve of, to choose S.I,41 (vadhaṁ); J.I,142 (Devadattassa laddhiṁ r.); V,178 (pabbajjaṁ roc’ahaṁ=rocemi C.), 226 (kammaṁ). ‹-› Freq. with dhammaṁ to approve of a doctrine or scheme, e. g. at Vin.II,199 (Devadattassa dhammaṁ); S.I,133; Sn.94 (asataṁ dh.), 398 (dhammaṁ imaṁ rocaye); J.IV,53 (dh. asataṁ na rocayāma). -- Cp. abhi°, ā°, vi°. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ruc + a), 照耀。【过】 roci。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Roceti: {'def': '(ruc + e), 同意，喜欢。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 rocita。【独】 rocetvā。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ruc+e), 同意，喜欢。【过】rocesi。【过分】rocita。【独】rocetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rodana: {'def': '【中】哭，哭泣的行为。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】哭，哭泣的行为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rud] crying, weeping DhA.I,28; PvA.63, 64; Dhtp 144. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rodati: {'def': '(rud + a), 哭，哀悼。【过】 rodi。【过分】 rodita。【现分】 rodanta,~māna。【独】 roditvā, 【不】 rodituŋ。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see rudati. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(rud+a), 哭，哀悼。【过】rodi。【过分】rodita。【现分】rodanta, rodamāna。【独】roditvā,【不】rodituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rodha: {'def': '2(‹rudh)【中】岸(bank)，水坝(dam)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. rudh] obstruction, stopping, in cpd. parapāṇa° stopping the life of somebody else; life-slaughter, murder Sn.220; J.II,450. Cp. anu°, ni°, vi°. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 Rodhana, 【中】妨碍，预防。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. rudh] bank, dam A.III,128 (where id. p. at A. I.154 reads gedha, cave; v. l. also gedha, cp. v. l. rodhi° for gedhi° at Nd² 585). (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(‹rudh),【阳】rodhana,【中】妨碍(obstruction)，牢狱(Vism.495)。cp.anurodha, nirodha, virodha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rodhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rudh] obstructing J.V,346; Sdhp.57. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Roga: {'def': '[Vedic roga: ruj (see rujati), cp. Sk. rujā breakage, illness] illness, disease. -- The defⁿ of roga at J.II,437 is “roga rujana-sabhāvattaṁ.” There are many diff. enumerations of rogas and sets of standard comb^ns, of which the foll. may be mentioned. At sn 311 (cp. D.III,75) it is said that in old times there were only 3 diseases, viz. icchā, anasanaṁ, jarā, which gradually, through slaughtering of animals, increased to 98. Bdhgh at SnA 324 hints at these 98 with “cakkhu-rog’adinā-bhedena.” Beginning with this (cakkhuroga affection of the eye) we have a list of 34 rogas at Nd¹ 13 (under pākaṭa-parissayā or open dangers=Nd¹ 360= Nd² 420) & Nd² 304¹ B, viz. cakkhu° & the other 4 senses, sīsa°, kaṇṇa°, mukha°, danta°; kāsa, sāsa, pināsa, ḍāha, jara; kucchiroga, mucchā, pakkhandikā, sūlā, visūcikā; kuṭṭhaṁ, gaṇḍo, kilāso, soso, apamāro; daddu, kaṇḍu, kacchu, rakhasā, vitacchikā, lohita‹-› pittaṁ, madhumeho, aṁsā, piḷakā, bhagandalā. This list is followed by list of 10 ābādhas & under “dukkha” goes on with var. other “ills,” which however do not make up the number 98. The same list is found at A.V,110. The 10 ābādhas (Nd² 304¹ C.) occur at A.II,87 & Miln.308 (as āgantuka-rogā). The 4 “rogas” of the Sun (miln 273, cp. Vin.II,295) are: abbha, mahikā, megha, Rāhu. -- Another mention of roga together with plagues which attack the corn in the field is given at J.V,401, viz. visa-vāta; mūsika-salabha-suka-pāṇaka; setaṭṭhika-roga etc., i. e. hurtful winds, mice, moths & parrots, mildew. -- The combⁿ roga, gaṇḍa, salla is sometimes found, e. g. M.II,230; Vism.335. Of other single rogas we mention: kucchi° (stomach-ache) J.I,243; ahivātaka° Vin.I,78; J.II,79; IV,200; DhA.I,231; paṇḍu° jaundice Vin.I,206; J.II,102; DhA.I,25; tiṇapupphaka° hay-fever Miln.216. -- See also ātaṅka & ābādha. On roga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130. ‹-› D.I,11, 73; III,182; S.III,32; IV,64; A.II,128, 142 sq.; IV,289,; Nd¹ 486; Vism.236 (as cause of death), 512 (in simile); VbhA.88 (in sim. of dukkha etc.); ThA.288; VvA.6 (rogena phuṭṭha), 75 (sarīre r. uppajji); PvA.86 (kacchu°), 212 (rogena abhibhūta). -- Opp. aroga health: see sep.

--ātaṅka affliction by illness A.II,174 sq.; V,169, 318. --niḍḍha the nest or seat of disease Dh.148 (cp. DhA.III,110); as °nīḷa at It.37. --mūla the root of disease Sn.530. --vyasana distress or misfortune of disease D.III,235 (one of the 5 vyasanāni: ñāti°, bhoga°, roga°, sīla°, diṭṭhi°); Miln.196 (id.). (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】病，疾病。bandhukarogo(paṇḍu roga)，黄疸病。roganiḍḍa, roganīḷa,【形】疾病的所在地。rogahārī,【阳】医师。rogātura,【形】病人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】病，疾病。 ~niḍḍa, ~nīḷa, 【形】疾病的所在地。 ~hārī, 【阳】医师。 ~ātura, 【形】病人。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rogin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr roga] having a disease, suffering from (-°); one who has a disease Vism.194 (ussanna-vyādhi dukkhassa); Sdhp.86. --paṇḍu° one who has the jaundice J.II,285; III,401. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rogī: {'def': '【阳】病人。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】病人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rohana: {'def': 'ruhana, 【中】升起，成长。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'ruhana,【中】升起，成长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rohati: {'def': '(ruh+a), 生长，登上，痊愈。参考 Rūhati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Ruhati。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rohañña: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. roha=rohita] red J.V,259 (rohaññā pungav’ūsabhā; C. expl^s by ratta-vaṇṇā). Kern. Toev. s. v. proposes rohiñño=*rohiṇyah, (cp. pokkharaṇī for °iṇī) red cows. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rohicca: {'def': '[fr. rohita, perhaps directly fr. Vedic rohita ewe, lit. the red one] a kind of deer J.VI,537 (°sarabhā migā). (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rohita: {'def': '【形】红色。【阳】一种鹿“红鹿”，一种鱼“红鱼”（红鲤鱼 (Cyprinus rohita)）。 ~maccha, 【阳】鲑鱼。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic rohita; cp. the usual P. word lohita red & blood. See also rudhira & ruhira] red, as attribute of fishes at J.V,405 (i. e. a special kind of fish), and of deer at J.V,406 in same passage (i. e. a special kind of deer). Otherwise only in standing term rohita-maccha the “red fish,” viz. Cyprinus Rohita, which is freq. mentioned in the “Jātaka” literature, e. g. J.II,433; III,333; DhA.II,132 (four), 140; KhA 118. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】红色。【阳】一种鹿“红鹿”，一种鱼“红鱼”(红鲤鱼 (Cyprinus rohita))。rohitamaccha,【阳】鲑鱼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rohiṇī: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic rohiṇī red cow or mare] 1. a red cow A.I,162=III,214. -- 2. N. of a nakkhatta or constellation (“red cow”) SnA 456; Mhvs 19, 47. -- 3. N. of a river SnA 357. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】赤牛，毕宿（星宿）(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】赤牛，毕宿(星宿)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Roma: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic roman; the usual P. form is loma (q. v.)] the hair of the body J.V,430 (where in roma-rājiyā maṇḍita-udarā as explⁿ of loma-sundarī); Sdhp.119 (°kūpa), (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】毫毛（体毛）。 ~ñca, 【阳】毛骨悚然，鸡皮疙瘩。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】毫毛(体毛)。romaca,【阳】毛骨悚然，鸡皮疙瘩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Romaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. roma] feathered (?) J.II,383 (C. wrong!). (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】罗马人。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. roma),【形】羽毛(feathered (?) J II.383)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Romanthaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. romanthati] chewing the cud, ruminating Vin.II,132. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Romanthana: {'def': '【中】反刍，用力咀嚼。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. romanthati] ruminating Vin.II,321. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】反刍，用力咀嚼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Romanthati: {'def': '& Romantheti [to romantha; cp. Lat. rumen & ruminare=E. ruminate] to chew the cud, to ruminate Vin.II,132 (°ati); J.IV,392 (°eti). (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(?), 咀嚼反刍的食物，用力咀嚼。【过】 ~nthi。【独】~nthayitvā。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(?), 咀嚼反刍的食物，用力咀嚼。【过】romanthi。【独】romanthayitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Romañca: {'def': '(?) [fr. roma, cp. Vedic romaśa] hairy (?) Dāvs.V,14 (°kancuka). (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ropa: {'def': 'ropaka,【阳】种植者，耕者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(-°) [fr. rop=Caus. of ruh] plantation; in vana° & ārāma° S.I,33. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'ropaka, 【阳】种植者，耕者。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ropaka: {'def': '[ropa+ka] sapling J.II,346 (rukkha°). (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ropana: {'def': '(nt.) & ropanā (f.) [fr. ropeti¹] 1. planting PvA.151 (ārāma°); Mhvs 15, 41. -- 2. healing S.IV,177 (vaṇa°). -- 3. furthering, making grow Ps.II,115 (buddhi°). ‹-› 4. (f.) accusation Vin.IV,36. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ropaya: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [for *ropya, fr. ropeti¹] to be healed, only in cpd. du° hard to heal (of a wound) Vin.I,216 (vaṇa). (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ropeti: {'def': '(rup + e), 种植，培养。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 ropenta, rāpayamāna。【独】 ropetvā, ropiya。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Caus. of rūhati². See lumpati] 1.to cause to break off, to cause to suspend or cancel; to pass off, refuse Vin.II,261 (bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnaṁ kammaṁ ropetvā bhikkhunīnaṁ niyyādetuṁ, i. e. by the bhikkhus is an act of the nuns to be passed off and to be referred to the nuns). -- 2. to make confess or accuse of (Acc.: āpattiṁ a guilt) Vin.II,2 (first codeti, then sāreti, then ropeti & lastly (saṅghaṁ) ñāpeti), 85 (id.); IV,36, (aññavādakaṁ ropeti to bring the charge of heresy against someone). No. 2 perhaps better to ropeti¹. Cp. Vin. Texts II.334. -- To ropeti² belong the cpds. oropeti (cut off) & voropeti (deprive). They are better to be taken here than to ava+ruh. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(rup+e), 种植，培养。【过】ropesi。【现分】ropenta, rāpayamāna。【独】ropetvā, ropiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of rūhati¹] 1. to plant or sow J.I,150 (nivāpatiṇaṁ); Mhvs 15, 42 (amb’aṭṭhikaṁ); 19, 56; DhA.II,109. -- 2. to put up, fix J.I,143 (sūlāni). -- 3. to further, increase, make grow Sn.208 (Pot. ropayeyya). -- 4. (fig.) to fix, direct towards, bring up against: see ropeti² 2. -- pp. ropita. Caus. II. ropāpeti to cause to be planted D.II,179; J.VI,333; Mhvs 34, 40; DhA.II,109. -- Cp. abhi°, abhini°, ā°. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ropima: {'def': '(fr. ropeti1),【中】1.已被种植(what has been planted Vin.IV,267)。2.一种箭(a kind of arrow M.I,429 (contrasted with kaccha; Neumann trsls ropima by “aus Binsen”).)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ropeti¹] 1. what has been planted Vin.IV,267. -- 2. a kind of arrow M.I,429 (contrasted with kaccha; Neumann trsl^s ropima by “aus Binsen”). ‹-› 3. (adj.) at Vv 44¹³ aropima (“not planted”?) is an attribute of trees. It is not expl^d in VvA. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ropita: {'def': '[pp. of ropeti¹] 1. planted Pv.II,7⁸. -- 2. growing up Pv 9⁷⁰ (read “pi ropitaṁ” for viropitaṁ). -- 3. furnished with, powdered with (-°) Vv 64¹⁵ (Ed. vosita; VvA.280 expl^s by ullitta, vicchurita). -- 4. accused, brought forward (of a charge) Vin.IV,36. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Ropeti的【过分】) 种植，培养。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ropāpeti: {'def': 'see ropeti¹. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rorava: {'def': '[fr. ru, cp. Sk. raurava, N. of a purgatory] 1. a sort of hart (i. e. ruru) M.I,429. -- 2. N. of a naraka (purgatory): see Dictionary of Names. E.g. J.III,299; Dāvs III,12; Sdhp.195. Cp. BSk. raurava Divy 67. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Roruva: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Raurava] 叫喚 [八大地獄の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】噜罗婆地狱（地狱名），叫唤。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '号叫地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阳】噜罗婆地狱(号叫地狱，八大地狱之一)，叫唤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rosa: {'def': '【阳】激怒。 ~ka, 【形】使人生气的。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵rosa),【阳】激怒。rosaka(梵rosaka),【形】使人生气的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. roṣa, of ruṣ] 1. anger, angry feeling M.I,360. -- 2. quarrel J.IV,316. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rosaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. rosa; cp. BSk. roṣaka Divy 38] angry, wrathful S.I,85, 96; Sn.133; Vv 52⁸ (=paresaṁ ros’uppādanena r. VvA.226); J.II,270. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rosaneyya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. rosa] apt to be angry or cause anger; neg. a° not to be angered, not irritable Sn.216. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rosanā: {'def': '(梵rosaṇa),【阴】激怒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. rosati] making angry, causing anger, being angry Vbh.86 (hiṁsanā+), expl^d at VbhA.75 by ghaṭṭanā. Cp. BSk. roṣaṇī AvŚ I.178. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】激怒。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Roseti: {'def': '(=rosayati, rosati) (rus+e), 使生气，激怒。【过】rosesi。【过分】rosita。【独】rosetvā。rosayaṁ,【现分】ppr.m.Nom.sg.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(rus + e), 使很生气，激怒。【过】 rosesi。【过分】 rosita。【独】rosetvā。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of rosati, ruṣ; see rusita] to make angry, to annoy, to irritate S.I,162; A.II,215 (so read for rosati); III,38; Sn.125, 130, 216; J.I,432; IV,491. (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rosita: {'def': '[pp. of rus, to smear: Sk. rūṣita; given as root rus at Dhtm 442 with meaning “ālepa”] smeared (with), anointed J.IV,440 (=vilitta C.). (Page 577)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Roṇṇa: {'def': 'see ruṇṇa. (Page 576)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruca: {'def': '(-rukkha) & Rucā (f.) [fr. ruc] N. of a plant, or tree, alias “mukkhaka” (read mokkhaka) “principal” J.I,441, 443 (gloss maṅgala-rukkha). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rucaka: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. rucaka a golden ornament] (gold) sand Vv 35¹; VvA.160 (=suvaṇṇa-vālikā). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruccana: {'def': '【中】爱好，选择。ruccanaka,【形】令人喜爱的，满意的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】爱好，选择。 ~ka, 【形】令人喜爱的，满意的。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& ā° f.) (nt.) [fr. ruccati] choice, pleasure DhA.I,387 (tava °ṭṭhāne according to your own liking); DA.I,106 (°ā). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruccanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ruccana, cp. Sk. rucya] pleasing, satisfying; nt. satisfaction J.I,211 (°maccha the fish you like); II,182 (tava °ṁ karosi you do whatever you like). a° unpleasant, distasteful DhA.I,251 (attano aruccanakaṁ kiñci kammaṁ adisvā). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruccati: {'def': '(ruc高兴+ya), 寻开心，喜欢。【过】rucci。【过分】ruccita。【独】ruccitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[*rucyati Med. of ruc: see rocati. Same in Prk. -- Originally Caus. formation like Epic Sk. rocyate for rocayate] to find delight or pleasure in (Loc.), to please, to indulge in, set one’s mind on Sn.565 (etañ ce r. bhoto buddha-sāsanaṁ); with khamati to be pleased and to approve of, M.II,132; often used by Bdhgh in C. style: yathā r. tathā paṭhitabbaṁ KhA 78; “yaṁ r. taṁ gahetabbaṁ SnA 23, 43, 136, 378” “to take, whichever one pleases” (in giving the choice of 2 readings or interpretations). -- ger. ruccitvā VvA.282 (r. pūresi “to find thorough delight in,” explⁿ for abhirocesi). ‹-› pret. 1^st pl. ruccādimhase Pv.I,11⁸ (=ruccāma ruciṁ uppādema, taṁ attano ruciyā pivissāmā ti attho PvA.59). -- Prohibitive mā rucci (pl. mā rucittha) as an entreaty not to pursue an aim (=please do not do that, please don’t) Vin.II,198 (alaṁ Devadatta mā te rucci saṅgha-bhedo); DhA.I,13 (mā vo āvuso evaṁ ruccittha). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ruc + ya), 寻开心，喜欢。【过】 rucci。【过分】 ruccita。【独】ruccitvā。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ruci: {'def': '(f.) [fr. ruc, cp. Vedic ruc (f.) light, Classic Sk. ruci in meaning “pleasure”] 1. splendour, light, brightness Sn.548 (su° very splendid; SnA 453=sundara-sarīrappabha). -- 2. inclination, liking, pleasure PvA.59 (°ṁ uppādeti to find pleasure, to be satisfied). --aruci aversion, dislike Th.2, 472. --ruci object of pleasure J.V,371. --ruciyā (Abl.) in the pleasure (of), by the liking (of) (cp. No. 3), in phrases attano ruciyā (attano citta-ruciyā: so read for °ruciyaṁ!); as one pleases, by one’s own free will, ad lib. J.I,106; IV,281; PvA.59; parassa r. pavattati to live by the pleasure (gratiâ) of somebody else, i. e. to be dependent on others DA.I,212. --yathā ruciṁ according to liking or satisfaction, fully, amply Mhvs 4, 43; 5, 230; PvA.88, 126, 242. ‹-› 3. In dogmatic language used in the sense of “will” or “influence” in combⁿ diṭṭhi, khanti, ruci one’s views, indulgence & pleasure (=will), i. e. one’s intellectual, emotional & volitional sphere, e. g. Vin.I,70; Sn.781 (without khanti, but see defⁿ at Nd¹ 65); also with saddhā, anussavo, ākāraparivitakke, diṭṭhinijjhānakhanti M.II,170, 218; 234; contrasted with dhamma D.III,40; Vbh.245 (in defⁿ of “idha”: cp. same at Ps.I,176 and Nd² 145), 325, 328. aññatra ruciyā under the influence of someone else’s will S.II,115; IV,138. See also bhāva 2^a. (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】爱好，选择，倾向。 ~ka, 【形】 (在【合】中) 有倾向…的。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】爱好，选择，倾向。rucika,【形】(在【合】中) 有倾向…的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rucika: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. ruci 3] belonging to the pleasure (of); only in phrase añña° being dependent on someone else’s will or under another’s influence, together with aññadiṭṭhika and añña-khantika characterizing the various sides of personality (see ruci 3) with ref. to one’s intellect, feeling & will D.I,187=M.I,487. Rhys Davids (Dial. I.254) trsl^s: “holding different views, other things approving themselves to you, setting diff. aims before yourself”; thus differing in interpretation of añña, taking it subjectively. Neumann (Majjhima Übs. II.250) quite wrongly: “ohne Deutung, ohne Geduld, ohne Hingabe” (without explanation, patience, devotion). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rucira: {'def': '【形】愉快的，美丽的。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】愉快的，美丽的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ruc, cp. Sk. rucira] brilliant, beautiful, pleasant, agreeable Pv.I,10⁹ (=ramaṇīya dassanīya PvA.51); J.I,207; V,299; Vv 40² (so read for rurira); Mhvs 11, 11; 18, 68; Dāvs.IV,29; Miln.2, 398; DhA.I,383 (=sobhana); VvA.12; PvA.156 (=vaggu). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruda: {'def': 'stands for ruta (cry) at 2 Jātaka passages, viz. J.I,207; VI,475 (ruda-ññu knowing the cries of all animals, expl^d as “ruta- jñā, sabba-rāvaṁ jānāti” C.). Rudati & Rodati [rud, the usual Sk. pres. being rodati, but forms fr. base rud° are Vedic and are later found also in Prk. (cp. Pischel Prk. Gr. § 495): ruyai besides royai & rodasi. -- The Idg. root is *reud, being an enlargement of *reu, as in ravati (q. v.). Cp. cognates Lat. rudo to cry, shout, bray; Lith. raudà wailing; Ohg. riozan= Ags. reotan. -- The Dhtp expl^s rud by “rodane” (144), the Dhtm by “assu-vimocane” (206)] to cry, lament, weep, wail. -- Forms I. rud° (the older form): pres. rudati (not yet found); ppr. rudanto D.I,115; Sn.675, 691; rudamāna M.I,341; A.II,95; Pug.62; Miln.275; Sdhp.281; and rudaṁ Pv.I,8⁴; also in cpd. rudam-mukha with weeping face J.VI,518 (assu-netta+); Pv.I,11²; ger. ruditvāna Mhvs 35, 24; fut. rucchati J.V,366 and rucchiti J.VI,550 (=rodissati C.; see also rujati). ‹-› II. rod° (the younger form & the one peculiar to prose): pres. rodati J.I,55; III,169 (socati+); Pv.I,8⁷ (socati+); I,12⁴; PvA.17, 18; Pot. rode Pv.I,8⁵ (=rodeyyaṁ PvA.64); ppr. rodanto J.I,65; f. rodantī PvA.16; med. rodamāna PvA.6; DA.I,284. -- aor. rodi J.I,167; DhA.II,17 (+hasi); fut. rodissati J.VI,550; ger. roditvā Mhvs 9, 7; inf. rodituṁ J.I,55. -- Caus. II. rodāpeti to make someone cry DhA.II,86. -- pp. ruṇṇa, rudita & rodita. (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rudammukha: {'def': '【形】含泪的脸的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】含泪的脸的。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rudati: {'def': '(rud + a), 哭，哀悼。【过】 rudi。【过分】 rudita, ruta。【现分】 rudanta,~māna。【独】 ruditvā。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(rud+a), 哭，哀悼。【过】rudi。【过分】rudita, ruta。【现分】rudanta, rudamāna。【独】ruditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rudda: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. raudra & Vedic rudra (a fierce demon or storm-deity; “the red one,” with Pischel from rud to be ruddy. See Macdonell, Vedic Mythology 74--77). The usual Pāli form is ludda. At Dhtp 473 & Dhtm 135 a root ruṭh (or luṭh) is given in meaning “upaghāte” i. e. killing, which may represent this rud: see luṭhati] fierce, awful, terrible J.IV,416 (so luddako rudda-rūpo; v. l. ludda°); V,425, 431 (su-ruddho, spelling for su-ruddo, very fierce, expl^d as su-luddo supharuso); Mhvs 12, 45 (rudda-rakkhasī, prob. with ref. to the demon Rudra; trslⁿ “fearsome female demon”; vv. ll. ruda°, ruddha°, dudda°). (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruddha: {'def': '见 Rujjhati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of rundhati] 1. obstructed, disturbed Dāvs 4, 46. -- 2. at J.V,425 & 431 in cpd. su-ruddha it stands for rudda (q. v.). -- Cp. upa°, ni°, paṭi° paṭivi°, vi°. (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '见 Rujjhati。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rudhira: {'def': '(nt.) [late Vedic rudhira. Etym. connected with Lat. ruber red; Gr. e)ruqrόs red; Oicel. rodra blood, Goth. raups=Ger. rot=E. red] blood DhA.I,140; PvA.34 (for lohita; v. l. ruhira). See the more freq. words rohita & lohita; a form ruhira (q. v.) occurs e. g. at Pv.I,9¹. (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】血。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】血。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rudita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of rudati, equivalent to ruṇṇa] crying, weeping PvA.18 (+assu-mocana, in explⁿ of ruṇṇa), 63 (=paridevita). (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruha: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 成长的，起来的，上升的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 成长的，起来的，上升的。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [poetical for ruhira (rohita)=lohita] blood, in cpd. ruhaṁghasa blood-eater, a name for panther J.III,481 (=ruhira-bhakkha lohita-pāyin C.). (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) (-°) [fr. ruh: see rūhati] growing, a tree, in cpds.: jagati°, dharaṇi°, mahī°, etc. (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruhira: {'def': '【中】血。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rudhira] blood M.III,122; Th.1, 568; Vin.II,193; Miln.125, 220; Sdhp.38.

--akkhita (ruhir’akkhita) “besmeared with blood” J.IV,331, is to be read as ruhir’ukkhita of ukṣ). (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】血。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rujaka: {'def': '[fr. ruj?] a lute-player J.VI,51, 52, given by Kern, Toev. s. v. as conjecture (vīṇaṁ) va rujaka for virujaka. The conjecture is based on C. reading “rujaka=vīṇāvādaka.” (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rujana: {'def': '【中】rujā,【阴】疼，痛。rujanaka,【形】痛的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 Rujā, 【阴】疼，痛。 ~ka, 【形】痛的。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ruj, cp. rujā] hurting, feeling pain J.II,437 (roga=rujana-sabhāvattaṁ); J.IV,147 (yāva piṭṭhiyā rujana-ppamāṇaṁ until his back ached). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rujanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. rujana] aching, hurting DhA.IV,69 (aṅguli). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rujati: {'def': '[ruj, representing an Idg. *leug, as in Gr. leugalέos, lugrόs sad, awful; Lat. lugeo to mourn; Lith. lúžti to break; German lücke, loch etc. -- A specific Pāli l-form is lujjati. A der. fr. ruj is roga illness. -- The Dhtp (469) defines ruj by “bhaṅga” i. e. breaking] to break, crush; lit. to (cause) pain, to afflict, hurt (trs. & intrs.) J.I,7 (pādā rujanti), 396 (pādā me rujanti my feet ache); IV,208 (khandhena rujantena with hurting back); VI,3 (ūrū rujanti); Mhvs 10, 15 (pādā me r.); Miln.26 (pādā r.); DhA.I,10, 21 (akkhīni me rujiṁsu); II,3. -- fut. rucchiti [cp. Sk. rokṣyate] J.VI,80 (v. l. B.B. rujjati; C. takes wrongly as “rodissati,” of rodati). -- pp. lugga. -- Cp. lujjati & comb^ns. (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ruj + a), 觉得疼，痛。【过】 ruji。【独】 rujitvā。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(= rujjati)(ruj使痛苦+a), 觉得疼，痛(to break, crush; lit. to (cause) pain, to afflict, hurt)。【过】ruji。【过分】lugga。【独】rujitvā。【未】rucchiti(cp. Sk. roksyate)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rujjhati: {'def': '[Pass. of rundhati] to be broken up, to be destroyed J.III,181 (pāṇā rujjhanti; C. expl^s by nirujjhati). Cp. upa°, vi°. (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(rudh(梵rudh)阻碍+ya), 被阻隔，被避免。【过】rujjhi。【过分】ruddha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(rudh + ya), 被阻隔，被避免。【过】 rujjhi。【过分】 ruddha。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rujā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. ruj, see rujati; cp. Sk. rujā] disease, pain Miln.172 (rujaṁ na karoti); Vism.69; DhA.IV,163 (accha° a bad pain). (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruka: {'def': 'in cpd. aḍḍha° at Vin.II,134, referring to the shape of a beard, is doubtful. The v. l. is “duka.” Could it correspond to Vedic rukma (a certain ornament worn on the chest)? (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rukkha: {'def': '【阳】树。rukkhagahaṇa,【中】树丛。rukkhadevatā,【阴】树神。rukkhamūla,【中】树脚(树底下)。rukkhamūlika,【形】树下住(居住在树下的人)。rukkhasusira,【中】空心树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】树。 ~gahaṇa, 【中】树丛。 ~devatā, 【阴】树神。 ~mūla,【中】树脚（树底下）。 ~mūlika, 【形】树下住（居住在树下的人）。~susira, 【中】空心树。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic vṛkṣa. See Geiger, P.Gr. § 13, with note. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 320 puts rukkha to Sk. rukṣa (shining which as Pischel, following Roth. says has also the meaning “tree” in Ṛgveda). The Prk. form is rukkha. Cp. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, § 184 b. We find a byform rakkha at J.III,144. Cp. Brethren, pp. 185, 416, where the Bⁿ MS. has rukkha kathā the meaning being rakkha°] a tree. In the rukkha-mūlik’aṅga (see below) Bdhgh at Vism.74 gives a list of trees which are not to be selected for the practice of “living at the root of a tree.” These are sīmantarika-rukkha, cetiya°, niyyāsa°, phala°, vagguli°, susira°, vihāra-majjhe ṭhita°, or a tree standing right on the border, a sacred tree, a resinous tree, a fruit t., a tree on which bats live, a hollow tree, a tree growing in the middle of a monastery. The only one which is to be chosen is a tree “vihāra-paccante ṭhita,” or one standing on the outskirt of the Vihāra. He then gives further advice as to the condition of the tree. -- Various kinds of trees are given in the defⁿ of r. at Vism.183, viz. assattha, nigrodha, kacchaka, kapitthaka; ucca, nīca, khuddaka, mahanto; kāḷa, seta. -- A very complete list of trees mentioned in the Saṁyutta Nikāya is to be found in the Index to that Nikāya (vol. vi. p. 84, 85) On rukkha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 128--130. -- See also the foll. refs.: A.I,137; II,109, 207; III,19, 200, 360; IV 99, 336; V,4 sq., 314 sq.; Sn.603, 712; J.I,35 (nāga°); Vism.688 (in simile: mahārukkhe yāva kapp’âvasānā bījaparamparāya rukkha-paveṇiṁ santāyamāne ṭhite); VbhA.165=Vism.555 (rukkha phalita); VbhA.196 (in compⁿ: jātassa avassaṁ jarā-maraṇaṁ, uppannassa rukkhassa patanaṁ viya), 334 sq. (as garu-bhaṇḍa); SnA 5 (“pathavi-ras’ādim iva rukkhe”: with same simile as at Vism.688, with reading kappâvasānaṁ and santānente); DhA.III,207 (amba°); VvA.43 (rāja°), 198 (amba°); DhA.IV,120 (dīpa°); PvA.43.

--antara the inside of a tree PvA.63. --koṭṭaka (-sakuṇa) the wood-pecker J.III,327 (=java sakuṇa). --gahana tree-thicket or entanglement A.I,154 (so for °gahaṇa). --devatā a tree spirit, dryad, a yakkha inhabiting a tree (rukkhe adhivatthā d. Vin.IV,34; J.II,385; kakudhe adhivatthā d. Vin.I,28) J.I,168, 322; II,405, 438 sq. (eraṇḍa°), 445; III,23; IV,308 (vanajeṭṭhaka-rukkhe nibbatta-devatā); DhA.II,16; PvA.5 (in a Nigrodha tree), 43 (in the Vindhya forest). ‹-› They live in a Nigrodha tree at the entrance of the village (J.I,169), where they receive offerings at the foot of the tree (cp. IV.474), and occasionally one threatens them with discontinuance of the offerings if they do not fulfil one’s request. The trees are their vimānas (J.I,328, 442; IV,154), occasionally they live in hollow trees (J.I,405; III,343) or in tree tops (J.I,423). They have to rely on the food given to them (ibid.); for which they help the people (J.III,24; V,511). They assume various forms when they appear to the people (J.I,423; II,357, 439; III,23); they also have children (Vin.IV,34; J.I,442). --paveṇi lineage of the tree Vism.688. --pāṇikā a wooden spoon Vism.124 (opp. to pāsāṇa°). --mūla the foot of a tree (taken as a dwelling by the ascetics for meditation: D.I,71, where several such lonely places are recommended, as arañña, r-m., pabbata, kandara, etc. -- DA.I,209 specifies as “yaṁ kiñci sanda-cchāyaṁ vivittaṁ rukkha-mūlaṁ”); A.II,38; IV,139, 392; S.I,199 (°gahana); It.102; Sn.708, 958; Nd¹ 466; Pug.68; PvA.100 (v. l. sukkha-nadī), 137 (Gaṇḍamba°, with ref. to the Buddha). --°gata one who undertakes living at the foot of a tree (as an ascetic) A.III,353; V,109 sq., 207, 323 sq.; Pug.68. --°senāsana having one’s bed & seat at the foot of a tree for meditative practices as a recluse Vin.I,58 (as one of the 4 nissayas: piṇḍiy’ālopa-bhojana, paṁsukūla-cīvara, r.-m. s., pūti-mutta bhesajja), 96 (id.); A.IV,231. --mūlika (a) one who lives at the foot of a tree, an open air recluse M.I,282; III,41; A.III,219; J.IV,8 (āraññaka, paṇṇasālaṁ akatvā r., abbhokāsika); (b) belonging to the practice of a recluse living under a tree “tree rootman’s practice” (Vism.trslⁿ 84); as °aṅga one of the (13) dhutaṅga-practices; i. e. practices for a scrupulous way of living Vism.59, 74, 75 (mentioned between the ārannik’aṅga & the abbhokāsik’- aṅga). --mūlikatta the practice of living (alone) under a tree M.III,41 (mentioned with paṁsukūlikatta & piṇḍapātikatta); A.III,109 (id.). --sunakha “tree dog,” a cert. animal J.VI,538 (C. in explⁿ of naḷa-sannibha “reed-coloured”). --susira a hollow tree PvA.62. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rumbhati: {'def': '[so read for rumhati (Trenckner, Notes 59⁹; the root is another form of rudh (as in Prk.): see rundhati. The Dhtm (547) defines by “uppīḷana”] to obstruct, surround, besiege (=rundhati 3) J.VI,391 (where spelling rumhati; in phrase nagaraṁ r.). See also ni°, sanni°. -- pp. rūḷha. (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rumhaniya: {'def': 'at M.I,480 is doubtful in spelling. The meaning is clearly “furthering growth, making or being prosperous, bringing luck” (comb^d with ojavant), as also indicated by v. l. ruḷh°. Thus it cannot belong to rumbh, but must represent either rup, as given under ruppati in meaning “ropana” (Dhtm 837), or ruh (see rūhati). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsl^s “tot groei geschikt” (i. e. able to grow), Neumann, “erquickend” (i. e. refreshing). (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rumma: {'def': '(adj.) [put down (rightly) by Geiger, P.Gr. § 53 as different fr. Sk. rukma (shining); Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 12 tried the etym. rumma=Sk. rumra “tawny,” oṛ rukma (rukmin) shiny. It is still an unsolved problem. It may not be far off to trace a relation (by miswriting, dissimilation or false analogy) to ruppa in sense of ruppati, or to ruj, or even rudda. The C. explⁿ of all the rumma- & rummin passages is anañjita, i. e. unkempt] miserable, dirty, poorly, in cpds. °rūpin J.IV,387 (=lūkhavesa C.), with v. l. duma°; and °vāsin poorly dressed J.IV,380. (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rummin: {'def': '=rumma (dirty-soiled) J.IV,322 (v. l. dummi); VI,194 (do.). (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rundhana: {'def': '【中】预防，关押。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】预防，关押。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rundhati: {'def': '(rudh+ṁ-a), 防止，阻隔，围困，监禁。【过】rundhi。【过分】rundhita, ruddha。【独】rundhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(rudh + ŋ-a), 防止，阻隔，围困，监禁。【过】 ~dhi。【过分】rundhita, ruddha。【独】 ~dhitvā。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[rundh or rudh, both roots in Vedic Sk. -- Dhtp (375, 425) expl^s by “āvaraṇe”; id. Dhtm (608, 662).] 1. to restrain, hinder, prevent, obstruct, keep out Cp. III,10⁷; Miln.313 (+upa°). -- 2. to conceal, hide, cover up Th.2, 238 (ppr. rundhanto); PvA.88 (ppr. rundhamāna). -- 3. in phrase nagaraṁ r. to surround or besiege a town J.I,409 (aor. rundhi); III,159 (°itvā); IV,230 (°iṁsu). -- Pass rujjhati; pp. ruddha & rūḷha. ‹-› See also upa°, paṭi° paṭivā, vi°, Note. The roots rudh & rundh are also found in Prk. (see Pischel § 507); besides we have a by-form rubh in Prk. as well as in Pāli: see Pischel, § 266, 507, and P. rumbhati. (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruppa: {'def': 'in ruppa-rūpakaṁ (nt.) Th.2, 394 is not clear. It refers to something which is not rūpa, yet pretends to be rūpa, i. e. a sham performance or show. Thus ruppa may correspond to *rūpya & with rūpaka mean “having the form (i. e. the appearance) of form, i. e. substantiality. “ The Cy. (ThA.259) interprets as “rūpiya-rūpasadisaṁ sāraṁ sāraṁ upaṭṭhahantaṁ asāran ti attho”; and Mrs. Rh. D. (Sisters, p. 154) trsl^s: “deluded by puppet shows (seen in the midst of the crowd).” Ruppati [rup=lup, one of the rare cases of P. r. representing a Sk. 1., whereas the opposite is frequent. The same sound change Idg., as Lat. rumpo to break corresponds to Sk. lumpati. Besides we find the Sk. form ropayati to break off. -- The root has nothing to do with rūpa, although the P. Commentators combine these two. -- Cp. also Sk. ropa hole; Ags. rēofan to break, rēaf (theft)= Ger. raub, rauben, and many other cognates (see Walde s. v. rumpo). -- The root rup is def^d at Dhtm by nās, i. e. to destroy; another rup is given at Dhtm 837 in meaning “ropana”] to be vexed, oppressed, hurt, molested (always with ref. to an illness or pain) Sn.767 (salla-viddho va r.) 1121; Nd¹ 5 (=kuppati, ghaṭṭiyati, pīḷiyati); Nd² 543 (=kuppati pīḷayati ghaṭayati). -- ppr. Gen. ruppato S.I,198 (salla-viddhassa r.; expl^d at K.S. 320 by “ghaṭṭan-atthena”)= Sn.331 (reads salla-viddhāna ruppataṁ, i. e. pl. instead of sg.); Th.1, 967 (salla-viddhassa ruppato (C. sarīravikāraṁ āpajjato, Brethren, 338); J.II,437 (C. ghaṭṭiyamāna pīḷiyamāna)=Vism.49 (dukkhitassa r.); J.III,169 (salla-viddhassa r.=ghaṭṭiyamāna C.). --ruppati to Pāli exegesis with its fondness of allegorical (“orthodox”) interpretation, is the etym. base of rūpa, thus at S.III,86: “ruppatī ti tasmā rūpan ti vuccati kena r.? sītena, uṇhena etc. (all kinds of material dukkha: dukkha II.3^b) ruppati.” -- Or at Sn.1121 (ruppanti rūpena), & at other passages given under rūpa (A). See also ruppana. (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruppana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. rup) molestation, vexation, trouble J.III,368 (=ghaṭṭana dūsana kuppana C.). Frequent in allegorical exegesis of rūpa, e. g. at DhsA.52 (naman’aṭṭhena nāmaṁ ruppan’aṭṭhena rūpaṁ), 303 (rūp’ādīhi ruppana-bhāva-dīpana); VbhA.4 (ruppan’aṭṭhena rūpaṁ in explⁿ of passage S.III,86 (mentioned under ruppati); KhA 78, 79 (ruppan’aṭṭhena . . . rūpaṁ rūpaṁ ti vuccati). (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】持续的变化。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】持续的变化。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ruppati: {'def': '(rup+ya；rup=lup),被恼怒(to be vexed)，被改变(to be changed)。【过】ruppi。【现分】ruppamāna。《大义释注》(Nd1A., CS:p.11)：ruppatīti kuppati ghaṭṭīyati pīḷīyati, bhijjatīti attho.(‘被破坏’︰干扰、敲击、逼迫、破碎之意。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(rup + ya), 被恼怒，被改变。【过】 ruppi。【现分】 ruppamāna。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rurira: {'def': 'at Vv 40² is misprint for rucira. (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruru: {'def': '【阳】一种牡鹿。(p268)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic ruru: RV VI,75, 15] a sort of deer, a stag; usually called ruru-miga J.IV,256, 261; V,406 (pl. rohitā rurū), 416. Cp. ruruva. (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】一种牡鹿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rusita: {'def': '[pp. of ruṣ to be vexed. The Dhtp defines by “rose” (306, 450), “pārusiye” (626); Dhtm has 2 roots viz. one with “ālepe” (442), the other with “hiṁsāyaṁ” (443)] annoyed, irritated, offended Sn.932, 971 (expl^d by Nd¹ 498 as “khuṁsita, vambhita, ghaṭṭita” etc.). See rosa, roseti etc. (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruta: {'def': '【中】（鸟、兽等）叫，啼，嗥，鸣。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】(鸟、兽等)叫，啼，嗥，鸣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of ravati: see rava & ravati] noise, sound‹-› (ing); cry, singing Th.1, 1103; J.I,207 (T. reading ruda is expl^d in C. as ruta with °da for °ta: ta-kārassa dakāro kato); III,276 (sabba-ruta-jānana-manta: spell of knowing all animal-sounds; T. reads rūta; cp. sabbarāva-jānana J.III,415); VI,475 (rudaññu=ruta-jña C.; same meaning); Miln.178 (sakuṇa-ruta-ravita); VvA.(karavīka°). (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rutta: {'def': 'in du° & su° at DhsA.396 is to be read as dur- and su(r)--utta (see utta). (Page 573)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruyhati: {'def': 'is Med. of rūhati (rohati), q. v. (Page 574)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruṇ: {'def': 'a sound-particle, denoting a heavy fall, something like “thud” J.I,418. (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruṇṇa: {'def': '(rudati 的【过分】), 已哭泣，已悲叹。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(rudati‘哭’的【过分】), 已哭泣，已悲叹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Roṇṇa [pp. of rudati for Sk. rudita, after analogy of other roots in --d, as tud›tunna, pad›panna, nud› nunna. The BSk. forms are both ruṇḍa (Mvastu II.218, 224) and ruṇṇa (MVastu III,116); Prk. ruṇṇa (Pischel § 566). See rudati & cp. āruṇṇa] 1. (pp.) crying, in combⁿ ruṇṇa-mukha with tearful face J.VI,525 (C. rudam°); Miln.148. -- 2. (nt.) weeping, crying, lamentation Th.1, 554; A.I,261; Sn.584 (+soka); Pv.I,4³; Milo 357. As roṇṇa at A.IV,197, 223; Th.1, 555; J.III,166. (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruṭhati: {'def': 'see luṭhati & cp. rudda. (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ruṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of ruṣ; Sk. ruṣṭa] vexed, cross, enraged J.IV,358 (opp. to tuṭṭha v. l. atuṭṭha) V,211 (gloss kuddha); Dāvs III,37. (Page 572)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(russati 的【过分】), 已恼怒，已激怒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(russati 的【过分】), 已恼怒，已激怒。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rādheti: {'def': '² [rādh? Given at Dhtp 424 & Dhtm 656 in meaning “hiṁsāyaṁ,” i. e. of hurting] no refs. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of rādh to succeed, rādhyate. The root is given at Dhtp 420 & Dhtm 656 in meaning “saṁsiddhiyaṁ,” i. e. of success. See etym. at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. reor.] to please: see cpds. abhi° apa°, ā°, vi°. (Page 570)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rāga: {'def': '[cp. Sk. rāga, fr. raj: see rajati] 1. colour, hue; colouring, dye Vin.II,107 (aṅga° “rougeing” the body: bhikkhū aṅgarāgaṁ karonti); ThA.78; SnA 315 (nānāvidha°). -- 2 (as t. t. in philosophy & ethics) excitement, passion; seldom by itself, mostly in combⁿ with dosa, & moha, as the three fundamental blemishes of character: passion or lust (uncontrolled excitement), ill-will (anger) and infatuation (bewilderment): see dosa² & moha; cp. sarāga. -- These three again appear in manifold comb^ns with similar terms, all giving var. shades of the “craving for existence” or “lust of life” (taṇhā etc.), or all that which is an obstacle to nibbāna. Therefore the giving up of rāga is one of the steps towards attaining the desired goal of emancipation (vimutti). -- Some of the comb^ns are e. g. the 3 (r. d. m.)+kilesa; +kodha; very often fourfold r. d. m. with māna, these again with diṭṭhi: see in full Nd² s. v. rāga (p. 237), cp. below ussada. -- Of the many passages illustrating the contrast rāga›nibbāna the foll. may be mentioned: chandarāga vinodanaṁ nibbānapadaṁ accutaṁ Sn.1086; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṁ vuccati amataṁ S.V,8; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṁ vuccati nibbānaṁ S.IV,251; ye ‘dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṁ bhavararāganu-sayañ ca pahāya . . . parinibbāna-gatā Vv 53²⁴; kusalo jahati pāpakaṁ . . . rāga dosa-mohakkhayā parinibbuto Ud.85. -- Personified, Rāga (v. l. Ragā), Taṇhā & Arati are called the “daughters of Māra” (Māradhītā): Sn.835; DhA.III,199; Nd¹ 181. -- For further detail of meaning & application see e. g. -- (1) with dosa & moha: D.I,79, 156; III,107, 108, 132; S.I,184; IV,139, 195, 250, 305; V,84, 357 sq.; M.II,138 (rasa° the excitement of taste); A.I,52, 156 sq., 230 sq.; II,256; III,169, 451 sq.; IV,144; It.56, 57; Vism.421; VbhA.268, 269 (sa° & vīta°). -- (2) in other connection: D.III,70, 74, 146, 175, 217, 234 (arūpa°), 249 (cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati); S.II,231=271 (cittaṁ anuddhaṁseti); III,10; IV,72, 329; V,74 (na rāgaṁ jāneti etc.); A.II,149 (tibba-rāga-jātiko rāgajaṁ dukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti); III,233, 371 (kāmesu vīta°); IV,423 (dhamma°); Sn.2, 74, 139, 270=S.I,207 (+dosa); Sn.361, 493, 764, 974, 1046; Dh.349 (tibba°= bahala-rāga DhA.IV,68); Ps.I,80 sq.; II,37 (rūpa°), 95 (id.); Vbh.145 sq. (=taṇhā), 368 (=kiñcana), 390; Tikp 155, 167; DA.I,116. -- Opp. virāga.

--aggi the fire of passion D.III,217; S.IV,19; It.92 (r. dahati macce ratte kāmesu mucchite; +dosaggi & mohaggi); J.I,61 (°imhi nibbute nibbutaṁ nāma hoti). --ânusaya latent bias of passion (for=Dat.) S.IV,205 (the 3 anusayas: rāga°, paṭigha°, avijjā°); It.80 (yo subhāya dhātuyā rāgo so padūyati). --ussada conceit of lust, one of the 7 ussadas (r. d. m., māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, kamma) Nd¹ 72. --kkhaya the decay (waning) of p. S.III,51, 160: IV.142, 250, 261; V,8, 16, 25; VbhA.51 sq. --carita one whose habit is passion, of passionate behaviour Miln.92; Vism.105 sq. (in det.), 114 (+dosa°, moha°), 193; KhA 54 (colour of the blood of his heart, cp. Vism.409) --ṭṭhānīya founded on passion A.I,264; AA 32. --patha way of lust, lustfulness, passion, sensuality S.IV,70; Sn.370, 476 (with explⁿ “rāgo pi hi duggatīnaṁ pathattā rāgapatho ti vuccati” SnA 410). --rati passionate or lustful delight DhA.III,112; --ratta affected with passion S.I,136; Sn.795 (as °rāgin, cp. Nd¹ 100=kāma-guṇesu ratta). (Page 567)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】颜色，色，染料，肉欲，执着。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】贪欲的毁灭。~ggi, 【阳】欲火。 ~carita, 【形】好色的行为。 ~ratta, 【形】起好色心的。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vi离+rāga‹raj(著色)梵巴同) see rajati),【阳】1.顔色，染料(color, hue; coloring, dye)。2.染，染著，肉欲(excitement, passion)。rañjan’aṭṭhena rāgo(找乐子之义为‘染’) (DhsA 363)。rāgakkhaya,【阳】染尽，贪染的毁灭。rāgaggi,【阳】欲火。rāgacarita,【形】好色的行为。rāgaratta,【形】起好色心的。sarāga,【形】有染的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rāgin: {'def': '(-°) [fr. rāga] one who shows passion for, possessed of lust, affected with passion Sn.795 (cp. Nd¹ 100); S.I,136; Vism.193, 194 (with var. characterisations). (Page 568)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Rāgī: {'def': '【形】好色的。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】好色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rāhaseyyaka: {'def': '【形】隐蔽的，秘密的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [rahas+seyya+ka or rāha (for rahā°)+seyyaka] “having one’s bed in loneliness,” living in seclusion or secrecy, in manussa° “fit to lie undisturbed by men” Vin.I,39 (+paṭisallāna-sāruppa); M.II,118. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】隐蔽的，秘密的。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rāhu: {'def': '【阳】罗睺(阿修罗王的名字)，月蚀，日蚀。rāhumukha,【中】罗睺口刑(一种处罚)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic rāhu] N. of an Asura: see under Proper Names. --rāhumukha “mouth of Rāhu,” designation of a certain punishment for criminals (M.I,87; III,164; Nd¹ 154 (in list of tortures)=Nd² 604=Miln.197. (Page 571)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】罗睺（阿修罗王的名字），月蚀，日蚀。 ~mukha, 【中】罗睺口刑（一种处罚）。(p267)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Rāhula: {'def': '（比库名）拉胡喇，（古音译：）罗睺罗，罗云', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Rāja: {'def': '【阳】国王。 ~kakudhabhaṇḍa, 【中】皇室的徽章，王位的标志（如王冠等）。 ~kathā, 【阴】王论。 ~kammika, 【阳】政府官员。 ~kumāra,【阳】王子。 ~kumārī, ~kaññā, 【阴】公主。 ~kula, 【中】王室，王宫。 ~geha, ~bhavana, ~mandira, 【中】王宫。 ~āṅgaṇa, 【中】宫殿的庭院。 ~daṇḍa, 【阳】国王谕旨的处罚。 ~dāya, 【阳】王室礼物。 ~dūta,【阳】国王的报信者或外交使节。 ~devī, 【阴】王妃（国王的配偶）。~dhamma, 【阳】王法（国王的职责）。 ~dhāni, 【阴】王城。 ~dhītu,~puttī, 【阴】公主。 ~nivesana, 【中】国王的住所。 ~antepura, 【中】王室闺房，宫殿场所。 ~parisā,【阴】国王的随行人员，王室集会。 ~putta,【阳】王子。 ~purisa, 【阳】属于国王的人。 ~porisa, 【中】公职。 ~bali,【阳】国王抽的税。 ~bhaṭa, 【阳】军人。 ~bhaya, 【中】来自国王的恐惧。 ~bhogga, 【形】适合被国王用的。 ~mahāmatta, 【阳】总理，大臣，宰相。 ~mahesī, 【阴】皇后。 ~muddā, 【阴】王印。 ~ratha, 【阳】皇家马车。 ~vara, 【阳】高贵的国王。 ~vallabha, 【形】熟悉国王的，国王喜欢的事物。 ~sampatti, 【阴】国王的光彩壮丽。(p266)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(rājan)(cp. Vedic rājā),【阳】国王(king)，统治者(a ruling potentate)。单.主.rājā；复.主rājāno；单.呼.rāja﹑rājā；复.呼rājāno；单.宾.rājānaṁ﹑rājaṁ；复.宾.rājano；单.具.rāja﹑rājinā [梵rajña]﹑rājena；复.具.raññābhi﹑rājûhi﹑rājehi；单.离.rāññā﹑rājamhā﹑rājasmā；复.离.raññābhi﹑rājûhi﹑rājehi；单.与.﹑属.rāñño [梵rājñah]﹑raññassa﹑rājino；复.与.﹑属.raññaṁ[梵rājñaṁ]﹑rājūnaṁ﹑rājānaṁ；单.处raññe﹑raññi﹑rājamhi﹑rājasmiṁ；复.处.rājusu﹑rājesu。rājakakudhabhaṇḍa,【中】皇室的徽章，王位的标志(如王冠等)。rājakathā,【阴】王论。rājakammika,【阳】政府官员。rājakumāra, rājaputta﹐【阳】王子(prince)。rājakumārī, rājakaññā, rājadhītā﹐【阴】公主(princess)。rājakula,【中】王室，王宫。Rājageha,【中】王舍(城)。rājabhavana, rājamandira,【中】王宫。rājāṅgaṇa,【中】宫殿的庭院。rājadaṇḍa,【阳】国王谕旨的处罚。rājadāya,【阳】王室礼物。rājadūta,【阳】国王的报信者或外交使节。rājadevī,【阴】王妃(国王的配偶)。rājadhamma,【阳】王法。rājadhāni,【阴】王城。rājadhītu, rājaputtī,【阴】公主。rājanivesana,【中】国王的住所。rājantepura,【中】王室闺房，宫殿场所。rājaparisā,【阴】国王的随行人员，王室集会。rājaputta,【阳】王子。rājapurisa,【阳】国王的人。rājaporisa,【中】公职。rājabali,【阳】国王抽的税。rājabhaṭa,【阳】军人。rājabhaya,【中】对国王的恐惧。rājabhogga,【形】适合被国王用的。rājamahāmatta,【阳】总理，大臣，宰相。rājamahesī, rājinī,【阴】皇后，王后(queen)，cf. mahesī。rājamuddā,【阴】王印。rājaratha,【阳】皇家马车。rājavara,【阳】高贵的国王。rājavallabha,【形】熟悉国王的，国王喜欢的事物。rājasampatti,【阴】国王的光彩壮丽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājadhamma: {'def': '【阳】王法(国王的职责)。dasa rājadhammā(dasasu rājadhammesu),【阳】十王法；J.v.534.(JA.III,274., III,320., III,412., *V,378.)︰“1Dānaṁ 2sīlaṁ 3pariccāgaṁ, 4ajjavaṁ 5maddavaṁ 6tapaṁ; 7akkodhaṁ 8avihiṁsañca, 9khantiñca 10avirodhanaṁ.(一、布施。二、持戒。三、大舍施。四、诚实。五、文雅(温和)。六、热心。七、无瞋。八、无害。九、忍耐。十、无敌意。) JA.534./.V,378.︰Dānādīsu dasavatthukā cetanā dānaṁ, pañcasīladasasīlāni sīlaṁ, deyyadhammacāgo (V,379.) pariccāgo, ujubhāvo ajjavaṁ, mudubhāvo maddavaṁ, uposathakammaṁ tapo, mettāpubbabhāgo akkodho, karuṇāpubbabhāgo avihiṁsā, adhivāsanā khanti, avirodho avirodhanaṁ.(一、布施︰(施舍)财等十类的心。二、持戒︰受持五戒、十戒。三、大舍施︰作正法之施。四、诚实︰正直。五、温和︰柔软。六、热心︰布萨法(於斋戒日受八戒)。七、无瞋︰慈的前方便。八、无害︰悲的前方便。九、忍耐︰坚忍。十、无敌意︰无敌对。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Rājagaha: {'def': '(梵Rājagrha, Rajagriha; 今称Rajgir),【中】王舍(城)，今位於印度比哈尔省(Indian state of Bihar, Located at 25.03° N 85.42° E )，巴特那市(Patna)南侧。平均海拔73公尺( metres =239 feet)，四周有五山围绕。频婆娑罗王时，由上茅宫城(Kuwāgrapura，又称旧王舍城)迁都至此。摩羯陀国(Magadha)之都城，本城出土遗留陶瓷，可以追溯至西元前1000年，但是当时人类活动的实情尚为无知。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Rājagṛha] 王舎城, 羅閱祇, [マガダ国の首都].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】